LO955 Batch Management

LO955










Release 470 17.12.2004





LO955 Batch Management ....................................................................................................................................... 0-1
Copyright ............................................................................................................................................................... 0-2
Materials Management ...................................................................................................................................... 0-3
Prerequisites....................................................................................................................................................... 0-4
Target Group...................................................................................................................................................... 0-5
Course Overview................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Course Goals...................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Course Objectives.............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Course Content (1) ............................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Course Content (2) ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Course Overview: Diagram (1)......................................................................................................................... 1-6
Course Overview: Overview Diagram (2)........................................................................................................ 1-7
Main Business Scenario .................................................................................................................................... 1-8
Introduction............................................................................................................................................................ 2-1
Introduction: Unit Objectives............................................................................................................................ 2-2
Introduction: Course Overview Diagram (1).................................................................................................... 2-3
Introduction: Overview Diagram (2) ................................................................................................................ 2-4
Business Background ........................................................................................................................................ 2-5
Integration of Batch Management..................................................................................................................... 2-6
Batch Management in Logistics........................................................................................................................ 2-7
Introduction: Unit Summary ............................................................................................................................. 2-8
Master Data............................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Master Data: Unit Objectives............................................................................................................................ 3-2
Master Data: Course Overview Diagram.......................................................................................................... 3-3
Master Data: Business Scenario........................................................................................................................ 3-4
Business Definition of ....................................................................................................................................... 3-5
The Term........................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Master Data Structure........................................................................................................................................ 3-7
Master Data Structure........................................................................................................................................ 3-8
Material Master Record and Batch Master Record .......................................................................................... 3-9
Assignment of Batch Number......................................................................................................................... 3-10
Batch Creation................................................................................................................................................. 3-11
Master Data: Unit Summary ........................................................................................................................... 3-12
Exercise Data Sheet ......................................................................................................................................... 3-13
Master Data Exercises..................................................................................................................................... 3-16
Master Data Solutions ..................................................................................................................................... 3-18
Batch Levels .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Batch Levels: Unit Objectives .......................................................................................................................... 4-2
Batch Levels: Course Overview Diagram........................................................................................................ 4-3
Batch Levels: Business Scenario ..................................................................................................................... 4-4
Batch Unique per Material Number and Plant.................................................................................................. 4-5


Batch Unique per Material Number.................................................................................................................. 4-6
Batch Unique per Client and Material Number................................................................................................ 4-7
Customizing....................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
Procedure Following a Change in the Batch Level .......................................................................................... 4-9
Batch Levels: Summary .................................................................................................................................. 4-10
Batch Specification................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
Batch Specification: Unit Objectives................................................................................................................ 5-2
Batch Specification: Course Overview Diagram.............................................................................................. 5-3
Batch Specification: Business Scenario............................................................................................................ 5-4
Integration.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Batch Classification........................................................................................................................................... 5-6
Characteristic Inheritance.................................................................................................................................. 5-7
Batch Classification and Characteristic Inheritance......................................................................................... 5-8
Maintaining Master Data I ................................................................................................................................ 5-9
Maintaining Master Data II ............................................................................................................................. 5-10
Customizing: Tips and Tricks ......................................................................................................................... 5-11
Batch Specification: Unit Summary ............................................................................................................... 5-12
Batch Specification Exercises ......................................................................................................................... 5-13
Batch Specification Solutions ......................................................................................................................... 5-17
Batch Status Management ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Batch Status Management: Objectives ............................................................................................................. 6-2
Batch Status Mgmt: Course Overview Diagram.............................................................................................. 6-3
Batch Status Management: Business Scenario................................................................................................ 6-4
Business Background ........................................................................................................................................ 6-5
Integration.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
How Batch Status Management Works ............................................................................................................ 6-7
Example ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-8
Tips & Tricks 1.................................................................................................................................................. 6-9
Tips & Tricks 2................................................................................................................................................ 6-10
Batch Status Management: Summary............................................................................................................. 6-11
Batch Status Management Exercises .............................................................................................................. 6-12
Batch Status Management Solutions.............................................................................................................. 6-14
Availability Check for Batches ............................................................................................................................. 7-1
Availability Check: Unit Objectives................................................................................................................. 7-2
Availability Check: Overview Diagram........................................................................................................... 7-3
Availability Check: Business Scenario............................................................................................................. 7-4
Batch Definition and Availability Check.......................................................................................................... 7-5
Availability Check and Status Management..................................................................................................... 7-6
Availability Check: Summary........................................................................................................................... 7-7
Batch Determination.............................................................................................................................................. 8-1
Batch Determination: Unit Objectives.............................................................................................................. 8-2
Batch Determination: Course Overview Diagram............................................................................................ 8-3


Batch Determination: Business Scenario.......................................................................................................... 8-4
Batch Determination in the Logistics Process .................................................................................................. 8-5
Principal of Batch Determination...................................................................................................................... 8-6
Batch Determination for Goods Movements .................................................................................................... 8-7
Batch Determination in Production................................................................................................................... 8-8
Batch Determination in Sales............................................................................................................................ 8-9
Batch Determination in Sales.......................................................................................................................... 8-10
Batch Determination in Warehouse Management .......................................................................................... 8-11
Batch Determination in Warehouse Management .......................................................................................... 8-12
Batch Determination: Application Master Data ............................................................................................. 8-13
How Customizing and the Applications Are Linked...................................................................................... 8-14
Settings in Customizing................................................................................................................................... 8-15
Condition Technique in Batch Determination................................................................................................ 8-16
Batch Determination: Unit Summary ............................................................................................................. 8-17
Batch Determination Exercises ....................................................................................................................... 8-18
Batch Determination Solutions ....................................................................................................................... 8-31
Price Determination............................................................................................................................................... 9-1
Price Determination: Objectives ....................................................................................................................... 9-2
Price Determination: Course Overview Diagram............................................................................................. 9-3
Price Determination: Business Scenario........................................................................................................... 9-4
Functionality...................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Condition Technique in Pricing for Batches..................................................................................................... 9-6
Display in Billing Document............................................................................................................................. 9-7
Partial Stocks and Their Combinations............................................................................................................. 9-8
Structure of Valuation for a Single Batch......................................................................................................... 9-9
Price Determination: Summary....................................................................................................................... 9-10
Shelf Life Expiration Date .................................................................................................................................. 10-1
Shelf Life Expiration Date: Unit Objectives................................................................................................... 10-2
Shelf Life Expiration Date: Overview Diagram............................................................................................. 10-3
Shelf Life Expiration Date: Business Scenario............................................................................................... 10-4
Business Background ...................................................................................................................................... 10-5
Integration........................................................................................................................................................ 10-6
Shelf Life Expiration Date Check in Goods Receipt...................................................................................... 10-7
Central Fields in the Purchase Order .............................................................................................................. 10-8
Calculation of the Shelf Life Expiration Date ................................................................................................ 10-9
SLED Check in Batch Determination........................................................................................................... 10-10
Shelf Life Expiration Date: Summary .......................................................................................................... 10-11
Shelf Life Expiration Date Exercises............................................................................................................ 10-12
Shelf Life Expiration Date Solutions........................................................................................................... 10-15
Batch Where-used List ........................................................................................................................................ 11-1
Batch Where-used List: Objectives................................................................................................................. 11-2
Batch Where-used List: Overview Diagram.................................................................................................. 11-3


Business Scenario............................................................................................................................................ 11-4
Business Background ...................................................................................................................................... 11-5
Batch Tracking over Several Manufacturing Levels...................................................................................... 11-6
Batch Where-used List for Trading Goods..................................................................................................... 11-7
Batch Where-used List: Summary .................................................................................................................. 11-8
Batch Specification and Quality Management ................................................................................................... 12-1
Batch Specification: Unit Objectives............................................................................................................. 12-2
Batch Specification: Overview Diagram....................................................................................................... 12-3
Batch Specification: Business Scenario......................................................................................................... 12-4
Quality Management (QM) Inspections in Logistics ..................................................................................... 12-5
Simplified Batch Maintenance with QM........................................................................................................ 12-6
Creating a Material Specification.................................................................................................................... 12-7
Setting up QM Insp. Data in the Mat. Master Record.................................................................................... 12-8
Transfer of Inspection Results ........................................................................................................................ 12-9
Example: Quality Inspection upon GR from Production ............................................................................. 12-10
Batch Specification: Summary..................................................................................................................... 12-11
Batch Specification and Quality Management Exercises............................................................................. 12-12
Batch Specification and Quality Management Solutions............................................................................. 12-16
Appendix: Batch Creation in Process Manufacturing ........................................................................................ 13-1
Appendix: Batch Creation: Unit Objectives ................................................................................................... 13-2
Appendix: Batch Creation Overview Diagram............................................................................................... 13-3
Appendix: Batch Creation Business Scenario ................................................................................................ 13-4
Process Flow.................................................................................................................................................... 13-5
Inspection During Production: Master Data ................................................................................................... 13-6
Inspection During Production: Master Recipe................................................................................................ 13-7
Inspection During Production: Material Master ............................................................................................. 13-8
Inspection During Production: Mat. Specification......................................................................................... 13-9
Master Recipe and Material Specification.................................................................................................... 13-10
Master Recipe and Material Specification.................................................................................................... 13-11
Checks in the Production Process ................................................................................................................. 13-12
Creation of Partial Lots ................................................................................................................................. 13-13
Relationship Between Partial Lots and Batches ........................................................................................... 13-14
Batch Number Assignment ........................................................................................................................... 13-15
Appendix: Batch Creation: Summary........................................................................................................... 13-16
Optimized Batch Processing ............................................................................................................................... 14-1
Optimized Batch Processing: Unit Objectives................................................................................................ 14-2
Optimized Batch Processing: Overview Diagram.......................................................................................... 14-3
Optimized Batch Processing: Business Scenario ........................................................................................... 14-4
Mass-Processing of Batches............................................................................................................................ 14-5
Batch Information Cockpit: Introduction........................................................................................................ 14-6
Batch Information Cockpit: Screen Layout .................................................................................................... 14-7
Batch Information Cockpit: Navigation Area................................................................................................. 14-8


Batch Information Cockpit: Selection Area.................................................................................................... 14-9
User Settings.................................................................................................................................................. 14-10
Optimized Batch Processing: Summary ....................................................................................................... 14-11
Optimized Batch Processing: Exercises........................................................................................................ 14-12
Optimized Batch Processing: Solutions........................................................................................................ 14-14
Introduction to Batch-specific Units of Measure................................................................................................ 15-1
Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Objectives................................................................................................. 15-2
Batch-specific Material UoMs: Overview Diagram....................................................................................... 15-3
Batch-specific Material UoMs: Business Scenario ........................................................................................ 15-4
Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Differences ............................................................................................... 15-5
Use of Active Ingredients................................................................................................................................ 15-6
Physical Quantity and Active Ingredient Quantity......................................................................................... 15-7
Calculating the Quantity.................................................................................................................................. 15-8
Prices for Active Ingredients........................................................................................................................... 15-9
Planned and Actual Active Ingredient Proportions ...................................................................................... 15-10
Use of Product Units ..................................................................................................................................... 15-11
Batch-Specific Calculation of the Product Quantity .................................................................................... 15-12
Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Summary ................................................................................................ 15-13
Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure.................................................................................................. 16-1
Integration: Unit Objectives............................................................................................................................ 16-2
Integration: Overview Diagram...................................................................................................................... 16-3
Integration: Business Scenario........................................................................................................................ 16-4
Batch Management Requirement as Prerequisite........................................................................................... 16-5
Batch-specific UoMs as an Attribute of a Batch ............................................................................................ 16-6
Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure.............................................................................................. 16-7
Batch-specific Units of Measure in Logistics................................................................................................. 16-8
Integration: Summary...................................................................................................................................... 16-9
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management ............................................................................................... 17-1
Data Concept: Unit Objectives........................................................................................................................ 17-2
Data Concept: Overview Diagram.................................................................................................................. 17-3
Data Concept: Business Scenario.................................................................................................................... 17-4
The Central Unit of Measure for Active Ingredients...................................................................................... 17-5
Relationship Between Units of Measure......................................................................................................... 17-6
Maint. of Units of Measurement in Customizing........................................................................................... 17-7
Percentage and User-defined Calculation....................................................................................................... 17-8
Linking of Master Data I ................................................................................................................................. 17-9
Linking of Master Data II.............................................................................................................................. 17-10
Active Ingredient Content in the Specification............................................................................................. 17-11
Active Ingredient Characteristic: Special Features....................................................................................... 17-12
Classification Maintenance in the Material Master ...................................................................................... 17-13
Maintaining Units of Measurement in Mat. Master ..................................................................................... 17-14
Activating Active Ingredient Mgmt in Customizing.................................................................................... 17-15


Data Concept: Summary ............................................................................................................................... 17-16
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-1 Exercises ..................................................................... 17-17
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-2 Exercises ..................................................................... 17-19
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-3 Exercises ..................................................................... 17-20
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-1 Solutions...................................................................... 17-22
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-2 Solutions...................................................................... 17-24
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-3 Solutions...................................................................... 17-25
Active Ingredient Prices ...................................................................................................................................... 18-1
Active Ingredient Prices: Unit Objectives ...................................................................................................... 18-2
Active Ingredient Prices: Overview Diagram................................................................................................. 18-3
Active Ingredient Prices: Business Scenario .................................................................................................. 18-4
Standard Price per Active Ingredient .............................................................................................................. 18-5
Valuation of Single Batches Based on Act. Ingredients................................................................................. 18-6
Valuation Based on Several Active Ingredients ............................................................................................. 18-7
Sales Price Based on Active Ingredients ........................................................................................................ 18-8
Active Ingredient Prices: Unit Summary........................................................................................................ 18-9
Active Ingredient Prices Exercises ............................................................................................................... 18-10
Active Ingredient Prices Solutions................................................................................................................ 18-13
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions.................................................................................................... 19-1
Actual and Planned Values: Unit Objectives.................................................................................................. 19-2
Actual and Planned Values: Overview Diagram............................................................................................ 19-3
Actual and Planned Values: Business Scenario.............................................................................................. 19-4
From Planned Value to Actual Value ............................................................................................................. 19-5
Planned and Actual Values in the Master Data .............................................................................................. 19-6
Inventory Correction Factor ............................................................................................................................ 19-7
Actual and Planned Values: Summary............................................................................................................ 19-8
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-1 Exercises............................................................................ 19-9
- ...................................................................................................................................................................... 19-11
TC .................................................................................................................................................................. 19-13
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-1 Solutions.......................................................................... 19-15
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-2 Solutions.......................................................................... 19-21
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-3 Solutions.......................................................................... 19-23
Data Concept in Product Quantity Management ................................................................................................ 20-1
Product Quantity Management: Unit Objectives............................................................................................ 20-2
Product Quantity Management: Overview Diagram...................................................................................... 20-3
Product Quantity Management: Business Scenario........................................................................................ 20-4
The Central Unit of Measure for Product Quantities ..................................................................................... 20-5
Relationship Between Units of Measure......................................................................................................... 20-6
Maint. of Units of Measurement in Customizing........................................................................................... 20-7
User-defined Calculation................................................................................................................................. 20-8
Linking of Master Data ................................................................................................................................... 20-9
Material Master Maintenance........................................................................................................................ 20-10


The Product Quantity in the Specification.................................................................................................... 20-11
Classification Maintenance in the Material Master ...................................................................................... 20-12
Maintaining Units of Measurement in Mat. Master ..................................................................................... 20-13
Activating Product Quantity Management ................................................................................................... 20-14
Product Quantity Management: Summary.................................................................................................... 20-15
Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Exercises ......................................................................... 20-16
Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Solutions.......................................................................... 20-19
Product Units - Stock Transfer............................................................................................................................ 21-1
Product Units of Measure: Unit Objectives.................................................................................................... 21-2
Product Units of Measure: Overview Diagram.............................................................................................. 21-3
Product Units of Measure: Business Scenario................................................................................................ 21-4
Quantity Conversion with Product Unit ......................................................................................................... 21-5
Quantity Conversion in Inventory Management ............................................................................................ 21-6
Stock Transfer – Cases.................................................................................................................................... 21-7
Stock Transfer with Product Unit ................................................................................................................... 21-8
Summary.......................................................................................................................................................... 21-9
Summary (1) ........................................................................................................................................................ 22-1
Summary (2) .................................................................................................................................................... 22-2
Recommended Follow-up Activities .............................................................................................................. 22-3
Appendix.............................................................................................................................................................. 23-1
Frequently-used Menu Paths........................................................................................................................... 23-2


© SAP AG 1999
LO955 Batch Management
© SAP AG
LO955
LO955
Batch Management
Batch Management



Þ R/3 System
Þ Release 4.6C
Þ September 2000
Þ 50040836




© SAP AG 2003
Copyright 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in
any form or for any purpose without the express permission of
SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.
All rights reserved.
Copyright



Trademarks:
Þ Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors.
Þ Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Þ IBM®, DB2®, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA, AIX®, S/390®,
AS/400®, OS/390®, OS/400®, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner,
WebSphere®, Netfinity®, Tivoli®, Informix and Informix® Dynamic ServerTM are trademarks of
IBM Corporation in USA and/or other countries.
Þ ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.
Þ UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
Þ Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,
VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of
Citrix Systems, Inc.
Þ HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide
Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Þ JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Þ JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for
technology invented and implemented by Netscape.
Þ MarketSet and Enterprise Buyer are jointly owned trademarks of SAP AG and Commerce One.
Þ SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, and other SAP products and services mentioned
herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in
Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names
mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies.


© SAP AG 1999
Materials Management
Processes in
Procurement
LO020 5 days
Inventory Management
LO510 3 days
Invoice Verification
3 days LO515
Consumption-Based
Planning and
Forecasting
LO525 2 days
Procurement of
External Services
LO540 2 days
Foreign Trade
LO640 3 days
QM in Procurement
LO715 2 days
KANBAN
LO235 2 days
Batch Management
LO955 3 days
Pricing in Purchasing
2 days LO521
Cross-Functional
Customizing in MM
5 days LO550
Purchasing Details and
Optimization
LO520 3 days
Cross-Application
Business Processes in
SD and MM
LO925 2 days
Level 2 Level 3





© SAP AG 1999
Prerequisites
¤ Six months' experience in one of the R/3 Logistics
applications - MM, SD, PP, or PP-PI.
¤ Basic knowledge of the classification system.





© SAP AG 1999
Target Group
¤ Audience:
ÞMembers of the project team
ÞProject team
ÞAdministrators
ÞMembers of user departments that are involved in Batch
Management
¤ Duration:3 days



Notes to the user
Þ The training materials are not teach-yourself programs. They complement the course instructor's
explanations. On the sheets, there is space for you to write down additional information.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 1-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Course Goals
¤ Course Objectives
¤ Course Content
¤ Course Overview Diagram
¤ Main Business Scenario
Contents:
Course Overview



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 1-2
© SAP AG 1999
This course will prepare you to:
¤ Use the Batch Management functionality
¤ Make the necessary Customizing settings for
Batch Management in the applications MM, SD,
PP, or PP-PI
Course Goals



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 1-3
© SAP AG 1999
At the conclusion of this course, you will understand
the following subjects of Batch Management:
¤ Master Data
¤ Customizing
The following are dealt with in detail:
¤ Batch Determination, Batch Status Management, and
the Batch Where-used List
¤ Basic data and the uses of Active Ingredient and
Product Quantity Management
Course Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 1-4
© SAP AG 1999
Unit 8 Batch Determination
Unit 9 Price Determination
Unit 10 Shelf Life Expiration Date
Unit 11 Batch Where-used List
Unit 12 Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Unit 1 Course Overview
Unit 2 Introduction
Unit 3 Master Data
Unit 4 Batch Levels
Unit 5 Batch Specification
Unit 6 Batch Status
Management
Unit 7 Availability Check for
Batches
Preface
Course Content (1)



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 1-5
© SAP AG 1999
Unit 18 Active Ingredient Prices
Unit 19 Actual and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Unit 20 Data Concept in Product
Quantity Management
Unit 21 Product Quantity
Units - Stock Transfers
Unit 22 Summary
Unit 13 Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Unit 14 Optimized Batch
Processing
Unit 15 Batch-specific Units of
Measure
Unit 16 Integration of Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Unit 17 Data Concept in Active
Ingredient Management
Course Content (2)
Appendix



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 1-6
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Course Overview: Diagram (1)
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch Status Mgmt
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 1-7
© SAP AG 1999
Course Overview: Overview Diagram (2)
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 1-8
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Your company is implementing SAP and Batch
Management.
¤ You are a member of the project team who has
expertise in sales, purchasing, production, or IT
and are assigned to configure Batch Management
in SAP.
Main Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 2-1
© SAP AG 1999
Introduction
¤ Business background
¤ Integration of Batch Management within the R/3 System
¤ Batch Management in Logistics
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 2-2
© SAP AG 1999
Introduction: Unit Objectives
¤ Provide a short overview about the relation of
Batch Management to its application in different
branches of industry
¤ Give information about general integration of this
functionality in the R/3 System
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 2-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check for
Batches
Introduction: Course Overview Diagram (1)
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch Status Mgmt
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 2-4
© SAP AG 1999
Introduction: Overview Diagram (2)
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 2-5
© SAP AG 1999
Business Background
¤It is mainly used in the following:
¤ Chemicals
¤ Pharmaceuticals
¤ Cosmetics
¤ Health and hygiene
¤ Foodstuffs
¤ Retail
¤ Batch Management can be used in ALL industries



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 2-6
© SAP AG 1999
R/3 R/3
FI FI
CO CO
AM AM
PS PS
WF WF
IS IS HR HR
PM PM
QM QM
PP PP
MM MM
SD SD
LO LO
R/3 integration model
Integration of Batch Management



Þ Batch management is a new module in the R/3 System in Release 3.0 and is a cross-application
development in Logistics. It is linked to Logistics applications, where it can be used irrespective of
the industry sector or branch of industry.
Þ In the R/3 System, it is therefore structured under the identification code "LO", standing for
"Logistics General".
Þ Its use does not restrict existing functionality in any way.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 2-7
© SAP AG 1999
SD Production Procurement
Warehouse management
Classification Classification
Batch Batch
m management anagement
Warehouse management
B
A
B
A
A
A A
Purchase
order
W/house
Process/
production
order
Sales order
W/house
Batch Management in Logistics



Þ Batch Management incorporates the entire logistics process, from procurement to sales.
Þ The new functionality works with all existing batch records.
Þ It is closely linked with classification, but can also be used without classification.
Þ You can only search for batches via the batch determination function if the batches are classified.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 2-8
© SAP AG 1999
Introduction: Unit Summary
¤ Provide a short overview about the relation of
Batch Management to its application in different
branches of industry
¤ Give information about general integration of this
functionality in the R/3 System
You are now able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-1
© SAP AG 1999
Master Data
¤ Batch Definition in the R/3 System
¤ The Term “Batch” in the SAP R/3 System
¤ Master Data Structure
¤ Material Master Record and Batch Master Record
¤ Assignment of Batch Number
¤ Batch Creation
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-2
© SAP AG 1999
Master Data: Unit Objectives
¤ Define the term “batch”
¤ Understand the requirements of Batch
Management for master data
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Master Data: Course Overview Diagram
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch Status Mgmt
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-4
© SAP AG 1999
Your company has be able to differentiate between
certain material stocks for one or more of the
following reasons:
¤ Traceability in the case of complaints/recall
situation
¤ Search via expiration date
¤ ISO certification
Master Data: Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-5
© SAP AG 1999
"A batch is a quantity of any drug produced
during a given cycle of manufacture.
The essence of a manufacturing batch is
therefore its homogeneity."
Food and Drug Administration
in 'Good Manufacturing Practice' (GMP)
Business Definition of "Batch"



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-6
© SAP AG 1999
Production lot
Charges
Batches
Process order/
production order
The Term “Batch” in the SAP System



Þ A production lot can be manufactured in several production runs.
Þ The same technical requirements apply to the entire production lot.
Þ The result of each production run is a batch.
Example:
In the chemical industry, you would use the term “production lot” if a material is manufactured in
several charges in a reactor according to the same process order. The result of each charge is a batch.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-7
© SAP AG 1999
Mat. no.
309-140
Batch 3
Mat. no.
309-140
Batch 1
Mat-no.
307-160
Batch A1
Mat-no.
308-188
Batch A1
Mat-no.
308-188
Batch A2 Mat-no.
308-188
Batch A3
Product: epoxy resin
Materials planning
Quality:
1 / 10 l
can
Mat-no.
307-160
Batch A2 Mat-no.
307-160
Batch A3
Quality: 2 / 50 l bar
Quality: 1 / 50 l bar
Mat. no.
309-140
Batch 2
Master Data Structure



Þ The definition of the term batch also influences the definition of the term material.
The following structure is recommended:
Þ All criteria making a batch reproducible are criteria of the batch material, and not of the batch itself.
Þ The batch record should contain only data that is unique to precisely this batch.
This specification identifies the batch as a non-reproducible unit.
Þ The advantage of organizing master data in this way is that it enables you to plan the different
models of a product individually. In the SAP R/3 System, materials are planned at material level and
not at batch level.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-8
© SAP AG 1999
Product: epoxy resin Product: epoxy resin
Material 309-140 Material 307-160 Material 308-188
Batch 2 Batch 3 Batch 1
Production date:
11.08.99
Production date:
11.01.99
Production date:
11.11.99
Master Data Structure



Þ The master data hierarchy shows...
º ...the product
Þ A generic term that does not exist as a master record in the SAP R/3 System. It is included in the
slide for illustrative purposes only.
º ...the materials
Þ The product, which remains the same, is packed in different containers, has different quality classes,
or similar. It is distinguished by means of material numbers.
º ...the batch
Þ Organizationally, the batches and their specification data are located below the material number.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-9
© SAP AG 1999
Material Material
308-188
Batch mgmt reqmt
C1
55/3b
Set the batch management
requirement indicator in the
material master record.
AXZ
4362-89
¤ Create the batch master
record manually or when
posting a goods movement.
¤ The batch can have any
alphanumeric number.
¤ This number can be
assigned either externally
or internally.
Material Master Record and Batch Master Record



Þ In the SAP R/3 System, batch master records always depend on material master records. We post
batches FOR a material.
Þ You must first create a material master record, stipulating in it that the material is to be handled in
batches. This means that you have to enter a batch number every time there is a goods movement.
Þ The indicator for batch requirement is contained in the following views of the material master
record: Sales and distribution, General plant data, Purchasing, Work scheduling, Storage 1, and
Warehouse management. Even if the indicator appears in several views, it is the same indicator. If it
is set in one of the views, it is displayed as being set in all the other views.
Þ If a material changes from a material that is not subject to batch requirement to one that is subject to
batch requirement, you have to post out all the stocks from the previous fiscal year, the current
period, and the previous period. You can then set the indicator for batch requirement and post the
stock back into the system in batches.
Þ The same applies when you cancel the batch requirement. In this case you also have to reorganize the
batch master records. You can then reset the indicator for batch requirement to blank and post the
stock back into the system.
Þ You can create a batch master record directly when maintaining master data. Alternatively, you can
specify the batch number upon the first goods movement for a batch. The system then creates the
batch master record in the background.
Þ Batch numbers can be assigned internally or externally. You can define alternative number ranges.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-10
© SAP AG 1999
Change the number
range.
Customer Function Calls
1
1 1
2
2 2 Edit the assigned batch
number using variables
and templates.
Standard:
Internal
External
Assignment of Batch Number



Þ Customer function calls make it easier to customize the SAP R/3 System. This function module is
delivered empty and can be filled by customers with their own programs without having to modify
the source code. There are user exits for internal and external batch number assignment.
Þ Once you have run the following function modules for batch number assignment, the system will
assign batch numbers automatically without any further action on your part.
º EXIT_SAPLV01Z_001. You can use this exit to define your own number range object and/or
interval. You can create dependencies for particular variables (for example, for a plant or
material). The batch numbers can be numerical only.
º EXIT_SAPLV01Z_002. You can use this exit to change the number the system determines, or you
can use it to determine a number of your own, containing variables or templates. These numbers
can be alphanumeric.
Þ You can use the following function modules to control the manual entry of batch numbers:
º EXIT_SAPLV01Z_003. You can use this exit to replace the proposed number range object
BATCH_CLT and/or external interval 02 with a number range object and/or external interval of
your own.You can create dependencies for particular variables (for example, for a plant or
material).
º EXIT_SAPLV01Z_004. You can use this exit to define your own checking rules without being
restricted to a number range. If , for example, users assign batch numbers according to a particular
template, this exit ensures that the structure for batch number assignment is maintained.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-11
© SAP AG 1999
Production or process order Production or process order
Create batch master manually Create batch master manually Goods movement Goods movement
Automatic
batch numbers?
New order
Release order
Batch Creation
101
Automatic/
No
manual
creation
521
Automatic or
manual with
check against
external
number range
Raw matls
Manual without
check
Finished products
No new
creation



Þ Define creation upon goods movements or in batch master
You can define for each movement type whether a new batch is created upon a goods receipt and
how it is created. The following variations are possible:
º Automatic/manual without check (= delivery status as before)
º Automatic/manual with check against external number range
º Automatic/manual with check in customer exit
º Automatic/no manual creation
º Manual without check
º Manual with check against external number range
º Manual with check in customer exit
º No new creation
Þ Define creation for production/process order
You can make the following settings:
º Automatic creation of batch upon order creation or release
º Automatic classification upon batch creation
º Valuation of free characteristics of a batch to be specified
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-12
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Define the term “batch”
¤ Understand the requirements of Batch
Management for master data
You are now able to:
Master Data: Unit Summary



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-13
Exercise Data Sheet
Key to Icons in Exercises and Solutions


Exercises


Solutions


Objectives


Business Scenario


Tips & Tricks



Warning or Caution

Data Used in Exercises
Type of Data Data in Training System
Y-500 //
Y-500_##
Blue paint
T-HT2## Cetapharm-N (tablet)
T-HT1## Aspirin
AI-1201-0## Orange mixture type 334
AI-1202-0## Orange juice concentrate
AI-1200-0## Orange concentrate type 334
AI-1000-0## Fruit nectar 0.1 L
concentrate/liter
Materials
H2O Water
Class type 023 Batch
231 Batch class for paint
AICL00010## AI content %

Classes
AICL00010## Liter substance/ liter AI
Characteristics M001 Viscosity
M009 pH level
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-14
M010 Purity of color
M011 Covering
power
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-15

Type of Data Data in Training System
Characteristics M012 Label
M013 Available for:
AIC010## Active ingredient
AIC020## Active ingredient
KW1 KG active ingredient 1
KW2 KG active ingredient 2
Proportion unit
LW1 Liter active ingredient 1
LSL Liter of active ingredient 1 Ratios
%
ZMM1 Batch determination in
Inventory Management:
Mvt type/plant/mat.
ZSD1 Batch determination in Sales
and Distribution:
Customer/material
Strategy type
ZPI1 Batch determination for
production orders
Order type/plant/component
Order type PI01 Process order,
internal number assignment
Recipe group for matl T-HT2## T-TAB## Cetapharm-N (tablet)
Plant 1100 Berlin
Storage location 0001 Delivering warehouse
1000 C.E.B Berlin Vendor
100 Wald & Maier
Purchasing group 007 Lux, L.
Purchasing org. 1000 IDES Germany
Sales org. 1020 Berlin, Germany
Distribution channel 22 Industrial buyer
Customer 7777 Flatter & Asche AG
Düsseldorf


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-16
Master Data Exercises



Unit: Master Data
Topic: Creating a Batch-Managed Material


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a batch-managed material



Some materials in your company are handled in batches. When
the R/3 System is being implemented, you create these materials
in the system, using similar batch-managed materials as a
template.



There is a template for all the master data you create in the
exercises below. You can copy it if you wish. You can use
this, but put your own group number at the end of each
master record you create, and use your own data.
1-1 Create a new material master record
Create a new material master record. Copy all of material master record Y-500.
Use the following values:

Material: Y-500-##
Replace ## with your group number, for example 01.

Industry: Pharmaceuticals
Material type: Semi-finished product
Org. Levels Copy From:
Plant 1100 1100
Storage location 0001 0001
Sales organization 1020 1020
Distribution channel 22 22
Edit all views!
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-17
Save your material.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 3-18
Master Data Solutions



Unit: Master Data
Topic: Creating a Batch-Managed Material
1-1 Create a new material master record
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Create – General → Immediately
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Create - General → Immediately

Field name or data type Values
Material Y-500-##
Industry sector Pharmaceuticals
Material type Semi-finished product
Template Y-500

Views Values
Views All

Organizational levels Values (new material and
template)
Plant 1100
Storage location 0001
Sales organization 1020
Distribution channel 22

Edit all views before you save!
Save your material.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-1
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Levels
¤ Batch Unique per Material Number and Plant
¤ Batch Unique per Material Number
¤ Batch Unique per Client and Material Number
Customizing
¤ Procedure Following a Change in the Batch Level
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-2
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Levels: Unit Objectives
¤ List the levels at which batch numbers can be
valid.
¤ Explain the implications of setting the area of
validity of batches at each of the three levels
¤ Describe the requirements that must be satisfied
in the event of a change in the batch level
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Batch Levels: Course Overview Diagram
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch Status Mgmt
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-4
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Levels: Business Scenario
¤ Is the same material to be subject to a batch-
management requirement in one plant but not in
another?
¤ How are batch numbers currently structured?
¤ Is the SAP project international, so that it is essential
to be able to trace batch numbers exactly?
Your company has to decide which batch level best
suits its requirements considering the following
aspects:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-5
© SAP AG 1999
Material no. Material no. 309 309- -140 140 Material no. Material no. 308 308- -188 188
Plant 2
Batch A1 Batch A1 Batch A1 Batch A1
Plant 1 Plant 1 Plant 2
EXP.: 11.01.2000
VISCOSITY: 7
EXP.: 19.01.2000
VISCOSITY: 8
EXP.: 17.01.2000
VISCOSITY: 5
EXP.: 18.01.2001
VISCOSITY: 6
Batch Unique per Material Number and Plant



Þ If the batch level is set to Plant/Material in your system, the following applies:
Þ The batch number can be reassigned for a material with a different specification in each plant.
Þ However, you can transfer a stock from one plant to another between batches with the same number,
even though the batches do not necessarily have the same specification. In such cases, the batch
quantity transferred assumes the specification of the destination batch.
Þ If you want the batch specification to be unique across all plants, you can only achieve this through
organizational measures. The system does not support this. In this case, you are recommended to
switch to a higher batch level.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-6
© SAP AG 1999
Material no. Material no. 308 308- -188 188 Material no. Material no. 309 309- -140 140
EXP.: 17.01.2000
VISCOSITY: 5
Batch A1
Plant 1 Plant 2 Plant 1 Plant 2
EXP.: 11.01.2000
VISCOSITY: 7
Batch A1
Batch Unique per Material Number



Þ If the batch level is set to Material in your system, the following applies:
Þ A batch has the same specification for all plants at which a material is stored.
Þ The same batch number can be reassigned with a different specification for each material.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-7
© SAP AG 1999
Material no. Material no. 308 308- -188 188
Batch A1
EXP.: 11.05.2003
VISCOSITY: 7
A1
Batch A2
EXP.: 17.01.2002
VISCOSITY: 5
Batch Unique per Client and Material Number
Material no. Material no. 309 309- -140 140



Þ If the batch level is set to Client in the system:
Þ The same batch number can only be assigned once within the entire client.
Þ It is uniquely assigned to one material number.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-8
© SAP AG 1999
Batch level
Batch unique
at material level
Batch level
Batch unique at
client level
ONE-WAY
Batch level
Batch unique at
plant level
S
T
A
R
T
Customizing



Þ You can select the area of validity of batches in Customizing. You have three batch levels to choose
from. In the standard SAP R/3 System, the default setting is the plant level.
Þ You can switch to a higher level at any time. Switching back to a lower (more specific) level is so far
allowed only from client level to material level. You cannot go back to material/plant level. This is
due to the organization of the batch data which has to be converted whenever you switch batch level.
Batch status management is also affected by this change and has to be subsequently maintained.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-9
© SAP AG 1999
A1
B3
C4
B2
C3
B1
Reorganization
program
Batch
B1
B2
C4
C3
Plant 02
Material Material
308-188
Plant 01
Batch A1 B1 B2 B3 C3 C4
Material Material
308-188
Plant level
Material level
Plant level
Material level
Batch
A1
B2
B3
C4
Material Material
308-188
Procedure Following a Change in the Batch Level



Þ If a batch number has hitherto been unique in a plant but is now only to be unique for a material, this
change will have to be accompanied by a change in the batch numbers.
Þ Hitherto, the same batch number could be assigned for a material number in each plant. The batches
did not have to be identical since they were entirely independent of each other.
In the example, we assume that they have completely different specifications.
Þ Now you have to check whether identical batch numbers exist for the material in both plants. If this
is the case, you will have to prepare a reorganization.
An auxiliary program is automatically offered in Customizing as soon as a change in the batch level
has taken place. It determines all batches that occur in several plants.
It also allows you to carry out a test run and provides you with a log. This analysis must precede
actual batch reorganization. Only after a successful data update can batch management be used at the
new level.
Þ The batch number is unique for each material at the new batch level. A further distinction according
to plant is no longer made.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 4-10
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Levels: Summary
¤ List the levels at which batch numbers can be
valid.
¤ Explain the implications of setting the area of
validity of batches at each of the three levels
¤ Describe the requirements that must be satisfied
in the event of a change in the batch level
You are now able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-1
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Specification
¤ Integration
¤ Batch Classification
¤ Characteristic Inheritance
¤ Batch Classification and Characteristic Inheritance
¤ Maintenance of Master Data
¤ Customizing: Tips and Tricks
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-2
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Specification: Unit Objectives
¤ Prepare classification data so that Batch
Management can function properly
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Batch Specification: Course Overview Diagram
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch Status Mgmt
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-4
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Specification: Business Scenario
Your company chooses to classify its batches for
the following reasons:
Each of the reasons mentioned requires classified
batches.
¤ Batch determination
¤ Certificates of analysis
¤ Reporting



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-5
© SAP AG 1999
Batch management Batch management
Classification system
Batch Batch
Specification Specification
Class Class
Characteristics Characteristics
Integration



Þ You can use the classification system in conjunction with batch management.
The classification system and batch management are closely linked.
Þ The specification for a batch master record is based on a batch's classification.
The attributes (that is, the specifications) are stored as characteristic values.
Þ For batch management to function correctly, you must prepare the classification data to include the
corresponding batch specifications.
Þ You have to classify batches in order to use the batch determination function.
Þ The characteristics for materials managed in batches provide information for any kind of evaluations
on particular attributes of batches, whether in connection with quality issues, production issues, or
complaints.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-6
© SAP AG 1999
Material Material
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3 Class 3
Class 4
Class type Class type
"batches” "batches”
Batch Batch
Characteristics:
A, B, C
Batch Classification



Þ All classes used for batch classification are assigned to class type 022/023.
They are required for batch determination.
Þ The material and its batches must be classified via the same class. This ensures that the same
characteristics are used for the material and the batch. Characteristics can pass on their values by
inheritance.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-7
© SAP AG 1999
Material Material
Epoxy resin X Epoxy resin X
Batch Batch
Epoxy resin X1 Epoxy resin X1
Viscosity Viscosity
CHARACTERISTIC CHARACTERISTIC
12000 12000
11000 11000
10000 10000
9000 9000
8000 8000
7000 7000
6000 6000
5000 5000
10000 10000
9000 9000
8000 8000
7000 7000
Characteristic Inheritance



Þ If a batch inherits characteristics, the characteristic value of the batch can be no higher than the
inherited value range.
Þ In the example shown, batch X1 inherits the requirements for its characteristic value from material
X.
Þ The characteristic value of batch X1 cannot have a value interval greater than that of material X.
Þ A more limited interval will also be accepted if it is a partial quantity of the interval of
material X.
Þ A discreet value must be within the predefined interval.
Þ Classification allows lists of numerical or alphanumerical values, not just numeric value intervals.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-8
© SAP AG 1999
Material Material
Epoxy resin X Epoxy resin X
Class 3
Epoxy resin
¤ Viscosity 5000-12000
¤ Color 0-5
¤ Epoxy resin 23-25
¤ Volatile proportions 0.00-0.50
Class type “batches” Class type “batches”
Characteristics
¤ Viscosity at 25°
¤ Color
¤ Epoxy resin
¤ Volatile fraction
Batch Batch
Epoxy resin X1 Epoxy resin X1
¤ Viscosity 7250
¤ Color 1-3
¤ Epoxy resin 23-25
¤ Volatile fraction 0.30
Batch Classification and Characteristic Inheritance



Þ Since the characteristics are the same for the material and its batches, the characteristic values can be
passed on from the material to its batches by inheritance.
Þ Characteristic inheritance acts like a check mechanism. If ranges of values or fixed values are
defined for a characteristic of a class, they can be regarded as the sole values allowed for all objects
assigned to this class. This requires an indicator to be either set or not set in the characteristic master
record. It allows or disallows “additional values” that are not within the limits of the sets of values.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-9
© SAP AG 1999
Characteristics
¤ Viscosity at 25°
¤ Color
¤ Epoxy resin
¤ Volatile fraction
Class X
¤ Viscosity 5000-12000
¤ Color 0-5
¤ Epoxy resin 23-25
¤ Volatile proportions 0.00-0.50
Class X
Create the class.
Choose the class type
for batches.
Classification system
Assign the characteristics
to the class.
Create the characteristics.
Class type “batch” Class type “batch”
Maintaining Master Data I



Þ Since the specifications of a material and its batches are stored as classification data, you must
prepare the classification system accordingly.
Þ First, you define the attributes that the material and its batches are to have.
You create them in the classification system as characteristics.
Þ Now, you create the classes that you want to use for the material and its batches. You can create a
selection of different classes for this purpose. You can subsequently assign only one class to the
material and to the batch. You are not therefore preparing multiple classification.
Þ The assignment you make must be to class type 022 or 023 since they have been provided in the
standard SAP R/3 System specially for batches. The class type applicable depends on the batch level
chosen.
Þ If you have specified plant level as the area of validity in Customizing, class type 022 is defined in
the standard SAP R/3 System. The class type is otherwise 023. The system specifies the correct class
type automatically.
Þ In the final step, the characteristics are assigned to batches. The value intervals can be further
restricted in the process.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-10
© SAP AG 1999
Material Material
Epoxy resin Y Epoxy resin Y
Class X
Class type 'batch' Class type 'batch'
Classify your material using
the batch class.
Materials Management
Batch Batch
Epoxy resin Y1 Epoxy resin Y1
Post a batch for this material.
Choose allowed characteristic
values for your batch.
Maintaining Master Data II
¤ Viscosity 5000-8000
¤ Color 0-5
¤ Epoxy resin 23-25
¤ Volatile proportions 0.00-0.50
¤ Viscosity 7250
¤ Color 1-3
¤ Epoxy resin 23-25
¤ Volatile fraction 0.30



Þ You create both the material master record and the batch master record in Materials Management. To
use the entire functionality offered by batch management, you must first classify the material.
You assign the batch class in the “Classification” view of the material master record.
You can restrict all sets of values specified for batch characteristics.
Þ If you create a batch for the material, the material's classification data is copied automatically. The
sets of values specified for the characteristics are proposed as default values.
Þ The system checks whether the characteristic values entered are within the limits allowed if the
characteristics have been defined accordingly. The “Additional values allowed” indicator must not
be set in this case.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-11
© SAP AG 1999
Reference
characteristic
LOBM_LVORM Deletion flag
LOBM_ZUSTD Status
LOBM_VFDAT Expiration date
LOBM_VERAB Availability date
Data field
MCHA
Standard characteristics Standard characteristics
Customizing: Tips and Tricks



Þ The standard R/3 System already contains certain characteristics. They are shown here as “standard
characteristics”. They are characteristics that have a key position for batch selection. You should
therefore include them both in the respective batch classes and in the selection classes in batch
determination if the respective business application is used. This improves selection run
performance.
Þ You should always use the characteristic 'deletion flag'.
Þ The standard characteristics listed are reference characteristics.
Þ A reference characteristic is linked to a data field via table MCHA/MCH1. The content of this data
field is stored directly in the classification system as a characteristic value. The information is
updated redundantly; that is, it is not only referenced.
Þ If the content of the data field changes, the change is also made in the characteristic value.
Þ In addition, 'free' standard characteristics are offered in the system.
Þ Though a 'free characteristic' is defined independently of existing data fields, it is also supplied with
the standard R/3 System. One example is the characteristic 'remaining shelf life'.
Þ As of 4.0, you can use Customer Function Calls to automatically adopt the master data from a source
batch when you create a batch. You can also copy and change the characteristic valuations of free
characteristics in this way.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-12
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Specification: Unit Summary
¤ Prepare classification data so that Batch
Management can function properly
You are now able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-13
Batch Specification Exercises



Unit: Batch Specification
Topic: Specifying Batches


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create characteristics and a class for a material that is handled
in batches
• Classify material
• Post a goods receipt for a material that is handled in batches
and simultaneously valuate the batch characteristics



For materials handled in batches, you want to store classes in
which the typical characteristics are defined. To do this, you have
to define and assign classes and characteristics in the
classification system. You also want to assign characteristic
values at goods receipt.






There is a template for all the master data that you will create
in the exercises below. You can copy it if you wish.
However, you must put your own group number at the end of
each master record you create, and use your own data only.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-14
1-1 Create characteristics and a class for a material that is handled in batches
1-1-1 Create characteristics
Create the following characteristics for your material in the classification
system. The key for the relevant template in the system is listed on the right.
M1-## Viscosity Template: M001
M2-## pH level Template: M009
M3-## Purity of color Template: M010
M4-## Covering power Template: M011
M5-## Label Template: M012
M6-## Available for Template: M013
Replace ## with your group number, for example, 01.
• Assign any value interval to the characteristic M1-## (viscosity).
• Do not allow any interval values for the characteristic M2-## (pH level). Which indicator
controls this?
• For the characteristic M3-## (purity of color), allow values that are not included in its list
of values; that is, values that you have not explicitly allowed. Where can you set this in the
characteristic?
• Assign the value interval of your choice to the characteristic M4-### (covering power)
• Define M5-## (label) as a required entry. Enter the values yes and no as possible
characteristic values for M5-## and select yes as a default value. Where do you set the
default value?
• Specify for the characteristic M6-## (available for) that your batch is available in Europe,
Asia, Australia, and North America. You should be able to choose two or more values at
the same time. Which indicator must be set to do this?
1-1-2 Create a class and assign characteristics
Create a class C##, in which you use your own characteristics.
Replace ## with your group number (for example, 01).
Ensure that you have used the class type that is allowed for batches.
Save the class.
You can use class 231 as a template. Note that the characteristics of the
class are also copied. You have to change them afterwards.
1-2 Classify a batch managed material and store a sales price
1-2-1 Change the material you created Y-500-##.
Copy this transaction (Change material) to your favorites.
Choose both the Classification view and the Sales and Distribution view:
SalesOrgData 1
Organizational levels:
Plant 1100
Sales organization 1020
Distribution channel 22
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-15
If necessary, choose Extras → Change class type to do this.
Delete the assignment of the batch class you copied before.
Now enter batch class C##.
Call up valuation for the characteristics.
Specify the target values as follows:
• For the characteristic M1-## (viscosity), limit the interval.
• For the characteristic M2-## (pH level), enter a discrete value from the interval.
• For the characteristic M3-## (purity of color), extend a value that is not listed as a possible
entry.
• For the characteristic M4-## (covering power), you want to have the complete value
interval available later in the batch classification.
• For the characteristic M5-## (label), allow both possible answers.
• For the characteristic M6-## (available for), choose at least two values.

1-2-2 Maintain the sales price. Go to the SD: Sales Org. Data 1 view. In this view,
choose the Conditions pushbutton. Enter a price of $3.50 per kilo. Go to the
Sales Org. Data 1 view. Use plant 1100 as the delivering plant.
Save your material.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-16
1-3 Classify batches – goods receipt
Valuate the batch characteristics during the goods receipt.
To do this, choose Logistics → Materials management → Inventory Management.
Now choose Goods movement → Goods receipt → Others.

Copy the transaction (‘other’ goods receipt) to your favorites.
Movement type: 501
Plant: 1100
Storage location: 0001
On the New items screen, enter material Y-500-## and the quantity you want to post to
stock.
• Enter the batch number of your choice.
• The way the system is currently configured, it displays the classification view when you
choose the Goods receipt without reference to purchase order function.
• Enter discrete values for the characteristics. Remember that you want to search in Batch
Determination after making this specification.
Note: To enter more goods receipt items, return to the entry screen via the icon with the
green arrow.
• Repeat this transaction for some batches.






SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-17
Batch Specification Solutions



Unit: Batch Specification
Topic: Specifying Batches
1-1 Create characteristics and a class for a material that is handled in batches
1-1-1 Create characteristics
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment
→ Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics
or
Logistics → Central Functions →
Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics
Choose the icon for creating characteristics with a template or choose
Characteristic → Copy from…
Create new characteristics, using as a template the characteristics specified.
Special requirements:
• Do not allow any interval values for the characteristic M2-## (pH level).
• The Interval values allowed field is not set in the basic data for the characteristic.
Note: You can allow interval values only if the characteristic has several values; that is, if
you can specify several values in the batch’s characteristic value assignment.
• For the characteristic M3-## (purity of color), allow values that are not included in the list
of values for this characteristic.
• In the value range for the characteristic, select the Additional values field.
• Define M5-## (label) as a required entry. Enter the values yes and no as possible
characteristic values for M5-## and select yes as a default value.
• In the basic data for the characteristic, set the Entry required field.
• In the value range for the characteristic, choose Yes in the column for the proposed value.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-18
• Specify for the characteristic M6-## (available for) that your batch is available in Europe,
Asia, Australia, and North America. You should be able to choose two or more values at
the same time.
• In the basic data for the characteristic, define that the characteristic can have several values.

1-1-2 Create class and assign characteristics
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment
→ Classification System → Master Data → Classes
or
Logistics → Central Functions →
Classification System → Master Data → Classes
Create a class C##, in which you set your own characteristics.

Field name or data type Values
Class C##
Class type 023 (Batches)

Icon for Create with reference
Field name or data type Values
Reference class 231
Note that the characteristics of the class are also copied. You have to
change them afterwards.
Save the class.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-19

1-2 Classify a batch managed material and store a sales price
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
Copy this transaction (Change material) to your favorites.
1-2-1 Change the classification view and the Sales and Distribution view in your
material master record Y-500-##.
Field name or data type Values
Material Y-500-##
View • Classification view
• Sales and distribution:
SalesOrgData 1
Organizational levels
Plant
Sales organization
Distribution channel

1100
1020
22
Class type 023 (Batches)
If necessary, choose Extras → Change class type to do this.
Delete the assignment of the batch class you copied before.
Enter the class C## as the assignment.
Specify the target values as follows:
• For the characteristic M1-## (viscosity), limit the interval.
• For the characteristic M2-## (pH level), enter a discrete value from the interval.
• For the characteristic M3-## (purity of color), extend a value that is not listed as a possible
entry.
• For the characteristic M4-## (covering power), you want to have the complete value
interval available later in the batch classification.
• For the characteristic M5-## (label), allow both possible answers.
• For the characteristic M6-## (available for), choose at least two values.

1-2-2 Maintain the sales price and use the supplying plant 1100.

Field name or data type Values
View Sales and distribution:
SalesOrgData 1
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 5-20
[Conditions:]
Amount

3.50 UNI

Field name or data type Values
View Sales and distribution:
SalesOrgData 1
Supplying plant 1100
Save your material.
1-3 Classify batches – goods receipt
Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management.
Choose Goods movement → Goods receipt → Others.

Valuate the batch characteristics during the goods receipt.
Initial screen
Field name Values
Movement type 501
Plant 1100
Storage location 0001

At item level:
Field name Values
Material Y-500-##
Quantity Any
Batch number Any, internal or external
Characteristic value assignment Any or within the allowed
values
Repeat this transaction for some batches: Enter other items for your material Y-500-
## in the document and assign more batch numbers and characteristic values before
you save the document.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-1
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Status Management
¤ Business Background
¤ Integration
¤ Functionality
¤ Example
¤ Tips & Tricks
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-2
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Status Management: Objectives
¤ Decide whether you want to monitor and control
batch statuses using Batch Status Management
¤ Identify batch statuses
¤ Change batch statuses
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Batch Status Mgmt: Course Overview Diagram
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch Status Mgmt
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-4
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Your company has specified the batch level as the
material or client level. The users want to make
transfer postings changing the status of batch
stocks in simple and straightforward manner.
¤ In your enterprise, it is necessary that incoming
batch stocks are initially assigned the status
Restricted until such time as they are released from
quality inspection.
Batch Status Management: Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-5
© SAP AG 1999
Batch status Batch status
management management
Material 308 Material 308- -188 188
Batch Batch A1 A1
Status = Status = Restricted Restricted
Business Background
Stores 2
Batch Batch A1 A1
0 kg
Restricted
Stores 3
Batch Batch A1 A1
2 kg
Restricted
Stores 4
Batch Batch A1 A1
226 kg
Restricted
Stores 1
Batch Batch A1 A1
100 kg
Restricted
Stores 5
Batch Batch A1 A1
54 kg
Restricted



Þ The batch status is a central tool for identifying use of the batch as Restricted or Unrestricted. It is
valid at the batch level set in Customizing.
Þ You change the batch status in the batch master record. This results in an automatic transfer posting
with regard to the individual stocks.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-6
© SAP AG 1999
Unrestricted-use
stock
Blocked stock Quality inspection
Restricted-
use stock
Batch status “restricted”
Returns
Open PO qty
Consignment, ordered
GR blocked stock
Stock transfer (plant)
Stock transfer (SLoc)
Reserved
Production order
Stock trans. order rel.
Change in
batch master record
Goods movement
Integration
Independent of
batch status
Batch status “unrestricted”



Þ In Inventory Management, two stock types directly depend on the batch status:
º A batch can only be included in 'unrestricted-use stock' if it has the status 'unrestricted'.
º A batch can only be included in 'restricted-use stock' if it has the status 'restricted'.
Þ You can make a direct transfer posting between stocks only by changing the indicator in the batch
master record.
Þ All other stocks do not indicate the status of the batch. Postings are made irrespective of the status
indicator in the batch master record.
Þ These stocks are changed when the usual goods movements are made in Inventory Management.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-7
© SAP AG 1999
Reserved
Change in batch status in batch
master record
Unrestricted
stock
Restricted
stock
Internal transfer posting from Unrestricted
to Restricted
Material document + change document
G
o
o
d
s

m
o
v
e
m
e
n
t
Quality
inspection
Blocked
stock
Returns
Stock transfer (plant)
Stock transfer (SLoc)
On-order stock
Consgt. ord.
GR blocked stock
Production order
Stock transp. order
G
o
o
d
s

m
o
v
e
m
e
n
t
How Batch Status Management Works



Þ A batch stock cannot be transferred directly from unrestricted-use stock to restricted stock.
Þ If you change the status indicator when maintaining a batch master record, the system makes an
internal transfer posting for the batch stock. A change document is created in respect of the master
record change and a material document is created for the transfer posting.
Þ Direct transfers are possible between all other stocks. If a quantity of batch material is withdrawn
from them, it depends on the batch status whether it can be posted to unrestricted or restricted stock.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-8
© SAP AG 1999
Status: Status: UN UNRESTR. RESTR.
Material 308-188
Batch A1
Status: Status: RESTRICTED RESTRICTED
Unrestricted Unrestricted- -use use
stock stock
Quality Quality
inspection inspection
Restricted Restricted- -use use
stock stock
Stock transfer to quality control 20 kg
Movement type 322
100 kg
80 kg 20kg
Status change
80 kg 20kg
0 kg 0 kg
0 kg
Stock transfer to unrestricted stock 20 kg
Mvt type 321
0 kg
100 kg 0 kg
Example



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-9
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Assign reference characteristic
LOBM_ZUSTD to your batch
class “X” in the classification
system.
¤ Also assign the same reference
characteristic to your selection
class “ Y ”.
¤ Ensure that your batches are
classified with batch class “ X ”.
¤ Ensure that selection class “ Y ”
is used in the strategy record of
the respective application.
LOBM_ZUSTD LOBM_ZUSTD
Selection
class Y
Batch Batch
Material Material
Batch
class X
Strategy
record
Selection
class Y
Batch
class X
Tips & Tricks 1



Þ If you use batch status management, you should also use the batch status as a selection criterion for
batch determination.
Þ As already mentioned in the chapter on batch specification, the standard SAP R/3 System comes
with reference characteristics.
Þ The reference characteristic LOBM_ZUSTD stores the batch status in the classification system.
Þ You should therefore assign it...
º ... to the respective batch class as a characteristic.
º ... to the respective strategy record as a selection criterion.
Þ In batch determination, this combination ensures that only batches with the required status are
selected. This prevents long run times.
Þ For example, the system picks out only unrestricted-use batches for a delivery.
Þ This functionality is effective only in conjunction with batch determination, not when you select a
batch manually.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-10
© SAP AG 1999
¤ The reference characteristic is
automatically assigned the
value of a field.
¤ You can store additional
information in user-defined
characteristics as required.
¤ You create user-defined
characteristics in the
classification system.
¤ Like reference characteristics,
you assign user-defined
characteristics to the batch
class and to the strategy
record.
Unrestr.
Restr.
Reference characteristic Reference characteristic
“status” “status”
User User- -defined characteristic defined characteristic
blocking reasons blocking reasons
Damaged Spoiled
Inspection
required
Incorrect
certificates
Tips & Tricks 2



Þ In addition to the standard characteristics, you can define as characteristics all attributes that you
consider important and useful for subsequent batch selection.
Þ For example, a useful addition to the standard characteristic “status” would be the characteristic
“blocking reasons” or also “possible use”.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-11
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Status Management: Summary
¤ Decide whether you want to monitor and control
batch statuses using Batch Status Management
¤ Identify batch statuses
¤ Change batch statuses
You are now able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-12
Batch Status Management Exercises


Additional Exercise:
Unit: Batch Status Management
Topic: Assigning a Batch the Status “Restricted”


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Change an unrestricted batch to a restricted batch
• Change the Stock Overview display version to reflect restricted
batches


You want to see the effect of the change in batch status. The stock
overview displays these changes. You can save the batch status as
a characteristic and use it in Batch Determination.

1-1 Change the batch master record and set the status to “restricted”
1-1-1 Check the stocks of Y-500-##.
Copy the transaction (stock overview) to your favorites.
1-1-2 Change the status of one of your batches to “restricted”.
Copy this transaction (Change batch) to your favorites.
Use the values below:

Material: Y-500-##
Batch: (enter the batch number of your choice)

Set the status "restricted".

Save your batch.
1-1-3 Optional: Search for the material document that was created as a result of
the change to the batch and make a note of the number:

Material document: _________________________________________
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-13
1-2 Display several versions of the stock overview to track ‘restricted batches’:
1-2-1 Display the stock overview for material Y-500-##.
Remove the No lines with zero stock indicator.

Check the batch that you posted to ‘restricted’ stock.



For information about units of measure in the ‘restricted’
status, double-click the line containing the batch concerned
and then scroll down the list.

1-2-2 Display the stock overview for material Y-500-## again. Make sure that
Display version 14 is set on the initial screen.
The No lines with zero stock indicator can be copied as selected.

Batches with stocks marked as ‘restricted’ are easily visible.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-14
Batch Status Management Solutions



Unit: Batch Status Management
Topic: Assigning a Batch the Status “Restricted”
1-1 Change the batch master record and set the status to “restricted”
1-1-1 Check the stocks of Y-500-##.
Logistics → Materials management → Inventory Management →
Environment → Stock overview
or
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Stock
→ Stock overview
Copy this transaction to your favorites.

Field name or data type Values
Material Y-500-##

1-1-2 Change the status of one of your batches to “restricted”.
Copy this transaction to your favorites.
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch →
Change
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Batch → Change
1-1-3 Optional: Search for the material document that was created as a result of
the change to the batch and make a note of the number:
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Environment → List Displays → Material Documents

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 6-15
1-2 Display several versions of the stock overview to track ‘restricted batches’:
1-2-1 Display the stock overview for material Y-500-##.

Call up the transaction from your favorites.
Menu path description under 1-1-1.

Field name or data type Values
Material Y-500-##
Display version 1

Remove the No lines with zero stock indicator.

Check the batch that you posted to ‘restricted’ stock.



For information about units of measure with the status
‘restricted’, double-click the line containing the batch
concerned and then scroll down the list.


1-2-2 Display the stock overview for material Y-500-## again.
Call up the transaction from your favorites.
Menu path description under 1-1-1.

Field name or data type Values
Material Y-500-##
Display version 14
Make sure that Display version 14 is set on the initial screen.
The No lines with zero stock indicator can be copied as selected.

Batches with stocks marked as ‘restricted’ are easily visible.




SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 7-1
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check for Batches
¤ Effects of the Batch Definition on the Availability Check
¤ Availability Check and Status Management
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 7-2
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check: Unit Objectives
¤ Outline the special aspects of the availability
check in the case of a material subject to a batch-
management requirement
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 7-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Availability Check: Overview Diagram
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch
Status Management
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 7-4
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Your company wishes to treat batches with the
status "restricted" as "unavailable" for the
purposes of materials planning. However, in the
case of stock withdrawals for production, the same
batch is to be regarded as "available".
Availability Check: Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 7-5
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Definition and Availability Check
¤ The availability check is one of the checks carried
out during the batch determination process.
¤ It should run here without taking the replenishment
lead time into account.
¤ By definition, a batch is unique and cannot therefore
be replenished.
¤ The MRP data of a material that is subject to a batch
management requirement must include a suitable
checking group.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 7-6
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Batches of material 308-188
¤ Status: UNRESTRICTED
¤ Available stock > 0
Selection criteria:
}
}
Batch
Material
300-188
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
Characteristic
value
LOBM-ZUSTD
Unrestr.
Unrestr.
Restr.
Unrestr.
Restr.
Restr.
Status:
Unrestr.
Available
quantity:
100 kg
150 kg
0 kg
50 kg
Maximum Maximum
proposal: proposal:
C1 C1
C2 C2
C2 C2
C6 C6
C1
C2
C4
C6
Availability Check and Status Management



Þ The batches to be made available are selected in batch determination.
º If you use the characteristic “LOBM_ZUSTD” (batch status) in batch determination, the system
differentiates between “unrestricted” and “restricted” batches.
º If you want to find “unrestricted” batches only, the system selects only batches with the
characteristic value “blank”.
º After the selection run, the system checks the availability of the batches selected.
º Only “unrestricted” batches are proposed that are available in sufficient quantity.
Þ In Customizing, you can set the format for the available stocks in the current stock/requirements list.
You have the option here of displaying restricted batch stocks as available or unavailable as you
require.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 7-7
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check: Summary
¤ Outline the special aspects of the availability
check in the case of a material subject to a batch-
management requirement
You are now able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-1
© SAP AG 1999
Contents:
¤ Batch Determination in the Logistics Process
¤ The Principle of Batch Determination
¤ Batch Determination in the Case of Goods Movements
¤ Batch Determination in Production
¤ Batch Determination in Sales
¤ Batch Determination in Warehouse Management
¤ Batch Determination: Master Data in the Applications
¤ Link Between Customizing and the Applications
¤ Settings in Customizing
¤ Condition Technique in Batch Determination
Batch Determination



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Describe how Batch Determination works and
how it is integrated in the Logistics process
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Batch Determination: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Batch Determination: Course Overview Diagram
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch Status Mgmt
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-4
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Determination: Business Scenario
Your company’s requirements are to:
¤ Select the most appropriate batch to meet
customer needs.
¤ Select the most appropriate component batch to
make a quality product.
¤ Issue stock based on FIFO or FEFO (first
expiration, first out), without using the Warehouse
Management System.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-5
© SAP AG 1999
Batch determination Batch determination
Batch assignment Batch assignment
Sales Production Procurement
Warehouse management Warehouse management
B
A
B
A
A
A A
Purch. order
W/house
Process/
production
order
Sales
order/
delivery
W/house
Batch Determination in the Logistics Process



Þ In Logistics, there are different points at which you can assign a batch to a material. You manually
enter the batch number numerically or alphanumerically.
Þ Batch numbers are assigned to materials with batch requirement at goods receipt (external
procurement or in-house production).
Þ If you want to use a particular batch in the Logistics process, you first have to find the batch with the
required specification in stock. Batch determination works automatically.
Þ In Production, batch determination is used to specify suitable components for the finished product
right at the production order stage.
Þ Sales needs to find the batch that fits the customer's requirements most closely. This can be done at
two points: in the sales order and in the delivery.
Þ In the case of goods movements, you need to find the correct batch for goods issues such as for a
consumption posting for an order or for a transfer posting.
Þ In warehouse management, you can initiate batch determination according to the LIFO or FIFO
principle (but also according to other criteria) in the transfer order.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-6
© SAP AG 1999
Color Color 1 1
Viscosity Viscosity 7500 7500
Refractive index Refractive index 1.5700 1.5700
Batch Batch characteristics characteristics
Viscosity Viscosity 7450 7450- -7800 7800
Refractive index Refractive index 1.5700 1.5700
Acidity 10% Acidity 10% - - 15% 15%
Selection Selection characteristics characteristics
Strategy record Y Strategy record Y
Batch Batch 4243 4243
Batch class 4 Batch class 4
Selection class 2 Selection class 2
Principal of Batch Determination



Þ Batches require you to enter specifications. You classify the batch record using a class of batch class
type 022 or 023, depending on the setting for the batch level in Customizing. You store the batch's
specifications as characteristic values. Both discrete values and defined intervals are possible.
Þ For business transactions where batch determination is to be used, you have to enter strategy records.
The structure of the search strategy depends on the settings made in Customizing. Linked to these
strategy records are the target values for which you search with regard to a particular business
transaction. If you have a number of different requirements, you will have to create the
corresponding number of records. Like the batch record, you also classify the strategy record using a
class of class type 022 or 023, storing the required selection criteria as characteristic values for this
selection class.
Þ If you now want to find a suitable batch for a business transaction, the system accesses the relevant
strategy record. Its characteristic values are proposed. You can change them for the current business
transaction. The system searches for batches that have the required characteristic values. If required,
auxiliary functions such as a strategy analysis and log printout are offered. They provide user support
by helping you to make suitable changes to your entries and thus to continue the search.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-7
© SAP AG 1999
W/house
Goods issue
Characteristics Characteristics
Bch Bch status: UNR. status: UNR.
Rem Rem. shelf life: . shelf life:
10 days 10 days
Material X
Batch 456c
Search strategy
• Movement type
• Material
• Plant
Characteristics Characteristics
Batch status Batch status: : UNR. UNR.
Exp Exp. Date . Date: :
01.02.1997 01.02.1997
W/house
Batch Determination for Goods Movements



Þ Batch determination can be fully used for stock transfers and goods issues.
Þ In the standard setting, batch determination runs online.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-8
© SAP AG 1999
Production
Process/
production
order
Batch
determination
Search strategy
• Component X
BOM for
finished
product Y-351
•...
•Component X
B
A
Characteristics Characteristics
• • Density 5.7 Density 5.7
• • Expiration date Expiration date
01.02.97 01.02.97
Material X
Batch
456b
Warehouse
Material X
Batch 456a
Characteristics Characteristics
• • Density 5.7 Density 5.7
• • Expiration date Expiration date
01.02.97 01.02.97
Characteristics
Density 5.7
Rem.shelf life
10 days
Warehouse management Warehouse management
Batch Determination in Production



Þ In production, suitable batches can be selected in the production order for the individual components.
Batch splitting is possible.
Þ Here, batch determination can work in two different ways:
Þ The selection criteria for the component are contained in the BOM (bill of material) and are fixed
values for batch determination. They are stored as characteristic values of the individual BOM items.
Þ Only if no BOM item is classified does the system check whether a classified strategy record exists.
As with batch determination in the other applications, the selection criteria are then taken from the
strategy record.
Þ If the batches have not yet been determined in the production order,
º you have to search for them at the time of the goods issue posting for the production order using
batch determination in Inventory Management.
Þ This allows the use of batch determination even if a component is backflushed.
º If the batches have not yet been determined in Sales, they must be found in the transfer order at the
latest, using batch determination in Warehouse Management.
Þ For Release 4.0, you can also define search procedures that allow batch determination for repetitive
manufacturing, kanban, or pull lists.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-9
© SAP AG 1999
W/house
B
A
Sales A
Material X
Batch 456c
Search strategy
Delivery
Batch determination
Sales order
Search strategy
Batch determination
Warehouse Management
System
Batch Determination in Sales



Þ In Sales, batches can be determined at two points:
Þ You can search for the suitable batch when creating the sales order.
If successful, the batch number is transferred to delivery and the warehouse management system.
Þ Otherwise, batch determination is left up to the following functions.
If the batch is not determined until delivery, batch splitting is possible.
Þ If successful, the batch numbers selected are in turn transferred to the warehouse management
system.
º If the batches have not yet been determined in Sales, they must be found in the transfer order at the
latest, using batch determination in Warehouse Management.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-10
© SAP AG 1999
Batch
determination
Sales order
Sales A
Delivery note
Characteristics Characteristics
• •Density 5.7 Density 5.7
• • Rem Rem. shelf life . shelf life
10 days 10 days
Search strategy
•Customer 9911
•Destination GB
Characteristics Characteristics
• • Density 5.7 Density 5.7
• • Expiration date Expiration date
01.02.05 01.02.05
Material X
Batch 456c
Warehouse management
Characteristics Characteristics
• •Density 5.7 Density 5.7
• • Rem Rem. shelf life . shelf life
10 days 10 days
Search strategy
•Customer 9911
•Material X
W/house
Batch Determination in Sales
B
A



Þ If you want to use batch determination in Sales for a business transaction, you must first create a
strategy record. This record contains fields typical of the corresponding business transaction. You
classify it using a selection class in order to store the required specification for the business
transaction as a characteristic value.
Þ In batch determination, the classification of the batch records is compared with that of the strategy
record. If they match, the search was successful. If not, you must change your entries and run the
batch determination procedure again. The characteristic values are default values that you can change
or exclude if required.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-11
© SAP AG 1999
W/house
Transfer
order
Search strategy
• Warehouse no. 002
• Movement type 261
Characteristics Characteristics
Batch status: Batch status: Unr Unr. .
Rem Rem. shelf life . shelf life: :
10 days 10 days
Material X
Batch 456c
Characteristics Characteristics
Batch status: Batch status: Unr Unr. .
Exp Exp. Date . Date: 01.02.05 : 01.02.05
W/house
B
A
B
A
Batch Determination in Warehouse Management



Þ In Warehouse Management, batch determination is used for goods issues and stock transfers. The
standard function uses status and shelf life to determine the batch for stock transfer.
Þ For example, you want to post replenishment of a material to be handled in batches to its fixed
storage bin in the picking location. For the transfer posting, the system searches for those batches
with the status “unrestricted-use” and the shortest shelf life.
You want the batches to be sorted by shelf life expiration date.
Þ By sorting according to date field, goods movements can be made on the basis of the LIFO and FIFO
principle.
Þ Here, batch determination runs in the background. The order in which batches are to be listed is
controlled by the sort rule.
You can change it in the selection record, where you can also vary the selection criteria.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-12
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Determination in Warehouse Management
WM System WM System
IM System IM System
PP System PP System
SD System SD System
Goods receipt
Create
batch
Production
order
Mat. X C 123 10
Mat. Y C 456 20
Material X Material X
Batch 123 Batch 123
Goods issue
Transfer
order
Material X
Batch 123
From: 902
To: 100 Mat. Bch Qty
X 456 100
Delivery
Evaluation
Material X
Batch 123



Þ When goods are issued in Inventory Management, the system uses particular batches, which are then
staged via picking strategies in Warehouse Management.
Þ Due to the overlapping systems (PP and SD), the system either transfers to the WM System the
batches to be picked via the production order or the delivery (in this case the system searches for the
batches defined), or the WM System determines the batches.
Þ For external or internal inbound deliveries, the system posts a goods receipt for purchase orders or a
production order in Invnetory Management. If you post material that has batch management
requirement, the system creates a new batch. At the same time, classification is carried out for the
new batch.
Þ The batch number is recorded in the quant that is updated as a result of the goods receipt. Alongside
the material number, plant, stock category, and special stock, the batch number forms the material
identification and thereby acts as a criterion for splitting stock in the Warehouse Management
System.
Þ The batch is included in all processes in the Warehouse Management System. If the stock that has
been posted is placed in storage, it is posted with reference to the batch. All relevant business
transactions and evaluations take the batch into account.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-13
© SAP AG 1999
PP/PP-PI MM SD WM
How?
Business
transaction
Selection class
Sort rule
Default quantity rule
Number of batch splits
What?
When?
Strategy records
Batch Determination: Application Master Data



Þ Batch determination depends on the strategy records of the respective application. For different
purposes, you have to create different strategy records in the system.
Þ The strategy record that applies to the business transaction is established by the system.
Þ The strategy record determines what is looked for. The selection class specifies which characteristics
the batch is to have.
Þ The strategy record determines how the result of the search run is to be displayed.
Þ The sort rule specifies the sequence in which the batches found are listed.
Þ The default quantity rule determines the quantity in which the batches sought have to be available.
You may want an issue quantity to come only from a single batch or to be made only in whole
pallets. A USER EXIT allows you to match the default quantity to your company's requirements.
Þ The 'number of batch splits' determines the maximum number of batches that may be proposed after
a search run.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-14
© SAP AG 1999
PP/PP-PI MM SD WM
¤ Order type
¤ Plant
¤ Movement type
¤ Sales organization
¤ Distribution channel
¤ Division
¤ Sales document type
Warehouse no.
Movement type
Warehouse no.
Search procedures
1
1 1
2
2 2
2
2 2
How Customizing and the Applications Are Linked



Þ Search procedures are stored in Customizing for each application in which you can run batch
determination. They are the link to the rules used to find the valid strategy record for the respective
business transaction.
Þ You can define the search procedures differently for different business transactions in the
application. As soon as the batch determination procedure is running, the system accesses the
corresponding entry of the application, using it to locate the relevant entries in Customizing.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-15
© SAP AG 1999
PP/PP-PI MM
SD WM
Condition tables
Search
procedures
Strategy types
Access
sequences
Settings in Customizing



Þ Dependent on the search procedure is a series of Customizing entries for each application in which
batch determination is possible.
Þ The system finds the search procedure (of the application) that is valid on this occasion. It contains
the group of strategy types that are to be read.
Þ As a reference for the strategy records, the strategy types contain control parameters according to
which the batch determination procedure is to run. They are linked to an access sequence.
Þ The access sequence defines the order in which the system searches for existing strategy records.
The access sequence consists of condition tables.
Þ The condition tables describe groups of fields that have been used as a model to create strategy
records. If the table contains many fields, the strategy record is valid for a very special combination
of data. If it contains few fields, the strategy record has a more general validity.
Þ In the access sequence, the condition tables should be grouped from 'Specific' to 'General'.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-16
© SAP AG 1999
Condition tables
Choose the central fields
from the business transactions
and enter in tables.
Cust.
Material
Plant
Sales org. Sales org.
Material Material
Material
Access sequence
Define the sequence of the condition
tables in the search process...
Cust. Material Plant
Material Material Sales organization Sales organization
Material
Strategy
type
...assign to a strategy type...
Search procedure
Strategy
type
Strategy
type
Strategy
type
Strategy type
...and combine in a
procedure.
1
1 1
2
2 2
3
3 3
4
4 4
Condition Technique in Batch Determination



Þ In Customizing, you must choose fields from the business transactions 'sales order', 'delivery',
'transfer order', 'goods movement', and 'production/process order' and enter them in condition tables.
Þ They will be used later to form the link between business transaction, strategy record, and batch
found.
Þ You then arrange the tables in access sequences.
Þ This is the order in which you want the system to search for existing strategy records.
Þ If the search is not successful using the fields in the first table, the system continues with the next
table in the access sequence. It is advisable to focus the scope of the search at first, in other words, to
start with a table with several entries ('Customer', 'Plant', and 'Material' in our example) and to end
with a more general search (made here only via the material number).
Þ For each strategy type, you choose one access sequence. You may assign the strategy type once only.
However, an access sequence may be used by several strategy types.
Þ The details for batch determination are defined in the strategy type. These include, for example,
whether batch splitting is to be allowed or how the default quantity is calculated. The strategy type
entries are passed on as default values for the strategy records in the application.
Þ Final accessing of the batches for a defined purpose and from defined points of view is stored in the
search procedure. You can link different access sequences together by combining more than one
strategy type.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-17
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Determination: Unit Summary
¤ Describe how Batch Determination works and how
it is integrated in the Logistics process
You are now able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-18
Batch Determination Exercises



Unit: Batch Determination
Topic: Batch Determination in the Various
Application Components


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Understand settings for Batch Determination in Customizing
• Create and verify batch search strategies
- Upon goods movements in Inventory Management
or
- In SD
or
- In Process Manufacturing


Upon goods movements, the system picks out the batch numbers
in stock that meet particular selection criteria.
In Customizing, you can define flexible, application-specific rules
for Batch Determination.




We have prepared exercise data you can use to set up and
carry out Batch Determination for the application
components MM, PP, PP-PI, and SD.
Carry out parts A and B of the exercise. Then look for
the application that is of most interest to you:
Section 1-1/1-2, 2-1/2-2, or 3-1/3-2.
You can use the same selection class and sort rule for all
parts of the exercise. These are created centrally in
Customizing:

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-19
a) Define selection class
Call up the Create selection class function.

The selection class contains the characteristics for which you want to find batches in the
system.
Create a new selection class 023SE_## with the characteristics M1-## (viscosity) and M2-
## (pH level).



b) Define and edit sort rules
Call up the Create sort rule function.
In the sort rule, you sort the batches found according to a given characteristic for batch
determination - in ascending or descending order.
Create a new sort rule 040SO_## to sort the batches found for the characteristic M1-##
(viscosity).

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-20
1-1 Batch determination for goods movements: Customizing
You want to find batches of trading goods with a particular pH level and viscosity for a
stock transfer or goods issue.
In Customizing, choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project →
SAP Reference IMG). Choose
Logistics - General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check
Call up each of the functions that affect Inventory Management:
1-1-1 Function: Condition tables
The condition tables define the fields outlining a particular transaction for
which batches are to be found, for example, the trigger for batch
determination.
Look at the existing entries. You can make your own entries if you wish.
However, the standard entries are usually sufficient.
1-1-2 Function: Access sequences
Access sequences describe the order in which the system reads the condition
tables. It is best if the system reads the more specific condition tables and
then the general ones.
Look at the existing entries. You can enter your own combinations if you
wish. However, the standard entries are usually sufficient.
1-1-3 Function: Strategy types
Strategy types are a template. They contain default values that are
transferred to the strategy records of each of the application components.
They are always created with reference to a concrete strategy type.
When you create your own strategy type, technically, you can use your own
selection class and sort rule. However, it is more advisable to assign the
selection class and sort rule to the strategy record in the application
component.
You must not change the strategy type ZMM1 that has been defined for
this exercise!
Strategy type ZMM1 has been defined for this exercise. The Selection class
and Sort rule fields are empty. Enter the data for these in the strategy record
you subsequently create in Inventory Management.
This procedure offers more flexibility. In the example, you can thus use the
same strategy type for all materials used in the course, even though they
have various characteristics.
Look at the default values for strategy type ZMM1 and note the access
sequence with which it is linked.

IMPORTANT: Please do not change the strategy type
ZMM1. Changing it would change the strategy type for all the
participants.
Note that Customizing tables are blocked if you try to access
the strategy type using the change function. Do not use the
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-21

Customizing tables for any longer than necessary. If possible,
use the display function.

1-1-4 Function: Define batch search procedure
Combinations of strategy types form search procedures.
A batch search procedure combines all strategy types that are to be taken
into account for each particular transaction type in the application
component. In MM, the batch search procedure combines the strategy types
and then assigns them to a movement type (see section 1-1-5). Check which
entry the strategy type ZMM1 contains.
1-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure
This shows which search procedure is used for which purpose.
Look at the search procedure that contains strategy type ZMM1. Is it
assigned to a movement type that you want to try to use in batch
determination.


RECOMMENDATION: For test purposes, use movement type
201 or 311. If you use these, you do not have to change or extend
the material master data, and you do not need any additional
documents.

1-2 Batch determination for goods movements
1-2-1 Create batch search strategy for Inventory Management
Create a batch search strategy with reference to strategy type ZMM1. Link
the strategy record to your material and the movement type you want to use.
In the strategy record, use your selection class as a selection criterion and
your sort rule as a sort criterion. Define your target values for the selection
characteristics. The system takes all the remaining data from the strategy
type.


As you may subsequently want to change the batch search
strategy, it is advisable to copy the Batch search strategy
function to your favorites.


1-2-2 Post goods movement with batch determination
Post the goods movement with the movement type for which you have
maintained data.

NOTE for movement type 201: Cost center 1000 has been
created.
NOTE for movement type 311: You can enter storage
location 0002 as the
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-22

receiving storage location
for this stock transfer.

Enter the material number and quantity.
In Inventory Management, you initiate batch determination by entering an
asterisk (*) in the Batch field.
The system displays all batches that match your selection criteria.
To see how the system found the strategy record used, choose Strategy
analysis.
For more information, you can double-click it.
To overwrite the target values of the selection characteristics, choose
Selection criteria. Choose Change and enter a smaller interval or a single
value.
The search result changes.
Choose
Batch Determination → Without selection criteria.



The system shows all available, existing batches for this material.
To display a comparison of the selection values from the strategy
record with the batch’s actual characteristic values, choose
Classification.
This shows you why a batch was found or why it was not
displayed.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-23
2-1 Batch determination in Sales and Distribution: Customizing
Case 1: You want to find batches of trading goods with a particular pH value and
viscosity in a sales order. The batch numbers are transferred to all follow-on
documents.
(Note: Batch splitting is not possible here.)
Case 2: You want to find batches of trading goods with a particular pH value and
viscosity in a delivery for a sales order. The Batch number field must not be filled
in the sales order.
In Customizing, choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit
Project → SAP Reference IMG). Choose Logistics - General → Batch Management
– Batch Determination and Batch Check
Call up each of the functions that affect SD:

2-1-1 Function: Condition tables
The condition tables define the fields outlining a particular transaction for
which batches are to be found, for example, the trigger for batch
determination.
Look at the existing entries. You can make your own entries if you wish.
However, the standard entries are usually sufficient.
2-1-2 Function: Access sequences
Access sequences describe the order in which the system reads the condition
tables. It is best if the system reads the more specific condition tables and
then the general ones.
Look at the existing entries. You can enter your own combinations if you
wish. However, the standard entries are usually sufficient.
2-1-3 Function: Strategy types
Strategy types are a template. They contain default values that are
transferred to the strategy records of each of the application components.
They are always created with reference to a concrete strategy type.
When you create your own strategy type, technically, you can use your own
selection class and sort rule. However, it is more advisable to assign the
selection class and sort rule to the strategy record in the application
component.
You must not change the strategy type ZSD1 that has been defined for
this exercise!
Strategy type ZSD1 has been defined for this exercise. The Selection class
and Sort rule fields are empty. You fill these fields subsequently in the
strategy record you create in the SD menu. This procedure offers more
flexibility. In the example, you can thus use the same strategy type for all
materials used in the course, even though they have various characteristics.
Look at the default values for strategy type ZSD1 and note the access
sequence with which it is linked.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-24


IMPORTANT: Please do not change the strategy type ZSD1.
Changing it would change the strategy type for all the
participants.
Note that Customizing tables are blocked if you try to access
the strategy type using the change function. Do not use the
Customizing tables for any longer than necessary. If possible,
use the display function.

2-1-4 Function: Define batch search procedure
Combinations of strategy types form search procedures.
A batch search procedure combines all strategy types that are to be taken
into account for each particular transaction type in the application
component. In SD, the batch search procedure combines the strategy types
and then assigns them to a combination of sales organization, distribution
channel, division, and sales document type (see section 2-1-5). The entries
are used for both SD documents – the sales order and the delivery. Check
which entry the strategy type ZSD1 contains.
2-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure
This shows which search procedure is used for which purpose.
Look at the search procedure that contains strategy type ZSD1. Is it assigned
to a sales document type that you want to try to use in batch determination?
RECOMMENDATION: The entry TA is the standard order for the
exercise.
2-1-6 Function: Activate automatic batch determination in SD
Find out what this function is used for and how it has been configured in
Customizing.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-25
2-2 Carry out batch determination in Sales and Distribution
2-2-1 Create a batch search strategy record for SD
Create a batch search strategy record with reference to strategy type ZSD1.
Link the strategy record to your material Y-500-## and the customer 7777.
In the strategy record, use your selection class as a selection criterion and
your sort rule as a sort criterion. Define your target values for the search
characteristics. The system takes all the remaining data from the strategy
type.



As you may subsequently want to change the batch search
strategy, it is advisable to copy the Batch search strategy
function to your favorites.

2-2-2 For case 1 (sales order):
Create sales order and carry out batch determination
Create your own sales order with the order type standard order.
Use the data below:
Customer: 7777
sales organization: 1020
Distribution channel: 22
Division: 00
Order number: Any
Display the item overview.
After the search has run, you can see the batches found here.
Choose
Edit → Batch determination.
The system displays the selection screen for batch determination with all the
required information, including all the batches that match your selection
criteria.
To see how the system found the strategy record used, choose Strategy
analysis.
For more information, you can double-click it.
To overwrite the target values of the selection characteristics, choose
Selection criteria.
Choose Change and enter a smaller interval or a single value.
The search result changes.
Choose
Batch Determination → Without selection criteria.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-26


The system shows all available, existing batches for this material.
To display a comparison of the selection values from the strategy
record with the batch’s actual characteristic values, choose
Classification.
In this way, you can see why a batch was found or why it was not
displayed.

2-2-3 For case 2 (delivery):
Create delivery and carry out batch determination
Remove the batch number entered in the item overview.
Choose
Sales document → Deliver
Enter:
Shipping point: 1100
Selection date: Current date + at least 1 week
In the delivery document, choose
Goto → Item → Batch split. Then choose New batch determination.
The system displays the selection screen for batch determination, which you
are familiar with from exercise 2-2-2. This also contains all the information
that is described for batch determination in the sales order under 2-2-2.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-27
3-1 Batch determination in process manufacturing: Customizing
You want to manufacture a material T-HT2## and have to have the system search
for a suitable batch for the component Y-500-##.
In Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project →
SAP Reference IMG), choose Logistics - General → Batch Management – Batch
Determination and Batch Check
Call up each of the functions that affect process manufacturing:
3-1-1 Function: Condition tables
The condition tables define the fields outlining a particular transaction for
which batches are to be found, for example, the trigger for batch
determination.
Look at the existing entries. You can make your own entries if you wish.
However, the standard entries are usually sufficient.
3-1-2 Function: Access sequences
Access sequences describe the order in which the system reads the condition
tables. It is best if the system reads the more specific condition tables and
then the general ones.
Look at the existing entries. You can enter your own combinations if you
wish. However, the standard entries are usually sufficient.
3-1-3 Function: Strategy types
Strategy types are a template. They contain default values that are
transferred to the strategy records of each of the application components.
They are always created with reference to a concrete strategy type.
When you create your own strategy type, technically, you can use your own
selection class and sort rule. However, it is more advisable to assign the
selection class and sort rule to the strategy record in the application
component.
You must not change the strategy type ZPI1 that has been defined for
this exercise!
Strategy type ZPI1 has been defined for this exercise. The Selection class
and Sort rule fields are empty. Fill these fields subsequently in the strategy
record you create in the Process Manufacturing menu. This procedure
offers more flexibility. In the example, you can thus use the same strategy
type for all materials used in the course, even though they have various
characteristics.
Look at the default values for strategy type ZPI1 and note the access
sequence with which it is linked.


IMPORTANT: Please do not change the strategy type
ZPI1. Changing it would change the strategy type for all
the participants.
Note that Customizing tables are blocked if you try to
access the strategy type using the change function. Do not
use the Customizing tables for any longer than necessary.
If possible, use the display function.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-28
3-1-4 Function: Definition of batch search procedure
Combinations of strategy types form search procedures.
A batch search procedure combines all strategy types that are to be taken
into account for each particular transaction in the application. In PP-PI, the
batch search procedure combines the strategy types and then assigns them to
a combination of plant and order type (see section 3-1-5).
Check which entry the strategy type ZPI1 contains.

3-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure
This shows which search procedure is used for which purpose.
Look at the search procedure that contains strategy type ZPI1. To which
order type and plant is it assigned?

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-29
3-2 Carry out batch determination in the production process
3-2-1 Change BOM
You have to prepare the data for batch determination with your batch
material. Go directly to the BOM.
Use the data below:
Material: T-HT2##
Plant: 1100
Use: 3.
Add your material Y-500-## to the list of components by choosing Edit →
New entries. Enter 1 kg as the required quantity and Stock item as the item
category. In the General data for the item, mark the quantity as a fixed
quantity.
Save the BOM.
3-2-2 Create batch search strategy for production process
Go to
Logistics → Central functions → Batch Management → Batch
Determination → Batch Search Strategy → For Process Order → Create
Create a strategy record with the following data:
Strategy type: ZPI1
Order type: PI01
Plant: 1100
Material: Y-500-##

3-3-3 Create process order and carry out batch determination for
components
Open a process order for material T-HT2##. Use the data for which you
have just created a strategy record. Enter a total quantity of 100 000 pieces
and the current date as the start date. The system accepts the master recipe
with the modified BOM. Call up the material overview.
Select your components that are subject to batch management and choose
Material → Batch management → Carry out determination
The system displays the selection screen for batch determination with all the
required information, including all the batches that match your selection
criteria.
To see how the system found the strategy record used, choose Strategy
analysis.
For more information, you can double-click it.
To overwrite the target values of the selection characteristics, choose
Selection criteria.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-30
Choose Change and enter a smaller interval or a single value.
The search result changes.
Choose
Batch Determination → Without selection criteria.



The system shows all available, existing batches for this
material.
To display a comparison of the selection values from the
strategy record with the batch’s actual characteristic values,
choose Classification.
This shows you why a batch was found or why it was not
displayed.






SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-31
Batch Determination Solutions



Unit: Batch Determination
Topic: Batch Determination in the Various
Application Components


c) Define selection class
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch Determination →
Selection and Sort → Selection Class → Create
or
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto → SAP
Reference IMG):
Logistics - General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check →
Define Selection Class

d) Define and edit sort rules
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch Determination →
Selection and Sort → Sort Rule → Create
or
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto → SAP
Reference IMG):
Logistics - General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check →
Define Sort Rules
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-32
1-1 Batch determination for goods movements: Customizing
In Customizing, choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit
Project → Goto → SAP Reference IMG). Choose Logistics - General → Batch
Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check
Call up each of the functions that affects Inventory Management:
1-1-1 Function: Condition tables
1-1-2 Function: Access sequences
1-1-3 Function: Strategy types
You must not change the strategy type ZMM1 that has been defined for
this exercise!
Look at the default values for strategy type ZMM1 and note the access
sequence with which it is linked.
1-1-4 Function: Definition of batch search procedure
The search procedure Z00001 contains the strategy type ZMM1.

1-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure
The search procedure Z00001 is assigned to movement types 201 and 311.



RECOMMENDATION: For test purposes, it is best to stick
to movement type 201 or 311. If you use these, you do not
have to change or extend the material master data and you do
not need any additional documents.

1-2 Batch determination for goods movements
1-2-1 Create a batch search strategy record for Inventory Management
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch
Determination →Batch Search strategy → For Inventory Management →
Create
In the strategy record, use your selection class as a selection criterion and
your sort rule as a sort criterion.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-33

Field name or data type Values
Strategy type ZMM1
Movement type 201 or 311
Material Y-500-##
Selection criteria 023SE_##
Define your target values for
the selection characteristics.
Sort 040SO_##

1-2-2 Post goods movement with batch determination
Post the goods movement, using the movement type for which you have
maintained data.
Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management. →
Goods movement → Goods issue || movement type 201
or
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Goods Movement → Transfer Posting || movement type 311

Enter the material number and quantity.

Choose Strategy analysis and Selection criteria.
Choose
Batch Determination → Without selection criteria.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-34
2-1 Batch determination in Sales and Distribution: Customizing
In Customizing, choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project
→ Goto → SAP Reference IMG). Choose Logistics - General → Batch
Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check
Call up each of the functions that affect SD:
2-1-1 Function: Condition tables
2-1-2 Function: Access sequences
2-1-3 Function: Strategy types
You must not change the strategy type ZSD1 that has been defined for
this exercise!
Look at the default values for strategy type ZSD1 and note the access
sequence with which it is linked.
2-1-4 Function: Definition of batch search procedure
The search procedure SD0001 contains the strategy type ZSD1.
2-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure
The search procedure SD0001 is assigned to sales organization 1020,
distribution channel 22, division 00, and sales document type TA.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-35
2-2 Carry out batch determination in Sales and Distribution:
2-2-1 Create batch search strategy for SD
Logistics → Central functions → Batch Management → Batch
Determination → Batch Search Strategy → For Sales and Distribution →
Create
In the strategy record, use your selection class as a selection criterion and
your sort rule as a sort criterion.

Field name or data type Values
Strategy type ZSD1
Customer 7777
Material Y-500-##
Selection criteria 023SE_##
Define your target values for
the selection characteristics.
Sort 040SO_##



As you may still want to change the batch search strategy, it
is advisable to copy the Batch search strategy function to
your favorites.

2-2-2 For case 1 (sales order):
Create sales order and carry out batch determination

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Field name or data type Values
Order type Standard order
Sales organization 1020
Distribution channel 22
Division 00.
Sold to party 7777
PO number Any
Material Y-500-##
Quantity Any
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-36
Choose
Edit → Batch determination.

Choose Strategy analysis and Selection criteria.
Choose
Batch Determination → Without selection criteria.

2-2-3 For case 2 (delivery):
Create delivery and carry out batch determination
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change
Remove the batch number entered in the item overview.
Choose
Sales document → Deliver
If you receive a warning message, click the green arrow.
Enter:

Field name or data type Values
Shipping point 1100
Selection date Current date + at least 1 week

In the delivery document, choose
Goto → Item → Batch split. Then choose New batch determination.
The system displays the selection screen for batch determination, which you
are familiar with from exercise 2-2-2.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-37
3-1 Batch determination in process manufacturing: Customizing
In Customizing, choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit
Project. Goto → SAP Reference IMG). Choose
Logistics - General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch
Check
Call up each of the functions that affect process manufacturing:
3-1-1 Function: Condition tables
3-1-2 Function: Access sequences
3-1-3 Function: Strategy types
You must not change the strategy type ZPI1 that has been defined for
this exercise!
Look at the default values for strategy type ZPI1 and note the access
sequence with which it is linked.
3-1-4 Function: Definition of batch search procedure
The search procedure CO0001 contains the strategy type ZPI1.
3-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure
Search procedure CO0001 is assigned to order type PI01 and plant 1100.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-38
3-2 Carrying out batch determination in the production process:
3-2-1 Change BOM
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Bill of
material → Material BOM → Change.
Use the data below:

Field name or data type Values
Material T-HT2##
Plant 1100
Use 3
Add your material Y-500-## to the list of components by choosing Edit →
New entries.
Field name or data type Values
Requirement qty 1 kg
Item category Stock item

Save the BOM.
3-2-2 Create batch search strategy record for the production process
Logistics → Central functions → Batch Management → Batch
Determination → Batch Search Strategy → For Process Order → Create
Create a strategy record with the following data:
Field name or data type Values
Strategy type ZPI1
Order type PI01
Plant 1100
Material Y-500-##
Selection class 023SE_##
Define your target values for
the selection characteristics.
Selection charac-
teristics
040SO_##

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 8-39

3-2-3 Create process order and carry out batch determination for
components
Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process order →
Create → With material

Field name or data type Values
Material T-HT2##
Plant 1100
Order type PI01
Total qty 100,000 pcs
Start date Today
The system accepts the master recipe with the modified BOM. Go to the
material overview.
Select your components that are subject to batch management and choose
Material → Batch management → Carry out determination
Choose Strategy analysis and Selection criteria.
Choose
Batch Determination → Without selection criteria.
Choose Change and enter a smaller interval or a single value.
The search result changes.
Choose
Batch Determination → Without selection criteria.






SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-1
© SAP AG 1999
Price Determination
¤ Functionality
¤ Condition Technique in Pricing for Batches
¤ Presentation in the Billing Document
¤ Partial Stocks and Their Combinations
¤ Structure of Valuation for a Single Batch
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-2
© SAP AG 1999
Price Determination: Objectives
¤ Describe the use of the condition technique in the
price determination process for batches
¤ Outline the effects of and prerequisites for
individual batch valuation
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Price Determination: Course Overview Diagram
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch Status Mgmt
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-4
© SAP AG 1999
Price Determination: Business Scenario
¤ Your company makes batches of widely varying
quality and wants to price by batch.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-5
© SAP AG 1999
Functionality
¤ You can define a separate sales price for each
batch.
¤ You can proceed differently from batch to
batch.
¤ If you want a batch to have a different sales
price, you must create a separate condition
record for it in SD.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-6
© SAP AG 1999
Condition tables
Group the important fields in
condition tables.
Cust.
Material
Batch
Material Material
Batch Batch
Material
Access sequence
Define the sequence of the condition
tables in price determination...
Customer Material Batch
Batch Batch Material Material
Material
Condition
type
...assign to a condition type...
Calculation
procedure
Condition
type
...and combine as a
calculation
procedure.
1
1 1
2
2 2
3
3 3
4
4 4
Condition
type
Condition
type
Condition Technique in Pricing for Batches



Þ You will find the described settings in Customizing for SD.
Þ Pricing uses condition technique. If you want to be able to store a price at batch level, you must
include the Batch number field in a condition table.
Þ By making different entries in Customizing, you can define a pricing condition for the material and
define a different price for certain batches only.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-7
© SAP AG 1999
Display in Billing Document
¤ Go to Customizing for Sales and Distribution.
¤ Choose 'Sales' -> 'Billing' -> 'Billing Documents'->
Maintain Copying Control for Billing Documents ->
Þ 'Copying Control: Delivery Document to Billing Document'.
¤ If, for example, for key combination F2, LF, TAN, you want
to have ...
Þ ... the display at main item level, set the indicator 'G' or 'H' as
the billing quantity in the item details.
Þ ... the display with a batch split at item level, set the indicator
'B' or 'D' as the billing quantity in the item details.



Þ The delivery allows batch splitting. You can store different prices for the different batches. This
requires that the invoice document shows batch prices. You can change the display in the system
through the Customizing settings described. You can choose between a total price at item level or all
individual batch prices per item.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-8
© SAP AG 1999
Partial Stocks and Their Combinations
Split valuation and
split inventory management
according to set valuation categories G
Split inventory management
in batches (number = open)
Inventory management in batches and
split valuation
according to set valuation categories
Split inventory management
and split valuation
in batches = valuation for a single batch
-
-
-
- -
- X
Batch mgmt
requirement
Mgmt of partial
stocks



Þ As well as managing batches in Inventory Management, you can valuate partial stocks separately
within the plant level.
Þ You can valuate them according to set valuation categories or you can decide individually for each
batch.
Þ The last procedure is known as valuation for a single batch. You not only have to set the indicator for
batch requirement, but also have to set the “valuation category” field to “X” at plant level on the
accounting screen for the material.
Þ This means that stock valuation can be defined differently for each batch.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-9
© SAP AG 1999
Structure of Valuation for a Single Batch
Plant
Valuation area 0001
Material 1
Valuation cat. X
Quantity 10
MAP 5.20
SLoc
Batch
Valuation
Quantity 40
MAP 4.00
Valuation cat.
Batch 1
Quantity 60
St. price 6.00
Valuation cat.
Batch 2
Batch 1
Quantity 10
Batch 2
Quantity 20
Batch 1
Quantity 30
Batch 2
Quantity 40
Plant 0001
Material 1
Stor. loc. 0001
Quantity 30
Stor. loc. 0002
Quantity 70



Þ For materials subject to the valuation for a single batch procedure, the stocks and stock values are
managed on a cumulative basis at valuation area level. You have to use moving average price control
for materials at valuation level because the moving average price is managed for the whole valuation
area.
Þ In addition, the system creates a valuation record for each batch used. This contains specific
valuation data.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 9-10
© SAP AG 1999
Price Determination: Summary
You are now able to:
¤ Describe the use of the condition technique in the
price determination process for batches
¤ Outline the effects of and prerequisites for
individual batch valuation



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-1
© SAP AG 1999
Shelf Life Expiration Date
¤ Business Background
¤ Integration
¤ Shelf Life Expiration Date Check in Goods Receipt
¤ Central Fields in the Purchase Order
¤ Calculation of the Shelf Life Expiration Date
¤ Shelf Life Expiration Date Check in Batch
Determination
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-2
© SAP AG 1999
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
¤ Explain the significance of the shelf life expiration
date in connection with materials subject to a
batch management requirement
¤ Verify how the system calculates the shelf life
expiration date of a newly-delivered batch
Shelf Life Expiration Date: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Shelf Life Expiration Date: Overview Diagram
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch
Status Management
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-4
© SAP AG 1999
Shelf Life Expiration Date: Business Scenario
¤ Your company requires that the remaining shelf life
of bought-in components handled in batches must
be sufficiently long to enable it to manufacture the
finished product and ship it to the customer in
good time.
¤ An enterprise that is not using the Warehouse
Management (WM) component wishes to record the
shelf life expiration date of quantities of materials
in the SAP System.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-5
© SAP AG 1999
Business Background
The shelf life expiration date check is particularly
important in the following industries:
¤ Foodstuffs
¤ Retail
¤ Pharmaceuticals
¤ Chemicals
¤ Cosmetics
¤ Health and hygiene



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-6
© SAP AG 1999
Integration
¤ The shelf life expiration date check can be used with
and without batch management requirement.
¤ It must be maintained for goods receipt before you
can use it in batch determination.
¤ It does not restrict existing functionality.
¤ You can decide whether you want to use it in
individual cases.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-7
© SAP AG 1999
Material master record
• Remaining shelf life
• Total shelf life
Batch master record
• Expiration date
Important fields in master records Important fields in master records
Shelf Life Expiration Date Check in Goods Receipt
¤ Must be maintained. The
system checks date
against this value.
¤ Can be maintained. This
value is used to calculate
the expiration date. Set at
the time of the goods
receipt posting.



Þ The time you specify in the material master can be defined in days or in other time periods,
controlled via the period indicator.
Þ The function module exit EXIT_SAPLMHD1_001 in SAP enhancement SAPLMHD1 is used to
calculate and check the shelf life expiration date (SLED).
Þ You can use this exit to modify the data for calculating and checking the SLED.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-8
© SAP AG 1999
Header
Items
Purchase order Purchase order
Additional data Additional data
Batch
Vendor
Vendor batch
Expiration date
Vendor
Vendor batch
Expiration
date
Batch master record Batch master record
Batch
Expiration
date
Goods receipt Goods receipt
Vendor batch
Central Fields in the Purchase Order



Þ In the order document, you can earmark the target batch to which the posting is to be made upon
goods receipt. This requires you to have already created the target batch number. Likewise, you can
earmark the vendor batch in the purchase order. This is the batch number under which the vendor
manages his goods. In the purchase order, you can specify a minimum value for the shelf life
expiration date.
Þ If the target batch already exists in the system, your master record will contain information on the
vendor, his batch number, and the shelf life expiration date specified. The data is entered in the batch
record upon the first goods receipt posting or is entered manually.
A check is made against this data upon other goods receipt postings.
Þ You can also post the goods receipt to new batches. Your master record is then created when the
posting is made.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-9
© SAP AG 1999
Goods receipt
Material 4712
100 items
Posting date: 07/10/99
Batch master Batch master
record record
Expiration date Expiration date
Material master record
Remaining shelf life: 10 days
Date of
prod.:
07/01/99
Total shelf life: 20 days
07/01/97 + 20 days
= 07/21/99
07/21/97 - 07/10/97
= 11 days
Shelf life
expiration date
Remaining
shelf life
11 >10 => O.K.!
Calculation of the Shelf Life Expiration Date



Þ If both the total shelf life and the minimum remaining shelf life are maintained, the system executes
two functions in succession. It:
º Calculates the shelf life expiration date of the goods received.
º Checks the shelf life expiration date that has been calculated.
Þ The system calculates the shelf life expiration date the first time a batch is received:
It is calculated from the date of production plus the total shelf life. You specify the date of
production when making the goods receipt posting. If the total shelf life has not been stored in the
material master record, you must enter the shelf life expiration date at this point.
Þ The difference between the shelf life expiration date and the posting date is the remaining shelf life
of the goods received. It must not be less than the minimum remaining shelf life from the material
master record. If it were less, the system would respond with a warning or an error message,
depending on the setting in Customizing.
Þ Upon the next goods receipt for the same batch, the system compares the shelf life expiration date of
the goods received with the shelf life expiration date that has been calculated.
You can overwrite the existing entry in the batch master record if a warning message has been set in
Customizing for this case.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-10
© SAP AG 1999
Strategy record Y Strategy record Y
Remaining shelf life
(direct entry)
Delivery date Delivery date
(set by system) (set by system)
Selection characteristics
Selection class
4
Batch Batch 4243 4243
Expiration date Expiration date
11/28/97 11/28/97
(can be calculated (can be calculated
by the system) by the system)
Delivery date 11/15/97
+ remaining shelf life 10 days
= 11/25/97
11/25/97 < 11/28/97
=> OK ! => O
Batch
characteristics
SLED Check in Batch Determination
Batch class 2



Þ In batch determination, you can make a selection using the batch's shelf life expiration date.
Þ This requires you to include standard characteristic LOBM_RLZ for the remaining shelf life in the
selection criteria as well as standard characteristic LOBM_LFDAT for the delivery date.
Þ You enter the required remaining shelf life in the strategy record. Depending on the business
transaction, this can be the required batch specification for production or the requirements of the
customer to whom the delivery is to be made.
Þ For example, the material is to be available in production or to have reached the customer by the
required delivery date.
Þ The system uses these two characteristic values to calculate a minimum required shelf life expiration
date of the batch sought if standard characteristic LOBM_LFDAT has been maintained accordingly.
Þ The SAP R/3 System comes with the standard characteristics. For the shelf life expiration date to be
calculated dynamically, object dependencies must be defined and linked to characteristic
LOBM_LFDAT.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-11
© SAP AG 1999
Shelf Life Expiration Date: Summary
¤ Explain the significance of the shelf life expiration
date in connection with materials subject to a
batch management requirement
You are now able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-12
Shelf Life Expiration Date Exercises



Unit: Shelf Life Expiration Date

Topic: Shelf Life Expiration Date Check


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Define rules in the master data to check the shelf life expiration
date
• Carry out goods receipts with shelf life expiration date check
for purchase orders
• Verify the shelf life expiration date in the batch master record



For materials with a limited shelf life that are handled in batches,
the system should calculate and check the shelf life expiration date
at goods receipt.
You want to verify...
... how the system calculates the shelf life expiration date of the
delivered batch
... whether the remaining shelf life meets the requirements


1-1 Change the shelf life data in the material master
Use the transaction Change material master from your favorites.
Call up the master data for material Y-500-##.
For plant 1100, extend the following data in the General Plant Data / Storage 1
view:

Minimum remaining shelf life: 30 days
Total shelf life: 50 days
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-13
1-2 Post goods receipt for purchase order with entry of shelf life expiration
date/production date
1-2-1 First of all, create the purchase order. You can then copy it.
Option 1: Choose Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing →
Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known.
Create a new purchase order for vendor 100, purchasing organization IDES
Germany, purchasing group Zuse, K, company code IDES AG Germany.
Order the material Y-500-##.
Call up the item details and check in the delivery section that the remaining
shelf life of 30 days has been copied from the material master.
Save the purchase order and make a note of the number.
Option 2: Use transaction ME21 in the command field (entry "/NME21").
This is the quickest way of copying a reference purchase order in a system
that is not configured for the individual user.
Again choose Purchase order ¬ Copy.
Enter purchase order number 4100000955 as a reference document.
Adopt the item shown and enter your own material as the second item. Go
to the item screen for the second item. Choose
Item → More functions → Additional data.
A remaining shelf life of 30 days is shown. You can change the value. Save
the purchase order and make a note of the number. You can also create a
purchase order yourself with vendor 100, purchasing organization 1000 and
purchasing group 007.

Purchase order: ____________________________________________

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-14
1-2-2 Post the goods receipt.
• Enter your purchase order number. Call up the item details and the batch section in it.
Extend the batch number of your choice.
• The system prompts you to enter a date of production, as you entered a total shelf life in
exercise 1-1. Enter a date. The system then calculates the shelf life expiration date and
checks whether the remaining shelf life is sufficient.
• Copy the purchase order item by selecting it on the Item Overview screen and setting it to
OK.
Save your goods movement.



You can also post the goods receipt via the transaction
MB01.

1-3 Verify shelf life expiration date in the batch master record
Call up the batch master record from your favorites or via the menu.
As you see, the system automatically filled the expiration date field. Try to track
how the system calculated the date.


Hints:
• You can also try out the same procedure without entering
a total shelf life in the system.
• You can add the standard characteristic for the expiration
date to the class C## of your material (search for the
characteristic LOBM* via F4 help).
Then display the classification for several batches of
material Y-500-##. All batches have transferred the
expiration date (current value) in the batch classification
to the relevant characteristic (there may not be a current
value if the expiration date was not checked at goods
receipt).







SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-15
Shelf Life Expiration Date Solutions



Unit: Shelf Life Expiration Date

Topic: Shelf Life Expiration Date Check
1-1 Change the shelf life data in the material master
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately

Field name or data type Values
Material Y-500-##
View General Plant Data / Storage 1
Plant 1100
Minimum remaining shelf life 30 days
Total shelf life 50 days

1-2 Post goods receipt for purchase order with entry of shelf life expiration
date/production date

1-2-1 First of all, create the purchase order. You can then copy it.
Using transaction ME21 or ME21N, copy the reference purchase order
4100000955 (Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing →
Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known).
You can also create a new purchase order.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 10-16
It is important that you create a purchase order item for material Y-500-##.
Field name or data type Values
Vendor 100
Purchasing org. 1000 / IDES Germany
Purchasing group
007 / Zuse, K
Plant 1100 / Berlin
Storage location 0001
Material Y-500-##
Quantity Any
Price Any
Minimum remaining shelf life 30 days (taken from the
material master)

1-2-2 Post the goods receipt via
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods
Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → PO Number
Known.
Field name or data type Values
PO number See exercise 1-2-1
Batch Any
Production date 2 weeks previously
Note: You can also post the goods receipt via the transaction MB01.

1-3 Verify shelf life expiration date in the batch master record
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Batch → Display.




SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 11-1
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Where-used List
¤ Business Background
¤ Batch Tracking over Several Manufacturing Levels
¤ The Pick-up List
¤ Batch Where-used List for Trading Goods
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 11-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Describe the functions of the batch where-used
list
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Batch Where-used List: Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 11-3
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch
Status Management
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9
Batch Where-used List: Overview Diagram



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 11-4
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Your company needs to recall one or more batches
from the market due to quality reasons.
¤ A report is required to determine where the batch is
located, which customers need to be contacted,
and what component batches went into the recall
batch.
Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 11-5
© SAP AG 1999
Business Background
¤ The batch where-used list documents the progress of
a batch through an enterprise.
¤ It has particular importance with regard to questions of
product liability.
¤ As of Release 3.0 of the SAP R/3 System, it can also
be used for the material type trading goods.
¤ The documenting of batch movements in the system
also extends to transfer postings covering changes in
batch numbers and to physical stock transfers.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 11-6
© SAP AG 1999
F = finished product
S = semi-fin. product
R = raw material
Customer A Customer B Customer C
F1 F1 F2 F2
Production order Production order
S2 S2
Production order Production order
Purchase
order
Vendor
R1 R1 R2 R2
Top
down
Bottom
up
S1 S1
Batch Tracking over Several Manufacturing Levels
Sales order Sales order Sales order



Þ Using Inventory Management functionality, the batch where-used list shows a batch's progress
through the company. From the initial posting through to deletion from inventory, each batch has its
own document journal. In addition, the system logs links between batches across all manufacturing
levels through to the sales order and batch splits.
Þ The progress of a batch is recorded only if an inventory posting has been made. Together with the
material document, the system records the numbers of the reference documents such as the
production order and sales order.
Þ The display variants top down and bottom up describe the perspective on the batch's lifecycle.
Þ You can also edit the batch where-used list graphically.
Display options
1. Tree structure: Hierarchical format
2. ALV list: You can enhance this list with additional modifications or fields (for example, if you want
to reorganize columns, calculate totals, or add batch master data).
• For more information, refer to the step Set Up Customer Exit for Batch Where-used List in the
Implementation Guide (IMG) for Batch Management.
• The function module EXIT_SAPLCHVW_001 in the SAP enhancement SAPLCHVW is provided
for the batch where-used list. You use this exit to fill the fields you have added to the ALV list of
the batch where-used list (for example, fields with batch master data such as the shelf life
expiration date).
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 11-7
© SAP AG 1999
Sales order Sales order
T = Trading Goods
Customer A Customer B
T1
T1
Purchase Purchase
order order
Vendor
Plant 02
Pick Pick- -up list up list
¤ Billing
document
¤ Sales order
¤ Scheduling
agreement
¤ Delivery note
T1
Sales order Sales order
Batch Where-used List for Trading Goods



Þ The “pick-up list” makes it easier to access the batch where-used list from an SD document: it selects
the flagged documents for the material, reads the batches used therein, and then branches to the batch
where-used list.
Þ In the case of a trading good to be handled in batches, there is no detailed list of possible
manufacturing levels.
The result is a document journal that likewise shows the delivery note and sales order.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 11-8
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Describe the functions of the batch where-used
list
You are now able to:
Batch Where-used List: Summary



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-1
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Specification and Quality Management
¤ Quality Management (QM) Inspections in Logistics
¤ Simplified Batch Maintenance with QM
¤ Creating a Material Specification
¤ Setting up QM Inspection Data in the Material Master
Record
¤ Transfer of Inspection Results
¤ Example: Quality Inspection upon Goods Receipt from
Production
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-2
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Specification: Unit Objectives
¤ Describe the steps involved in maintaining batch
data from within the Quality Management module
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-3
© SAP AG 1999
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch
Batch Specification: Overview Diagram



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-4
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Specification: Business Scenario
¤ Your company uses the QM component to check
batches that have been produced.
¤ The inspection results are recorded and are to be
transferred directly into the batch classification.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-5
© SAP AG 1999
Material 308-188
to be handled in batches
Goods receipt Goods issue Production
C4
A4
A2
A1
B3
Quality Management (QM) Inspections in Logistics



Þ Quality inspections can be made in a wide variety of areas in Logistics.
New batches can be created in each inspection of a material to be handled in batches if this seems
necessary on the basis of the QM results.
Þ Goods procured externally are inspected for the first time upon goods receipt.
Þ Inspections accompanying production are made during the production process, or the product
produced in-house is inspected before being added to stock.
Þ If goods are delivered externally, they are inspected before delivery to customers.
Þ Goods stored in a warehouse can be subject to quality inspection at regular intervals.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-6
© SAP AG 1999
Goods receipt
Material 308-188
A1 A1
Batch Batch
Viscosity
Covering
power
QM insp. result
308-188
A1
Master insp.
characteristics
General characteristics
Classification Classification
Viscosity Viscosity 750 CP 750 CP
Covering power 85% Covering power 85%
Simplified Batch Maintenance with QM
85%
750 CP



Þ QM uses master inspection characteristics to store inspection results.
Þ The batch keeps its specification values in the characteristics of the batch class. To distinguish them
from master inspection characteristics, they are referred to as general characteristics.
Þ If the master inspection characteristic describes the same thing as the general characteristic, you
should link them to avoid duplicate maintenance. You do this in the QM master record Material
specification. The inspection values can be transferred to the batch classification automatically.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-7
© SAP AG 1999
Material
Classification
data
Classification System Quality Management
Batch class
Material specification Material specification
Master insp. character X General characteristic A General characteristic A
Master insp. character Y General characteristic B General characteristic B
A A
B B
X
Y
Creating a Material Specification



Þ To transfer the inspection results from quality management to the batch specification automatically,
you have to set up the data as follows:
Þ You have to define as a numeric value the general characteristic that you want to transfer to the
inspection results. In addition, the values specified for this characteristic must be within a single
interval.
Þ You must always create a master inspection characteristic with reference to the general characteristic
in QM. This ensures that the interval limits of the general characteristic are transferred if a quality
inspection is made using a material specification.
Þ A material specification is created for the material in the QM system, where a master inspection
characteristic is assigned to each general characteristic. This link clearly determines which master
inspection characteristic transfers its result to which general characteristic.
Þ If master inspection characteristics have already been created in the system with reference to general
characteristics of the material, they are included in the material specification.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-8
© SAP AG 1999
Material view QM
Inspection with specification
Insp. lot
QM inspection data
Details on
Inspection type
...
Setting up QM Insp. Data in the Mat. Master Record



Þ If you want the material specification of a material to be considered in the quality inspection, you
must maintain the indicator Inspect with specification in the QM view of the material master record.
You can set this indicator for each inspection type.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-9
© SAP AG 1999
Save usage decision Save usage decision
Inspection results
- non-closed (open) characteristics
Inspection results
- closed characteristics
Batch class
General characteristics
?
Result
Result
Automatic
Batch class
General characteristics
Manual
No Yes
Transfer of Inspection Results



Þ The inspection results are recorded in the quality inspection and the individual inspection
characteristics then closed. This is followed by the usage decision on the material inspected.
Þ With the usage decision, the values are transferred from the master inspection characteristic to the
general characteristic assigned.
Þ The mean value of the inspection characteristic concerned is written to the general characteristic
automatically if the inspection characteristic has the status closed. The inspection is otherwise
regarded as terminated (discontinued) and the value can be transferred only manually from the
inspection characteristic to the general characteristic.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-10
© SAP AG 1999
Batch A1 Batch A1
A A 96 96
B B 1750 1750
Material
308-188
QM data
Insp. type
Production
Usage decision
Insp. lot
1234
1234
X 96
Y 1750
Goods receipt
Characteristic value
assignment
Batch Batch
A1 A1
Results recording 1234
Example: Example: Quality Inspection upon GR from Production Quality Inspection upon GR from Production



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-11
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Specification: Summary
You are now able to:
¤ Describe the steps involved in maintaining batch
data from within the Quality Management module



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-12
Batch Specification and Quality Management Exercises

Additional Exercise: Optional
Unit: Batch Specification and Quality Management
Topic: Linking Master Inspection Characteristics
with a Material’s Class Characteristics


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a master inspection characteristic in QM and link it
with a material’s class characteristics
• Create inspection lots when you enter a goods receipt for a
purchase order
• Enter a usage decision
• Check that the inspection result is transferred to the class
characteristics of the batch concerned


You intend to include the inspection results in the valuation of
your batch managed materials that are subject to inspection,
provided that the inspection characteristic is consistent with the
classification characteristic.
You have to prepare the system so that the automatic transfer runs
smoothly.
To be on the safe side, test your settings using a concrete
example.
1-1 Preparations
Maintain QM data in material master
Use the transaction Change material master from your favorites.
Change the Quality Management view in the material master of material Y-500-##,
plant 1100 and define an inspection procedure for the material:

Click Inspection setup.
Click Create inspection data.

Enter inspection type 05 (=inspection for ‘other’ goods receipt) and activate this
inspection type by selecting the Active Field. Choose Enter.

Click Inspection settings again.
Set the indicator for E Inspection with specification and
remove the indicator for E Task List.
Save the changes in the material master.
1-2 Link master inspection characteristic and class characteristic
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-13

1-2-1 Edit material specification
Check whether material Y-500 -## and its class characteristic covering
power (M4-##) are linked to QM.

1-2-2 Create master inspection characteristic
Create a master inspection characteristic and link it to the class
characteristic M4-##.
Give the master inspection characteristic the number 4-4##.

Use the data below:
Plant 1100
Master insp. characteristic 4-4##
Valid from Current date
Class characteristic M4-##

Status = released, . Save.

1-2-3 Edit material specification
Carry out step 2 again: Display the link you have created between the
master inspection characteristic 4-4## and the class characteristic M4-##.
. Save the specification.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-14
2-1 Goods receipt for purchase order with creation of inspection lot
Create a batch and an inspection lot.
Using movement type 501, post an ‘other’ goods receipt of 500 KG to storage
location 0001, plant 1100. Assign your own batch number.
Assign values to all characteristics, apart from the characteristic covering power.
(If you assign a value to this characteristic at this point, quality inspection will
overwrite the value).
Use the transaction from your favorites or call it up from the menu.
2-2 Enter the inspection result.
Search for the inspection lots for your material Y-500-##. The system will find one
inspection lot exactly and display it in the frame on the left-hand side.
Double-click line 9999 Check with material specification for work center in the left
frame.
On the entry screen:
Select the item and click Edit – Characteristic – Choose [or the magnifying glass
icon < ]: xQuer = 92
1
.
Edit - Lock [or choose the lock icon &],
(By-pass any dialog boxes by choosing Accept). . Save.
2-3 Record the usage decision.
Double-click the line with inspection number 5000…in the left frame.
On the entry screen:
In the UD code field, use F4 help to enter an acceptance without further action and
. save the usage decision.
Select the Inspection Lot Stock tab and post the quantity concerned (500 KG) to the
appropriate stock type: Enter 500 in the line To unrestricted and . save again.

1
This is the value measured for the characteristic covering power in quality inspection.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-15
2-4 Check the batch classification:
Display the stock overview for material Y-500-##:
Double-click the relevant batch line and call up the classification data: The value
92% is entered as the characteristic value for covering power.






SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-16
Batch Specification and Quality Management Solutions



Unit: Batch Specification and Quality Management
Topic: Linking Master Inspection Characteristics
with a Material’s Class Characteristics
1-1 Preparations
Maintain QM data in material master
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately

Field name or data type Values
Material Y-500-##
View Quality Management
Organizational level
Plant

1100
Inspection type 05

Pay attention to the instructions for inspection type 05 in the exercise text.
Save the changes in the material master.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-17
1-2 Link master inspection characteristic and class characteristic
1-2-1 Edit material specification
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Quality Planning for Material → Inspection Planning → Material
Specification → Edit

Field name or data type Values
Material Y-500-##
Plant 1100
The class characteristic M4-## does not have an equivalent in QM.
2

1-2-2 Create master inspection characteristic
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Quality Planning for Material → Basic Data → Inspection Characteristic
→ Create

Field name or data type Values
Plant 1100
Master insp. characteristic 4-4##
Valid from Current date
Class characteristic M4-##
Status Released

1-2-3 Edit material specification
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Quality Planning for Material → Inspection Planning → Material
Specification → Edit

Field name or data type Values
Material Y-500-##
The class characteristic M4-## is assigned to master inspection
characteristic 4-4##.
. Save the specification.

2
Only characteristics that have been defined numerically can be linked. In QM, you can enter a result
for numerical characteristics only.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-18
2-1 Goods receipt for purchase order with creation of inspection lot
Create a batch and an inspection lot.
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management.→ Goods
Movement → Goods Receipt → Other
Initial screen
Field name Values
Movement type 501
Plant 1100
Storage location 0001

At item level:
Field name Values
Material Y-500-##
Quantity 500 KG
Batch number Any, internal or external
Characteristic value assignment Any or within the allowed
values
No characteristic value
assignment for the
characteristic covering power.
Due to the configuration of QM in the material master (inspection type 05), the
system creates an inspection lot when you save an ‘other’ goods receipt.
2-2 Enter the inspection result:
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording
Execute the transaction and enter the result.

Field name Values
Material
Y-500-##
XQuer (result)
(characteristic 4-4##)
92
3



3
This is the value measured for the characteristic covering power in quality inspection.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 12-19
2-3 Enter the usage decision:
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Usage Decision → Record

Field name Values
Material
Y-500-##
Insp. lot 5000....
UD code A (acceptance without further
action)
2-4 Check the batch classification:
Display the stock overview for material Y-500-##:
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Environment → Stock → Stock Overview
or
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Stock → Stock
overview





SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Process Flow
¤ Inspection During Production: Master Data
¤ Inspection During Production: Master Recipe
¤ Inspection During Production: Material Master
¤ Inspection During Production: Material Specification
¤ Master Recipe and Material Specification
¤ Checks in the Production Process
¤ Creation of Partial Lots
¤ Relationship Between Partial Lots and Batches
¤ Batch Number Assignment
Contents:
Appendix: Batch Creation in Process Manufacturing



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Understand how batch maintenance is integrated
with Quality Management in production
An operation from PP-PI serves as an example.
¤ Be able to explain how production can control
batch creation
At the conclusion of this unit, you will:
Appendix: Batch Creation: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-3
© SAP AG 1999
Appendix: Batch Creation Overview Diagram
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-4
© SAP AG 1999
Appendix: Batch Creation Business Scenario
¤ Your company, which is engaged in process
manufacturing, checks the batches it produces at
various inspection points in the production process.
¤ The examination can yield different quality results.
The quantities taken from the production process
and examined can be posted to more than one batch
within a production run.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-5
© SAP AG 1999
5 5 5
Create control recipe
-> PI sheet
Availability check
3 3 3
Open
process order
1 1 1 Receipt in warehouse
9 9 9
Confirmations
8 8 8
Material withdrawal
6 6 6
Copy
2 2 2
Master recipe with
QM data
Order release
4 4 4
Insp. lot is created
Production process
7 7 7
Quality insp. and
batch assignment
Process Process
instructions instructions
Resource
assignment
Material
components
Operations Operations
Phases Phases
Header Header
. .
. .
. .
Process Flow



Þ In PP-PI, you can open a process order based on a master recipe in different ways:
º manually using a material
º without using a material
º from one or more planned orders created in material requirements planning.
Þ The data from the master recipe (in which QM data is also maintained) is copied to the order.
Þ The system checks the availability of the material components.
Þ Depending on how your system is configured in Customizing, an inspection lot is created upon
release of the order.
You can also create the inspection lot manually.
Þ A control recipe is created from the order. The control recipe is sent manually and the person
responsible processes the resulting PI sheet on the process control system.
Þ Materials are withdrawn from stock on the basis of the requirements in the PI sheet.
Þ Quality inspections are made in the production process based on defined inspection points in the
recipe. This results in partial lots to which batch numbers are assigned.
Þ Quantities of materials produced are confirmed and posted to stock.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-6
© SAP AG 1999
Material view QM
Material specification
PP-PI MM
QM
Master Master insp insp. character X . character X General characteristic A General characteristic A
Master Master insp insp. character Y . character Y General characteristic B General characteristic B
Master recipe
Insp. lot
1234
Inspection During Production: Master Data



Þ The inspection requirements for operations and phases are defined in the master recipe. You plan
how and what you want to inspect. You can define QM data at header level and operation level.
Þ The QM view and the QM inspection data must be maintained in the material master record of the
material to be produced. The inspection type Inspect during production must be activated in the
material master record.
Þ Inspection results are transferred only to those general characteristics that are linked to a master
inspection characteristic via the material specification.
Þ The inspection lot is created either manually or automatically upon release of the process order.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-7
© SAP AG 1999
Master recipe Master recipe
¤ Inspection
points
Header Header
QM data QM data
Operation/phase Operation/phase
¤ Inspection grid
- Time-related
- Quantity-related
- Unrestricted
¤ Indicator for last
partial lot assignment
4Sampling procedure
with inspection
points and insp.
frequency
Inspection During Production: Master Recipe
Char. Char.



Þ There are a number of different settings you have to make in the master recipe.
Þ QM data is maintained in the master recipe header. Here, you set the inspection points indicator.
Þ At operation or phase level, you can define in the inspection grid whether you want the inspection
intervals to be:
º time-related
º quantity-related
º unrestricted.
The sampling procedure determines the inspection frequency.
Þ In the last operation or phase, you can set the indicator Last partial lot assignment so that the order is
confirmed as a partial lot only after all the operations have been executed.
Þ For the inspection characteristic in the operation or phase, you enter which sampling procedure is to
be used.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-8
© SAP AG 1999
Inspection type:
Inspect in production
Inspection type details:
Material view QM
QM inspection data
Insp. lot
¤ Inspection with specification
Inspection During Production: Material Master



Þ In the material master record of the material to be produced, there are a number of different settings
that you have to make in the QM view.
Þ Choose the inspection type Inspection during production in the QM inspection data.
Set the following indicators in the inspection type details:
Þ Inspect with specification determines that values are copied from QM to the batch classification.
Þ Inspect with plan causes a plan (recipe in this case), in which the inspection is defined, to be
considered.
Þ Characteristic inspection indicates that an inspection is made for characteristics stored in the recipe.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-9
© SAP AG 1999
Master insp. charac. 1
Viscosity
Covering
power
1700 1700 - -1780 CP 1780 CP
0 0 - - 98% 98%
Viscosity 1700 1700 - -1780 CP 1780 CP
Covering
power
0 0 - - 98% 98%
Material specification Material specification
Inspection During Production: Mat. Specification
Master insp. charac. 5
General characteristic A
General characteristic B



Þ General characteristics are linked to master inspection characteristics in the QM master record
Material specification.
Þ The general characteristics are stored in the material master record. Here, you define values allowed
for the material. The general characteristics that are passed on to the batches by inheritance are
primarily important for batch determination.
Þ You create master inspection characteristics in QM and assign them to operations and phases in the
master recipe. Quality inspection results are stored in them as characteristic values.
Þ The aim of linking master inspection characteristics and class characteristics is to transfer the result
values from the quality inspection to the batches automatically.
Þ You assign values to the batch class characteristics during in-production quality inspection.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-10
© SAP AG 1999
Master insp. charac. 1
?
?
?
?
Coordination of master Coordination of master insp insp. characteristics . characteristics
Master recipe Master recipe Specification Specification
10 Operation 10
Viscosity 200 200 - - 2000 CP 2000 CP
Master insp. charac. 2 20
Temperature . . . . . .
Master insp. charac. 3 20 Operation 10
Density . . . . . .
Master insp. charac. 4 30 Operation 10
pH . . . . . .
Master insp. charac. 1
Viscosity 1700 1700 - -1780 CP 1780 CP
Master insp. charac. 5
Covering
power
. . . . . .
Master Recipe and Material Specification



Þ You can create master inspection characteristics in QM. You can then include them in the recipe
and, if required, change the interval values.
Þ If the inspection is made using the material specification only, you must maintain the operation data
in Customizing for inspection types.
Þ You can use master inspection characteristics in the master recipe and the material specification at
the same time.
Þ The list of inspection characteristics in the recipe can differ from that in the material specification.
Þ Since the recipe can apply to several materials, it is possible for the interval values here to differ
from those in the material specification.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-11
© SAP AG 1999
Copy
Coordination of master Coordination of master insp insp. . charac charac. .
Master insp. charac. 1
Insp Insp. lot . lot
10 Operation 10
1700 1700 - -1780 CP 1780 CP
Master insp. charac. 2 20
Master insp. charac. 3 20 Operation 10
Master insp. charac. 4 30 Operation 10
Master insp. charac. 5 9999
Specification Specification
Master insp. charac. 1
1700 1700 - -1780 CP 1780 CP
Master insp. charac. 5
Copy
Master insp. charac. 1
Master recipe Master recipe
10 Operation 10 200 200 - - 2000 CP 2000 CP
Master insp. charac. 2 20
Master insp. charac. 3 20 Operation 10
Master insp. charac. 4 30 Operation 10
Master Recipe and Material Specification



Þ If you use the master recipe and the material specification together, the total characteristics from the
recipe and the specification form the list of master inspection characteristics for the inspection lot.
Þ If the characteristics' value intervals differ, the system copies the requirements from the material
specification to the inspection lot. The data in the master recipe is suppressed.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-12
© SAP AG 1999
pH value
Operation 30 Operation 30
Discharge Discharge
Operation 20 Operation 20
React React
Operation 10 Operation 10
Charge Charge
1
Viscosity Viscosity
Mat no.
303-188
Covering Covering
power power
Covering Covering
power power
Viscosity Viscosity
Partial lot 1
2
Density
Temperature
3
4
5
Batch A1
Checks in the Production Process
Partial lot 1 Partial lot 1



Þ In the in-process inspection, the inspection characteristics are used in operations and phases in the
master recipe. In this recipe, you can either create inspection characteristics or refer to existing
master inspection characteristics.
Þ By means of a link, the results of the quality inspection can be automatically transferred from the
inspection characteristics to the corresponding general characteristics of the quantity produced.
Þ Values are transferred only between characteristics linked by a material specification.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-13
© SAP AG 1999
Operation 30 Operation 30
Discharge Discharge
Inspection
point
Operation
20 React
Operation 10
Charge
Operation 20 Operation 20
React React
Operation 10 Operation 10
Charge Charge
1 1 3 3 4 4
2 2 5 5
Partial lot 1
Partial lot 2
10 ' 20 ' 20 '
Creation of Partial Lots



Þ This graphic representation shows the connection between inspection points and partial lots.
Þ If you decided on inspection points in the master recipe, you always record the results in in-
production quality control with reference to them. In contrast to inspection without inspection points,
you can record inspection results for the inspection characteristics of the same operation several
times in succession.
Þ For each process order, you can create an inspection lot, splitting it into partial lots if required.
Þ If you do not confirm any (partial) quantities in production or if you do not use inspection points, the
inspection results are recorded for the entire inspection lot.
Þ However, if production is in quantities, the system offers you the option of creating a new partial lot
or of adopting the preceding one at each inspection point.
Þ Your decision should depend on whether different inspection results for the quantities produced
require assignment to separate partial lots.
Þ In the case of a material to be handled in batches, different partial lots later allow separate inventory
management since a batch can be created from each partial lot.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-14
© SAP AG 1999
Partial lot 3 Partial lot 3 Partial lot 1 Partial lot 1 Partial lot 2 Partial lot 2
Viscosity Viscosity 1930 1930 cst cst
pH value pH value 7.5 7.5
Batch 1 Batch 1 Batch 2 Batch 2
Viscosity Viscosity 1950 1950 cst cst
pH value pH value 7.5 7.5
Viscosity Viscosity 1950 1950 cst cst
pH value pH value 7.5 7.5
Relationship Between Partial Lots and Batches



Þ If several partial lots are created in a production run, a separate batch number can be assigned to each
partial lot. Reference is made to this number upon goods receipt from Production.
Þ In addition, when recording inspection results with inspection points, you can group partial lots for a
batch.
Þ The inspection results of the individual partial lots are of key importance here. If values differ
between the partial lots, it may be advisable to manage the stocks later in separate batches.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-15
© SAP AG 1999
Goods receipt
Batch Batch
A1 A1
Partial lot 1
A1
Partial lot 2
A2
Goods receipt
Batch Batch
A2 A2
Header level
Batch
Process order/production order
60000780
Goods receipt
Batch Batch
A1 A1
A1 A1
60000780
Insp. lot
1234
Process order/
prod. order
Batch Number Assignment



Þ You can specify the batch number in one of two places for the subsequent goods receipt:
º at header level of the process order/production order created if the entire order is confirmed as a
single quantity.
º for individual partial lots created for the inspection lot and confirmed as (partial) quantities. A
batch number can be assigned for each partial lot or several partial lots can be grouped under the
same batch number.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 13-16
© SAP AG 1999
Appendix: Batch Creation: Summary
¤ Understand how batch maintenance is integrated
with Quality Management in production
¤ Explain how production can control batch
creation
You are now able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Mass-processing of batches
¤ Batch Information Cockpit: Introduction
¤ Batch Information Cockpit: Screen Layout
¤ Batch Information Cockpit: Navigation Area
¤ Batch Information Cockpit: Selection Area
¤ User Settings
Contents:
Optimized Batch Processing



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Select batches via common attributes
¤ Create worklists for batches
¤ Transfer batches from the where-used list into the
worklist
¤ Process batch master records from within the
worklist
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Optimized Batch Processing: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-3
© SAP AG 1999
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch
Optimized Batch Processing: Overview Diagram



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-4
© SAP AG 1999
¤ You want to group together various batches with
common attributes for further processing and take
a look at stock figures and the data in the batch
master record
¤ You also wish to gain a quick overview of the
usage of certain batches
¤ Occasionally, you want to make changes to the
batch master records
Optimized Batch Processing: Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-5
© SAP AG 1999
Mass-Processing of Batches
Navigation:
Selection
result
Worklist
Details
Batch master record:
Change/Display
Processing:



Straightforward changing of batch data
Þ You can use the "Mass Processing of Batches" function to select batches on a cross-material and
plant basis and then display and change your data.
Grouping of batches in the worklist folder
Þ You can fill the worklist with any number of batches. To do so, you copy the selection result into the
relevant folder on the initial screen.
Þ To improve handling, you can structure the worklist using worklist folders.
Þ Click on a batch in the selection result area or in the worklist to display the batch data in the right-
hand part of the screen. You can also navigate over and between the batches in the relevant lists.
Þ Worklist folders are organized in Customizing for Batch Management: There you create new folders
and assign them to users.
Þ You can differentiate between public and private worklist folders. Folders can be assigned to any
number of users. The content of a folder that has been designated as "public" can be displayed and
processed by all the users who are assigned to it. A private folder can only be processed by the user
assigned to it.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-6
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Information Cockpit: Introduction
¤ Central tool facilitating extensive access to batch
information.
¤ Designed as a single-screen transaction.
¤ Flexible selection of batches on the basis of material,
batch, stock, shelf life, and classification data (e.g.
classification characteristics, classification status)
¤ Combination of several existing functions
Þ Batch master
Þ Batch where-used List
Þ Shelf life list
¤ Integration of new "Batch Worklist” functionality



Þ You use the Batch Information Cockpit to
º Select batches
º Display information relevant to batches
º Invoke detail functions (batch master, batch where-used list)
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-7
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Information Cockpit: Screen Layout
Navigation:
Area for
selection
or processing:
¤ Batch master record
¤ Batch usage
Batch selection on the basis of
certain material, batch, stock,
shelf life, and classification data
Worklist
Selection
result
Stock



Þ Selection
º You can choose the selection setting you wish to work with.
º You define user-group-specific selection settings in Customizing for Batch Management.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-8
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Flexibly adjustable via user settings
Batch Information Cockpit: Navigation Area
Navigation:
1. Sub-area:
Selection result: batches
Focus on the batch definition of the
selected batches
2. Sub-area:
Selection result: stock
Focus on the stock situation of the
selected batches
3. Sub-area:
Batch worklist
Option of filling and processing within
the Cockpit
Selection
result
Stock
Worklist



Þ Hierarchical or list display can be chosen in the first two sub-areas.
Þ For the navigation area, you can:
º Deactivate individual sub-areas
º Specify the sequence of sub-areas
º Determine which sub-areas are to initially be open
º Specify whether the selection result "batches" or "stock" is initially to
be shown as a list
Þ You can freely determine the width of the navigation area.
Þ You can specify the form in which the material is to be shown in the navigation area (material
number, material short description)

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-9
© SAP AG 1999
Batch Information Cockpit: Selection Area
Batch Info Cockpit Edit Utilities System Help
Batch Information Cockpit
List
Selection
Selection result: batches
5 batches found
Y-351
C1 FE
List
Selection result: stock
5 stocks found
Y-351
Batch worklist
Standard folder (16 batches)
Result in folder
Selection (SAP standard)
Restart Details
Reset all selection criteria
Material Batch Classification Stock Usage
Reset selection criteria
Material
Plant
Batch
Material type
Industry
Division
Valuation category
Mat. planner
BMBC iwdf5070 INS



Þ Selection of any required batch information
Þ Flexibly definable in Customizing:
º Deactivation of individual selection tabs
º Changing the title of selection tabs
º Adding own selection fields to the selection tabs (tables MARA; MARC; MARD; MCHA;
MCHB; MKOL; MSLB; MSKU; MSKA; MSPR)
Þ Directly influences the grouping and sequence of the display fields in the navigation area
Þ Answers to concrete questions in the batch environment, such as:
º Which batch has the status "Unrestricted"?
º Which batches must be used because their shelf lives have nearly expired?
º Which "unrestricted" batch stocks exist for a product group and how are the batches specified?
º Which batch stocks exist within a certain materials planner's area of responsibility?
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-10
© SAP AG 1999
User User Settings Settings
Batch Information Cockpit
Start settings
User group assignment
User group selection
Navigation area
Selection result: batches
Selection result: stock
Batch worklist
Width of navigation area
Width in mm
Current settings
Material format
Material number
Material no. (matl description)
Material no. (matl description)
Material descr.
Active Sequence Display List
SAP 1
1
2
3
Detail function
Standard detail function 70 BMAN
Deactivate confirmation prompt
when copying to worklist
when deleting from worklist
Database selection Database selection
100 Maximum no. of batches



Þ Possibility of adjusting and storing Cockpit settings on a user-specific basis
Þ Examples:
º Determining a selection setting
º Deactivating individual navigation areas
º Determining the width of the navigation area
º Showing the material as the material number and/or the material's short description
º ...
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-11
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Select batches via common attributes
¤ Create worklists for batches
¤ Transfer batches from the where-used list into the
worklist
¤ Process batch master records from within the
worklist
You are now able to:
Optimized Batch Processing: Summary



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-12
Optimized Batch Processing: Exercises



Unit: Optimized Batch Processing
Topic: Batch Information Cockpit


At the conclusion this exercise, you will be able to:
• Manage worklists
• Select and process batches
• Analyze and evaluate information about batch usage and the
stock situation



Every day you work with batches that have certain properties and
have to monitor and occasionally change stock and batch data. To
make your job easier, you wish to create worklists of batches that
are to be processed. You can then work on these batches later, at
your convenience.
1-1 Managing the worklist
1-1-1 Take a look at the defined worklist folders in Customizing. What is the
significance of the Public indicator?
______________________________________________
______________________________________________
______________________________________________
______________________________________________

Optional: Create your own private folder.
1-1-2 Assign your user to the public folder PUBL.
Optional: Assign your user to your newly created private folder.
1-2 Using the Batch Information Cockpit
1-2-1 Call up the Batch Information Cockpit transaction. Select batches of
materials in plant 1100 that begin with the letter T and end with your group
number. The materials should also belong to the class N-003 and not be
classified.
1-2-2 In the Selection Results: Batches area, select the two materials lauryl
alcohol and lemon juice and copy all batches of these two materials into
your private folder (standard folder or the one you created yourself). You
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-13
can also select further materials or batches in the selection area and move
them to the public folder.
1-2-3 Now exit the Batch Information Cockpit transaction and immediately call it
up again. What is the content of the public and private folders?
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________

1-2-4 Select all batches of the materials Y-500-XX and 350-100 in plant 1100.
Switch to the list display in the Selection Result: Stock area.
1-2-5 Display the unrestricted stocks in the Selection Result: Stock area.
Sort the selected batches by the status Unrestricted.
Add up the quantities of unrestricted stock. What is the total stock figure?
____________________________________
1-2-6 In the Selection Result area, select batch C4 of material 350-100 and obtain
information on the usage of this batch.
1-2-7 Make an entirely new selection for batches of material Y-500-XX in plant
1100 whose shelf life is due to expire in the next 100 days. Make sure that
the remaining shelf life is shown as the exact number of days in each case.
Which symbol is used to identify batches whose shelf life will expire within
the next 100 days in the Selection Result area?
________________________________________
1-2-8 Change the status of critical batches to restricted.
1-3 Optional: Batch Information Cockpit: User Settings
1-3-1 Call up the Batch Information Cockpit transaction again.
Configure the Batch Information Cockpit with the aid of user settings
according to the following criteria:
• Deactivate the Selection Result: Stock
• Arrange the Worklist: Batches and Selection Result: Batches in such a way that the
Worklist: Batches is displayed above the Selection Result: Batches.
• Widen the navigation area to 100 mm.
• Change the material display to Material number (Material short description).
• Save the user settings.
1-3-2 Check the current setting in the Cockpit.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-14
Optimized Batch Processing: Solutions



Unit: Optimized Batch Processing
Topic: Batch Information Cockpit

1-1 Managing the worklist
1-1-1 Take a look at the defined worklist folders in Customizing.
Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project,
Goto → Display SAP Reference IMG,
Logistics General → Batch Management → Tools → Worklist → Define
Worklist Folders

What is the significance of the Public indicator?
You can differentiate between public and private worklist folders. Folders can be
assigned to any number of users. The content of a folder that has been designated as
Public can be displayed and processed by all the users who are assigned to it. A
private folder can only be processed by the user assigned to it.
1-1-2 Assign your user to the public folder PUBL.
Logistics General → Batch Management → Tools → Worklist → Assign
Worklist Folders to Users

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-15
1-2 Using the Batch Information Cockpit
1-2-1 Call up the Batch Information Cockpit transaction.
Logistics→ Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Batch
Information Cockpit

Tab Field name Values
Material Material T*##
Plant 1100
Classification Batch class N-003
Classification
status
Not classified
Execute selection button.

1-2-2 In the Selection Result area in the left-hand part of the navigation
area, select the two materials lauryl alcohol and lemon juice. To do
so, hold down the control key while selecting the two materials with
the left-hand mouse button. Then click on the Selection in folder
button and choose the relevant folder (standard folder or new folder
of your own). You can also select further materials or batches in the
selection area and move them to the public folder.
1-2-3 New call of the Batch Information Cockpit transaction. What are the
contents of the public and private folders?
The private folder should contain the batches of the two materials copied
there in exercise 1-2-2. The public folder contains batches copied into it by
both yourself and other course participants.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-16
1-2-4 Select all batches of the materials
Y-500-XX and 350-100 in plant 1100.
Tab Field name Values
Material Material Y-500-XX
350-100
Plant 1100
Execute selection button.
Switch to the list display in the Selection Result: Stock area.
Activate the Selection Result: Stock area via the relevant icon or through the
menu via Batch Info Cockpit – Display Selection Result: Stock. Use the icon
with the magnifying glass to enlarge the stock overview.
In the Selection Result: Stock area, click the Display as list button.

1-2-5 Select the Unrestricted-use column and click the Sort in ascending
order icon.
Select the Unrestricted-use column and click the Total icon. What is
the total stock figure? 10,901 kg
1-2-6 In the Selection Result area, select batch C4 of material 350-100. If
the batch master record is displayed in the right-hand frame,
navigate to the batch where-used list via Details – Where used.
1-2-7 Make a completely new selection by clicking the Selection button at
the top of the right-hand frame.
Tab Field name Values
Material Material Y-500-XX
Plant 1100
Shelf life Remaining shelf
life
100
Format of
remaining shelf
life
Exact number of
days
Execute selection button.
Batches whose shelf life is due to expire within the next 100 days are
identified by a yellow color signal. A red color signal appears next to
batches whose shelf lives have expired. Batches whose shelf life exceeds the
100 days specified as selection criterion are identified by a green signal.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 14-17
1-2-8 You can invoke detailed data on a certain batch by clicking on the
relevant batch in the Selection area. If you see the batch where-used
list, you can view the batch master data via Detail -> Batch master.
You can switch to change mode via the Display/Change icon. In this
mode, you can change the batch status to Restricted. You can
process further batches by clicking the Next batch button or by
selecting the next batch in the Selection Result area.
1-3 Optional: Batch Information Cockpit: User Settings
1-3-1 Configure the Batch Information Cockpit with the aid of user settings.
Logistics→ Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools →
Batch Information Cockpit
Utilities → User Settings


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Batch-specific Units of Measure: Differences
¤ Using Active Ingredients
¤ Physical Quantity and Active Ingredient Quantity
¤ Calculating the Quantity
¤ Prices for Active Ingredients
¤ Planned and Actual Active Ingredient Proportions
¤ Using Batch-Specific Units of Measure
¤ Batch-Specific Calculation of the Product Quantity
Contents:
Introduction to Batch-specific Units of Measure



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Describe the business background to active
ingredient management and product quantity
management
¤ Understand the most important issues and
influencing factors involved in active ingredient
management using product units
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-3
© SAP AG 1999
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch
Batch-specific Material UoMs: Overview Diagram



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-4
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Your company wishes to be able to measure and
show the active ingredients of materials within the
physical quantity of these materials, and to use
them for goods movements.
¤ Your company would like to be able to use certain
materials not only in the base unit of measure but
also in alternative units, even if the conversion
ratios between the latter and the base unit
occasionally fluctuate. Even in such cases, it must
be possible to show and use the conversion ratio
between the two units of measure correctly for all
stocks.
Batch-specific Material UoMs: Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-5
© SAP AG 1999
Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Differences
Batch Batch- -specific units of measure specific units of measure
Product units Product units
Active Active
ingredients ingredients



Þ The batch-specific material unit is an alternative unit of measure of a material, for which you can
define the conversion ratio into the base unit of measure on a batch-specific basis.
Þ While the conversion ratio for the other alternative units of measure is fixed in the material master,
for batch-specific material units, you have to define:
º The planned conversion ratio in the material master
º The actual conversion ratio into the base unit of measure in the batch master
Þ You use batch-specific units of measure when the ratio for conversion from the unit of measure into
the base unit of measure can differ from batch to batch.
Þ These alternative units of measure include:
º Proportion unit – this is the unit of measure in which you can enter proportions of the base unit
of a material. The total or physical quantity can consist of several proportions.
º Product unit – this unit of measure describes the total quantity of a material as an alternative to
the base unit of measure. For example, one piece of a particular batch weighs 10 kilograms in total
or is a pipe of 1250 millimeters in length.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-6
© SAP AG 1999
Use of Active Ingredients
?



Þ Active ingredients or concentrates are encountered above all in the production of basic materials in
the following industries:
º Chemicals
º Pharmaceuticals
º Cosmetics
º Foodstuffs

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-7
© SAP AG 1999
Physical Quantity and Active Ingredient Quantity
W
ith
d
ra
w
4
5

lite
rs
o
f
a
lc
o
h
o
l!
50%a.i. 90%a.i.
92%a.i.
Full
quantity:
500l
Full
quantity:
500l
Full
quantity:
500l



Þ If active ingredients are not suitable for storage on their own, they are stored together with carrier
materials. A combination of a carrier material and an active ingredient is called a physical quantity or
a weighed quantity. The terms mixed quantity and telquel quantity are also common.
Þ The situation is similar if materials contain impurities of varying degrees.
Þ The amount of active ingredient in a material is its active ingredient quantity.
Þ The potency (of active ingredient) varies within a material to a certain degree.
Þ A material can contain more than one different active ingredient.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-8
© SAP AG 1999
Calculating the Quantity
45 : X = 90 : 100
90% a.i.
92% a.i.
Full quantity:
500l
Full quantity:
500l
50
Calculating the Quantity



Þ A certain amount of active ingredient is usually required, whether it is needed to manufacture a
product or to deliver goods to a customer.
Þ Only the physical quantity (or the mixture) can be weighed, measured, or removed.
Þ You can calculate how much physical quantity corresponds to an active ingredient quantity using a
simple rule of three.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-9
© SAP AG 1999
Prices for Active Ingredients
45 g fat
85%a.i.
Contains
100
I.U.



Þ The price of products containing active ingredients is normally based on the active ingredient
potency.

Thus, insulin and penicillin are sold in units that reflect their potency.

The covering property of a color is an important factor in determining its grade. The dilution of an
acidic solution with a valueless carrier substance gives you the percentage of active ingredient in the
acidic solution.

For example, a skimmed milk product is cheaper than a product made with full-fat milk.




SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-10
© SAP AG 1999
Act. values Act. values
June June
Planned values Planned values
May May
92% 91%
O
rd
e
r
90%
Planned and Actual Active Ingredient Proportions



Þ The actual active ingredient proportion in a mixture can only be known when the mixture actually
exists. Until this point, however, a certain active ingredient proportion for a product is required. This
planned value is replaced by the actual value as soon as it is known.
Þ This is what a customer may assume about an acid concentrate for a product when ordering, for
example. He or she uses the available price list as a guide. However, the concentrate in question is
represented only by a planned value. The actual value will only be known for sure when the
concentrate is actually delivered.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-11
© SAP AG 1999
Use of Product Units



Þ Product units are used above all in the following industries:
º Steel
º Aluminium
º Paper
º Wood
º Textiles
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-12
© SAP AG 1999
Batch-Specific Calculation of the Product Quantity
Material 4711 Planned value:
Base UoM KG 1 pc = 300 kg
Alternative UoM
1 coil = 600 kg
Batch Coil1 1 pc = 305 kg
1 coil = 610 kg
Batch Coil2 1 pc = 297 kg
1 coil = 594 kg
Pc



Þ The product unit describes the total quantity of a material as an alternative to the base unit of
measure.
Þ For example, one particular piece of a material weighs 305 kilograms in total or is a coil weighing
610 kilograms.
Þ The actual conversion factor of a batch is not usually known until goods are received.
Þ Until the conversion factor is known, the system uses the planned values for the material, which are
defined in the material master record. This planned value is replaced by the actual value as soon as it
is known.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 15-13
© SAP AG 1999
Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Summary
¤ Describe the business background to batch-
specific material units of measure
¤ Understand the most important issues and
influencing factors involved in active ingredient
management using product units
You are now able to:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 16-1
© SAP AG 1999
Contents:
¤ Batch Management as Prerequisite
¤ Batch-specific UoMs as an Attribute of a Batch
¤ Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure
¤ Batch-specific Units of Measure in Logistics
Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 16-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Outline the assumptions underlying the design
of the batch-specific material units of measure
¤ Explain how the new functionality is integrated
into the data environment of batch management
and existing logistics processes
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Integration: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 16-3
© SAP AG 1999
Integration: Overview Diagram
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 16-4
© SAP AG 1999
Integration: Business Scenario
¤ In your company, it must be possible to use batch-
specific units of measure in all Logistics
applications.
¤ You want to ascertain how this process is realized
in the SAP System.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 16-5
© SAP AG 1999
Act. ingr. material
A
Batch
29 g/kg
B
Batch
Material with product unit
X
Batch
1 pc = 100 KG
Y
Batch
1 pc = 150 KG
31 g/kg
Batch Management Requirement as Prerequisite



Þ The active ingredient proportion of a material can fluctuate. The proportional variance is usually
higher in the case of raw materials than in that of finished products.
Þ The conversion factor between the alternative unit of measure and the base unit of measure can also
fluctuate.
Þ Stocks of a material with varying active ingredient proportions or conversion factors between the
alternative unit and the base unit of measure have to be managed separately. You can manage these
stocks separately in terms of both quantity and value.
Þ This goal is easily achieved through the use of Batch Management.
Þ For this reason, active ingredient proportions can only be reproduced in the R/3 system for materials
that are subject to a batch management requirement. The use of Batch Management is an essential
prerequisite for the use of Active Ingredient Management and Product Quantity Management.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 16-6
© SAP AG 1999
A A
Batch
Contains 2.5
milligrams platinum
/KG
Melting point at
45°C
Expires on
12.31.99
Batch-specific
unit 1 PC
equals
110 KG
Batch-specific UoMs as an Attribute of a Batch



Þ The specification contains the description of the batch. It may also contain measured values and
quality characteristics, plus details concerning the usability of the batch and whether it is locked.
Important date specifications may also be included, such as the expiration date and the last goods
receipt date, and so on.
Þ The active ingredient proportion is one of the criteria that should be used to differentiate between
batches of the same material. For this reason it is integrated into the batch specification.
Þ Likewise, the conversion factor between alternative units of measure and base units of measure in a
batch forms a characteristic, which can be valuated differently from batch to batch.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 16-7
© SAP AG 1999
Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure
Batch management
Classification



Þ In the R/3 System, batch-specific units of measure (active ingredient management and product units)
are handled in Batch Management.
Þ The active ingredient potency of a batch is stored in the batch's specification along with the batch-
specific ratio between the alternative unit of measure and the base unit of measure.
Þ Batch Management uses those features found in the classification system. The characteristic values
in the batch classification form the specification.
Þ To use batch-specific units of measure, you must have Batch Management set up, the class system
must be in use, and the material concerned must be able to be handled in batches.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 16-8
© SAP AG 1999
SD Production
Procurement
Warehouse mgmt
Batch management Batch management
Batch Batch- -specific specific UoM UoM
Warehouse mgmt
Purch. order
W/house
Process/
production
order
Sales order
A
B
A
B
A A
A
W/house
Batch-specific Units of Measure in Logistics
Procurement



Þ The use of batch-specific units of measure is a function in Logistics that covers more than one
application. The active ingredient potency of a batch or the conversion factor between the batch's
two units of measure is managed throughout the logistics chain.
Þ Differentiated prices for the alternative unit of measure can also be taken into account when
valuating the inventory and determining the sales price.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 16-9
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Outline the assumptions underlying the design
of the batch-specific material units of measure
¤ Explain how the new functionality is integrated
into the data environment of batch management
and existing logistics processes
You are now able to:
Integration: Summary



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ The Central Unit of Measure for Active Ingredients
¤ Relationship Between Units of Measure
¤ Maintenance of Units of Measurement in Customizing
¤ Percentage and User-defined Calculation
¤ Linking of Master Data I
¤ Linking of Master Data II
¤ Active Ingredient Content in the Specification
¤ Active Ingredient Characteristic: Special Features
¤ Classification Maintenance in the Material Master
¤ Maintenance of Units of Measure in the Material Master
¤ Activating Active Ingredient Management in Customizing
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management
Contents:



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Describe the central role of proportion units
within active ingredient management
¤ List the most important steps for maintaining
data in active ingredient management
¤ Define units of measure and convert quantities
from one unit into another
¤ Understand how the active ingredient content
forms part of the batch specification
¤ Maintain active ingredient characteristics and
batch classes
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Data Concept: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-3
© SAP AG 1999
Data Concept: Overview Diagram
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-4
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Your company wishes to use Active Ingredient
Management. Employees of the company
familiarize themselves with the system
requirements with regard to Customizing and the
setting up of master data.
Data Concept: Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-5
© SAP AG 1999
Sales
Purchasing
BOM
A
B
B
C
B
Inventory
mgmt
Proportion unit
The Central Unit of Measure for Active Ingredients



Þ The proportion unit can be seen as a core element which is found throughout the applications and is
used to reproduce the active ingredient potency of a material.
Þ The conversion between the proportion unit and the base unit of measure is continuously maintained
in the background and can be displayed by each of the respective applications.
Þ The physical quantity is measured in base units of measure, whereas the active ingredient is
measured in proportion units.
Þ In Logistics you may thus enter the active ingredient quantity instead of the physical quantity.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-6
© SAP AG 1999
Relationship Between Units of Measure
Ratio
Proportion unit
Base unit of measure
=
Grams of active
ingredient per
liter
G/L
Grams of act.
ingr. GAI
Liter
L



Þ The base unit of measure is the leading unit of measure for a material containing active ingredients.
The postings are carried out in this unit. If an entry is made in a proportion unit, the system converts
this to the base unit of measure before posting.
Þ The proportion unit relates to the active ingredient. If several active ingredients have to be
represented for a material, different proportion units must also be defined in order to be able to
clearly differentiate between the ingredients.
Þ You define a conversion ratio in order to convert quantities between the proportion unit and the base
unit of measure. This ratio constitutes a separate unit of measurement.
Þ In this example, the active ingredient is measured in grams. GAI has been defined as the proportion
unit, i.e. for the specific purpose of "measuring an active ingredient".
Þ The grams of active ingredient relate to one liter of the physical quantity.
Þ This ratio is recorded in the unit of measurement G/L.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-7
© SAP AG 1999
L Liter
Grams of concentrate GC
GCL Grams of concentrate/liter
Nondimensional
Grams of concentrate GC
Gram
Units of meas.
Proportion units
Dimension Volume
Measures an act. ingr.
Should be treated
as...
Maint. of Units of Measurement in Customizing



Þ All units of measurement to be used in Active Ingredient Management must have previously been
defined in Customizing.
Þ Units of measurement to be used as proportion units may not be assigned to a dimension.
Þ In Customizing for Active Ingredient Management, a unit of measurement is assigned the role of the
proportion unit. Active ingredients are measured in it.
Þ Some of the most common units of measurement for active ingredients are supplied with the
standard system. However, a self-chosen definition for an active ingredient proportion can be entered
as a unit of measurement at any time and designated an allowed proportion unit. To facilitate
conversion into a standard unit of measure, the self-defined unit of measurement is assigned a
reference.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-8
© SAP AG 1999
% calculation User-def. calculation
Characteristic
units of
measure
measure the active
ingredient
proportion in
relation to the base
unit of measure
Percentage and User-defined Calculation



Þ If the active ingredient proportion for a batch is known, the active ingredient quantity can be
calculated from the base quantity. The relationship between the potency of the active ingredient and
the base quantity is stored in Customizing, and allocated to a characteristic unit of measurement.
Þ If the relationship is measured by percentage, the conversion is specified by definition.
Þ If the relationship is user-defined, any formula can be stored that describes the relationship between
proportion unit and base unit of measure.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-9
© SAP AG 1999
Material
A
Batch 1
A
Batch 2
A
Batch 3
Specification
passed on
Characteristic Characteristic
act act. . ingr ingr. . cont cont. .
Batch class Batch class
Linking of Master Data I



Þ The active ingredient content of a material forms part of its specification.
Þ If this content is not constant, the material stocks with different specifications should be managed
separately from each other. This is achieved in the R/3 system through use of Batch Management.
Each batch has its own specification.
Þ Batch specifications are stored in characteristics of the Classification System. For this reason, the
ratio between the active ingredient and the base quantity is linked to a characteristic, and the active
ingredient content stored as the value assigned to the characteristic. The ratio thus becomes the unit
of measurement of the characteristic.
Þ The active ingredient characteristic contains information regarding which active ingredient is
involved and the relationship between the proportion of the physical quantity the ingredient
represents and the base unit of measure.
Þ The ratio between the active ingredient content and the physical quantity is stored in a batch
characteristic and thus becomes part of the specification.
Þ The material transfers the information to its batches.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-10
© SAP AG 1999
Material Material master master
Batch class Batch class
Linking of Master Data II
Characteristic Characteristic
act act. . ingr ingr. . cont cont. .
Ratio G/L View
I = Ingr.
GAI <=> L
Unit of Unit of
meas meas. G/L . G/L



Þ Active ingredient characteristics are assigned the special view 'S' within the batch class.
Þ Characteristics with this view are recognized during material master maintenance. The information
for conversion beween active ingredient and physical quantity is adopted in the material master.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-11
© SAP AG 1999
Act. ingr. cont.
20 - 23.5 G/L
Covering
power
50 - 100 %
Active Ingredient Content in the Specification
Material master
Density
0.1 - 5 g/ccm
Density 1.1g/ccm
Batch
Act. ingr.
content 22 G/L
Covering power
80 %



Þ In Batch Management in the R/3 System, the material passes on its specification to the batch.
Depending on the system settings, either it is mandatory for the batch values to lie within the limits
defined in the material master or these values are merely taken as defaults from that source.
Þ Since the active ingredient content is part of the specification of the material and its individual
batches, the same logic applies. The active ingredient contents of the individual batches are checked
against the data in the material master.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-12
© SAP AG 1999
Active Ingredient Characteristic: Special Features
Which active ingredient ?
What is the ratio?
Data type: numeric!
Value assgt.: single value!
Citrus aroma
type 8334
G/L =
GAI
L



Þ The characteristic description specifies the active ingredient to which the data relates. In this way, a
unique assignment is created. For this reason, you should define one characteristic for each active
ingredient.
Þ The relationship between active ingredient content and physical quantity must be specified as a unit
of measurement when you create the characteristic.
Þ The characteristic must be numeric and have a single value.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-13
© SAP AG 1999
Act. ingr. content
Citrus aroma
0.2 - 0.4 G/L
Flavors
- Orange
- Lemon
Shelf life expiration date
View:
Classification
Class type: Batches
Class for 'fruit
juices'
Material
Classification Maintenance in the Material Master



Þ The active ingredient characteristic is assigned to the batch class and a value is assigned to it in the
material master.
Þ As in the case of other batch characteristics, you can specify either an interval or a discrete value.
Þ The entry in the material master is the planned value that is either mandatory or optional depending
on how the classification data has been maintained.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-14
© SAP AG 1999
Material
View:
Proportion/product unit of measure
GK <=> L
Char.
UoM
Prop. unit Pl. value
Citrus
aroma
0.3 G/L GAI Grams/liter
X
Prop. unit
Y Base UoM <=>
GC Liter
30 100 <=>
Maintaining Units of Measurement in Mat. Master



Þ After the classification view has been maintained, any active ingredient characteristics are known to
the system.
Þ You must complete the information in the Proportion/Product Unit view: The system expects a
planned value for the active ingredient proportion.
Þ The planned value specifies the assumed mixing ratio between active ingredient and physical
quantity in the characteristic unit of measurement.
If the actual active ingredient content of a batch is not known for a certain transaction, the system
uses the planned value from the material master.
The planned value for the conversion between active ingredient and physical quantity is transferred
to the units of measure table automatically.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-15
© SAP AG 1999
Activating Active Ingredient Mgmt in Customizing
Material Material
Activate
active ingredient mgmt?
Yes Yes



Þ You can make several Customizing settings for Active Ingredient Management in the system before
the component is activated.
Þ After the component is activated, the active ingredient data is ready to be maintained in the material
master.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-16
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Describe the central role of proportion units
within active ingredient management
¤ Explain how units of measure are defined and
how to convert quantities from one unit into
another
¤ Understand how the active ingredient content
forms part of the batch specification
You are now able to:
Data Concept: Summary



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-17
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-1 Exercises



Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient
Management
Topic: Creating Proportion Units and Conversion
Ratios


At the conclusion this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create your own units of measurement and define them as
proportion units and conversion ratios



You have a material that contains a key active ingredient. You
want to change the logistical processing of the material. You want
to be able to use both the material quantity, as you have done up
to now, and also the quantity of active ingredient that the material
contains. You want to achieve this objective using Active
Ingredient Management. You need a separate unit of
measurement for the active ingredient, and you must enter the
ratio between active ingredient quantity and physical quantity.
You begin by maintaining Customizing.
1-1 Create a unit of measurement (for the active ingredient)
Create a separate unit of measurement for your active ingredient that is to serve as a
proportion unit. Remember that this unit must be nondimensional. If you define
your own entry, enter a key ending with your group number (for example, A##).
The entry must not be longer than three characters. The entry of an ISO code on the
Details screen for the unit of measurement is not mandatory.
1-2 Create a unit of measurement (for the characteristic or the ratio of active ingredient
to base unit of measure)
Create another unit of measurement for the ratio between physical quantity and
active ingredient quantity. Do not use percentage ratios. Enter a key ending with
your group number (for example, V##). The entry must not be longer than three
characters. The entry of an ISO code on the Details screen for the unit of
measurement is not mandatory.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-18
1-3 Define proportion unit
Assign the unit of measurement from 1-1 [A##] the role of the proportion unit.
Enter the unit of measurement in the table of proportion units and choose a suitable
reference unit.
1-4 Define ratio unit
Define the ratio between physical quantity and active ingredient quantity for the
unit of measurement from 1-2 [V##]. To do this, use the proportion unit defined in
1-1, and an appropriate base unit of measure of your choice (see note below).



Make sure that the component B is managed in the base unit
of measure KG (kilogram). The base unit of measure that
you use in the ratio should belong to the same dimension
(mass).


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-19
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-2 Exercises



Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient
Management
Topic: Creating Master Data in the Classification
System


At the conclusion this exercise, you will be able to:
• Maintain active ingredient characteristics and batch classes



You want to specify the expected active ingredient content in the
material master record. You want to show the actual active
ingredient content of each individual batch in the system. To do
this, you must maintain master data for the active ingredient in
the classification system.

1-1 Create active ingredient characteristic
In the classification system, create a characteristic that satisfies the
following requirements:
• The key should end with your group number.
• The active ingredient should be clearly designated in the characteristic description.
• The status should be released.
• The data type should be numerical.
• The characteristic value assignment should consist of a single value.
In the previous exercise, you defined a unit of measurement for a
conversion ratio between physical quantity and active ingredient quantity.
• Use this unit of measurement as the unit for your characteristic.
• Enter all other format data as desired.
• Define a value interval for the characteristic.
1-2 Assign active ingredient characteristic to class
Data has already been prepared for your group.
Assign your characteristic to your class AICL00010## for the view S.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-20
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-3 Exercises



Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient
Management
Topic: Material Master Maintenance from the
Active Ingredient Management Viewpoint


At the conclusion this exercise, you will be able to:
• Extend the batch classification in the material master
• Use proportion units and maintain planned values


You want to maintain the active ingredient data for a material.
You want to store an allowed value interval for the active
ingredient content of batches in the material master record. You
want to enter a planned value for the active ingredient content in
the material master.
1-1 Maintain active ingredient data for a material
Check the data sheet to see which materials have been prepared for your group.
Choose AI-1202-0##. Change the material.

1-1-1 Complete the classification data. Assign values to your active ingredient
characteristic.
1-1-2 Enter data in the Proportion/Product Unit view. To use the proportion unit,
you must first:
• Assign a planned value to the ratio active ingredient/physical quantity.
• Choose a proportion unit
1-1-3 Check the conversion ratio in the unit of measure table in the material
master.



• Active Ingredient Management is activated in the
training system.
• In your batch class, the application view S is set in the
basis data.
• A batch management requirement and individual batch
valuation have been specified for your material master
record AI-1202-0##.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-21


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-22
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-1 Solutions



Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient
Management
Topic: Creating Proportion Units and Conversion
Ratios
1-1 Create a unit of measurement (for the active ingredient)
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project Goto →
SAP Reference IMG)
Global Settings → Check units of measurement
Pushbutton Units of measurement (nondimensional)
Unit of measurement - Create

Field name or data type Values
Internal unit of measurement A##
Commercial format A##
Technical format A##
Unit of measurement text, commercial
For example, ‘active
ingredient’
Unit of measurement text,
technical
For example, ‘AI’
1-2 Create a unit of measurement (for the characteristic or the ratio of active ingredient
to base unit of measure)
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto →
SAP Reference IMG)
Global Settings → Check units of measurement
Pushbutton Units of measurement (nondimensional)
Unit of measurement - Create

Field name or data type Values
Internal unit of measurement V##
Commercial format V##
Technical format V##
Unit of measurement text, commercial
For example, ‘active
ingredient proportion’
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-23
Unit of measurement text,
technical
For example, ‘AIP’
1-3 Define proportion unit
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto →
SAP Reference IMG)
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Units of
Measure → Edit Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure
Make a new entry for the unit of measure A##. It should be capable of being used
as a proportion unit. Also enter A## as the reference unit of measure. However, you
can also enter kilogram
4
.

Field name or data type Values
Proportion/product unit of measure A##
Reference unit A## or KG

1-4 Define ratio unit
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto →
SAP Reference IMG)
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Unit of
Measure → Calculate Proportional Factors → Define Calculation of
Proportional Quantity from Base Quantity
Pushbutton New entry

Field name or data type Values
Unit of measurement of
characteristic
V##
Proportion/product unit
A##
Base unit of measure KG



4
In this way, you could measure a characteristic in percent and specify in the material master that
the A## proportion is thus to be measured in relation to kilograms. Step 1-4 would not then apply.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-24
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-2 Solutions



Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient
Management
Topic: Creating Master Data in the Classification
System

1-1 Create active ingredient characteristic
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics
or
Logistics → Central Functions →
Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics
Note the instructions in the exercise text.
1-2 Assign active ingredient characteristic to class
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Classification System → Master Data → Classes
or
Logistics → Central Functions →
Classification System → Master Data → Classes
Class → Change
Assign your characteristic to your class AICL00010## for the view S.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-25
Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-3 Solutions


Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient
Management
Topic: Material Master Maintenance from the
Active Ingredient Management Viewpoint
1-1 Maintain active ingredient data for a material

Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately

1-1-1 In the Classification view, assign values to the active ingredient
characteristic.

1-1-2 In the Basic Data view, under Additional data, choose the
Proportion/Product Unit view. Enter A in the Units meas. use field. Enter
the required data.

Field name or data type Values
Planned value Any, but must be within the
allowed range for the
characteristic
Proportion/product unit A## (new proportion unit in
which the active ingredient is
measured)

1-1-3 In the Proportion/Product Unit view, click the tab page button and choose
Units of measure.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 17-26



• Active Ingredient Management is activated in the
training system.
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing
→ Edit Project. Goto → SAP Reference IMG)
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-
Specific Material Units of Measure → Activate Batch-
Specific Material Unit of Measure
• In your batch class, the application view S is set in the
basis data.
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management
→ Environment → Classification System → Master
Data → Classes
• A batch management requirement and individual batch
valuation have been specified for your material master
record AI-1202-0##.
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management
→ Environment → Material Master → Material →
Create
Purchasing view (Batch mgmt reqmt indicator)
Accounting view (Valuation category indicator = X)




SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Standard Price per Active Ingredient
¤ Valuation of Single Batches Based on Act. Ingredients
¤ Valuation Based on Several Active Ingredients
¤ Sales Price Based on Active Ingredients
Contents:
Active Ingredient Prices



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Create a valuation record for an active
ingredient
¤ Base the valuation price of a batch on
individual prices for the active ingredients
¤ Create a price condition record for an active
ingredient
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Active Ingredient Prices: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-3
© SAP AG 1999
Active Ingredient Prices: Overview Diagram
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-4
© SAP AG 1999
Active Ingredient Prices: Business Scenario
¤ Your company needs to value and price its batches
by the amount of active ingredient the batch
contains.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-5
© SAP AG 1999
Material Material
Valuation Valuation
area area
Proportion unit
Orange juice 1000 GAI
Standard
price:
0.50 per proportion unit
Standard Price per Active Ingredient



Þ You can store a valuation price for an active ingredient in a valuation record.
Þ The price is always a standard price. It is calculated by combining the material number of the
material containing the active ingredient, the valuation area, and the proportion unit in which the
active ingredient is measured.
Þ The name of the active ingredient cannot be entered. This means that if you want to carry out
evaluations in a material based on several active ingredients, you must use different proportion units.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-6
© SAP AG 1999
A A
Batch 1
Material
Valuation of single
batches
X
A A
Batch 2
A A
Batch 3
$0.50 per
GAI (gram
of active
ingred.)
Physical quantity: 100 L
Actual proportion of active
ingredient: 0.3 G/L
Active ingredient quantity:
30 GAI
Value of active
ingredient: $15
Standard price of batch: 0.15 / L
Valuation of Single Batches Based on Act. Ingredients



Þ Valuation for a single batch is a prerequisite if you wish to calculate a valuation price based on the
active ingredient.
Þ The active ingredient price is taken from the corresponding valuation record. It is a standard price
and does not change. Price fluctuations between batches can occur if they have different potencies of
active ingredient.
Þ The active ingredient characteristic for a batch is assigned values using the active ingredient
proportion. This yields the active ingredient quantity contained in the batch stock.
Þ If you multiply the quantity with the active ingredient price, you get the value of the batch stock.
Þ You get the standard price per base unit of measure for each batch in relation to the physical
quantity.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-7
© SAP AG 1999
Char. UoM Prop. unit Pl. value
Citrus aroma 0.3 G/L
GAI
Gram/liter
Valuated prop.
10 % GK
Percent Fruit juice
concentrate
Material
1
1
View:
Proportion/product unit of measure
Act. ingr. value, citrus aroma
Active ingr. value: fruit
juice concentrate
Total value of
batch
Valuation Based on Several Active Ingredients



Þ For each active ingredient that is to be assigned an active ingredient price, the Valuated proportion
indicator must be set in the material master record.
Þ You can flag several active ingredients in a material as Valuated proportion. The sum of all the
individual active ingredient values then constitute the total batch value.
Þ This value in relation to the batch stock in the base unit of measure yields the standard price for the
batch.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-8
© SAP AG 1999
Condition unit Proportion unit =
$0.50 per 1
GAI
Customer price of active
ingredient:
Sales
Sales Price Based on Active Ingredients



Þ The condition record can be defined on the basis of the proportion unit. This means that you can base
the sales price either on the physical quantity or the active ingredient quantity.
Þ The sales price based on the active ingredient quantity is calculated as follows:
º The actual active ingredient quantity is calculated for each split item in the delivery.
º The active ingredient quantities are added together.
º The sales price is taken for the cumulated active ingredients.
Þ The sales price can be composed of the individual prices of several different active ingredients.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-9
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Create a valuation record for an active
ingredient
¤ Base the valuation price of a batch on
individual prices for the active ingredients
¤ Create a price condition record for an active
ingredient
You are now able to:
Active Ingredient Prices: Unit Summary



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-10
Active Ingredient Prices Exercises



Unit: Active Ingredient Prices
Topic: Valuation Price and Sales Price for an Active
Ingredient


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Allow characteristic value assignment for an active ingredient
in the material master
• Create a valuation record for an active ingredient
• Create a price condition record for an active ingredient


You want to valuate a single batch of a material. This valuation
only takes one active ingredient into account. You must maintain
the material master and specify a standard price for the active
ingredient in the system. You want to store a sales price for the
active ingredient and therefore base a price condition on this
active ingredient.
1-1 Valuation based on active ingredients
You need a valuation record for material AI-1202-0## that is based on the active
ingredient proportion. You know that the valuation for a single batch function is
active for this material. Check this if you are not sure.
Flag the active ingredient as a valuated proportion.
Change your material again.
Go to the Proportion/Product Unit view:
Flag your active ingredient as a valuated proportion.
1-2 Create a valuation record for the active ingredient.
Do this for material AI-1202-0## and the proportion unit you have created. The
plant is specified on the data sheet.
Enter a measured standard price for your active ingredient. Note how the system
recalculates the standard price for the material.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-11
1-3 Post an ‘other’ goods receipt of 1000 KG each to two new batches of material AI-
1202-0##. In one of the batches, do not assign characteristic values. In the other
batch, enter a value that is different from the planned value of the active ingredient.
1-4 Call up the stock overview for material AI-1202-0##.
Display the material in base units of measure and in proportion units (A##). Hint:
Select Extras/Units Allowed to change the unit of measure.
What do you find?

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-12
2-1 Base sales price on active ingredient proportion
For the finished material AI-1000-0##, you need a sales price that is based on the
active ingredient proportion.
Create a price condition for the finished material. The price condition is based on
the active ingredient component. To do this, choose the active ingredient unit as a
condition unit. The sales organization and the distribution channel are contained on
the data screen.
2-2 Post an ‘other’ goods receipt of 1000 L to a new batch for material AI-1000-0##.
For the active ingredient characteristic, enter a value that is different from the
planned value of the active ingredient.
2-3 Create a standard order of 100 liters of AI-1000-0##. The required organizational
levels and the customer number are specified on the data screen.

2-3-1 Go to the price conditions for the item. On what is the sales price based? On
what sold quantity is the sales price based?

2-3-2 For your sales order item, enter the batch number created in 2-2.

2-3-3 Go again to the price conditions for the item. On what sold quantity is the
sales price now based?





SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-13
Active Ingredient Prices Solutions



Unit: Active Ingredient Prices
Topic: Valuation Price and Sales Price for an Active
Ingredient
1-1 Valuation based on active ingredients
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Create
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Display

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1202-0##
View Accounting view 1
Valuation category = X is set.
Flag the active ingredient as a valuated proportion
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1202-0##
View Basic data

Complete the Proportion/Product Unit view under Additional data. Activate
the Valuated proportion field.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-14

1-2 Create valuation record
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Units of
Measure → Standard Price → Create

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1202-0##
Plant 1100
Unit of measure A##

1-3 ‘Other’ goods receipt
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management→ Goods
Movement → Goods Receipt → Other

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1202-0##
Plant 1100
Storage location 0001
Item 1:
Quantity
Batch number
Active ingredient proportion

1000 KG
Any
Do not valuate
Item 2:
Quantity
Batch number
Active ingredient proportion

1000 KG
Any
Enter a value that differs from
the planned value

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-15
1-4 Stock overview
Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management →
Environment → Stock → Stock overview
or
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Stock → Stock
overview
The system displays the appropriate active ingredient proportion for the
valuated batch. The system displays the non-valuated batch with the
planned value in the stock overview. The display in KG shows that both
batches have the same quantity.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-16
2-1 Base sales price on active ingredient proportion
Change material
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1000-0##
View Sales and distribution:
SalesOrgData 1
Organizational levels Values
Plant 1100
Storage location 0001
Sales organization
Distribution channel 22
Choose Conditions and enter a sales price that is based on the proportion
unit LI1 of the active ingredient the material contains.
2-2 ‘Other’ goods receipt
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management→ Goods
Movement → Goods Receipt → Other

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1000-0##
Plant 1100
Storage location 0001
Quantity 1000 L
Batch number Any
Active ingredient proportion Enter a value that differs from
the planned value

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 18-17
2-3 Create standard order
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Field name or data type Values
Order type Standard order
Sales organization 1020
Distribution channel 22
Division 00.
Customer 7777
PO number Any
Material AI-1000-0##
Quantity 100 liters

2-3-1 Check price conditions
Goto → Item → Conditions:
The sales price is based on the proportion unit of the active
ingredient in material A1-1000-0##, going by the planned value, as
no batches have been received yet.
2-3-2 Enter batch number
Item detail: Enter the batch whose characteristic value differs from
the planned value
2-3-3 Check price conditions
Goto → Item → Conditions:
The sales price is based on the proportion unit of the active
ingredient in the batch entered for the item. The active ingredient
proportion is different from the planned value. The sales price for the
100 liters of AI-1000-0## is now more expensive or less expensive
than before.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Planned and Actual Values in the Master Data
¤ From Planned Value to Actual Value
¤ Inventory Correction Factor
Contents:
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Explain how planned and actual values are
used in Active Ingredient Management
¤ Outline the purpose and effect of the inventory
correction factor
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Actual and Planned Values: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-3
© SAP AG 1999
Actual and Planned Values: Overview Diagram
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-4
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Your company wants to be able to map all logistics
processes on the basis of the active ingredients
contained in batches of a material.
¤ It should be possible to use the typical active
ingredient proportion in the relevant material as the
basis for stock displays, Controlling projections,
and MRP runs also in the case of ingredient
proportions that have not yet been valuated.
Actual and Planned Values: Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-5
© SAP AG 1999
From Planned Value to Actual Value
Purch. order
Process/
production
order
Sales order
Reservation
Planned values
Actual values
Bill of material
Delivery
Goods movement
Goods movement
Job-order
costing
Invoice
verification
?
=



Þ We begin the logistics chain by procuring a component through an ordering transaction. We order a
certain quantity of active ingredient. The goods receipt for the order is always carried out in physical
quantities. Up to this point, only the planned active ingredient was known. It is only at this point that
we can enter the actual value for the batch and trigger any corrections needed to the quantity of
goods received. Thus invoice verification operates with actual values.
Þ The active ingredient quantity can be entered in all documents with the exception of the production
order (process order). If the target quantity is entered in active ingredient quantities, a corresponding
open document item is processed in active ingredient quantities.
Þ As soon as the batches have been determined, the job-order costing uses the actual value in its
calculations. The results of the calculation may change if there is an active ingredient price in the
stock valuation of the components.
Þ A batch must have been entered by the goods movement stage at the latest. The system can then
replace the planned value with the actual value.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-6
© SAP AG 1999
Material Material
A A
Batch Batch
Actual value
0.28 G/L
Char.
10 %
Fruit juice
concentrate
Plan value
0.3 G/L
Leading proport.
1
View:
Proportion/
product
unit
Citrus
aroma
Planned and Actual Values in the Master Data



Þ The planned value for an active ingredient proportion is specified in the material master record. The
system works with this value as long as the batch has not yet been selected for a business transaction.
Þ The actual value is only assigned to a batch that actually exists. It is part of the batch's specification
and is used to valuate the active ingredient characteristic.
Þ If an active ingredient is taken into account for planning purposes, the 'leading proportion' indicator
must be set in the material master record.
Þ There can only be one leading active ingredient.

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-7
© SAP AG 1999
May May
Pc
t
Current stock/reqmt
overview
Overview of availability
Plan val. 0.1 liters act. ing. per liter
Material:
Batch:
Act. Val. 0.2 liters act. ing. per liter
Correction
factor
2
New available quantity: 200 liters
Quantity 100 liters
100 liters Quantity
Inventory Correction Factor



Þ The planned value for an active ingredient proportion can differ slightly from the average actual
value of all the batches of a material. In this way, less or more quantity is actually available than
identified in the stock overview.
Þ The available amount can be corrected for planning purposes using the inventory correction factor.
The effect it has may be seen in the “current stock/requirement” and “total availability” list displays.
Þ The inventory correction factor works in the following way: the warehouse stock is corrected
temporarily for planning purposes before it is included in the calculation of available quantity.
Þ The inventory correction factor does not have any influence on the total stock and does not trigger an
inventory posting. The stock overview remains unchanged.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-8
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Explain how planned and actual values are
used in Active Ingredient Management
¤ Outline the purpose and effect of the inventory
correction factor
You are now able to:
Actual and Planned Values: Summary



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-9
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-1 Exercises



Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions
Topic: External Procurement of an Active
Ingredient


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a purchase order for an active ingredient
• Post the goods receipt in physical quantities
• Determine the active ingredient content in quality inspection
• Post the invoice verification document for the active ingredient
quantity actually received


You want to buy an active ingredient. You can only store a
certain active ingredient content in the goods receipt. You will
not find out how much active ingredient the goods receipt
contains until quality inspection. You want to pay the invoice
only for the quantity of active ingredient you have received.
1-1 The material AI-1201-0## contains an active ingredient, which is measured in the
proportion unit KI1. It is your job to purchase the material.
1-1-1 Create a new purchase order for vendor 100, purchasing organization IDES
Germany, purchasing group Zuse, K, company code SAP Germany. Order
the material AI-1201-0##.
Order 40 units of the active ingredient for next week. Enter the purchase
order price of your choice.
1-1-2 On the item detail screen, choose Delivery. Remember that the quantity of
active ingredient that is actually delivered may slightly differ from the
quantity ordered. You should therefore maintain the tolerances accordingly.
1-2 Goods receipt of the material containing active ingredients
1-2-1 The base unit of measure for material AI-1201-0## is KG. Only the physical
quantity can be determined in goods receipt. 100 KG are delivered. Which
active ingredient proportion do you choose?
1-2-2 Post the goods receipt for the purchase order in the base unit of measure.
Enter a batch number of your choice or accept a number assigned manually.
Do not valuate the characteristic active ingredient.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-10

1-3 Display the purchase order history.
1-4 The active ingredient of material AI-1201-0## has its own valuation price.
Display the valuation record for this active ingredient. Make a note of the standard
price of the active ingredient and the material.
1-5 The material is to be valuated for a single batch
Display the Financial Accounting screen for material AI-1201-0## at batch level
and make a note of the moving average price, the standard price, and the stock.
Which price control does the valuation type have (= batch)?
1-6 The goods receipt for material AI-1201-0## may be found in quality inspection.
1-6-1 Call up results recording for the incoming inspection lot. You should have
just measured the active ingredient content. Enter a value that is within the
tolerances. Make sure that you enter a value that does not correspond with
the planned value from the material master. Close the characteristic.
1-6-2 Record the usage decision. Choose the inspection lot. The whole goods
receipt is to be posted to unrestricted stock. The batch is released.
1-7 Batch classification has been assigned values from QM.
Check the result. Display batch classification.
1-8 Quality inspection has found that the active ingredient content does not correspond
with the planned value. An adjustment posting for the goods receipt is thus
required.
1-8-1 Trigger a posting that is based on the goods entry inspection lot for the
purchase order.
1-8-2 Check the purchase order history once again. What do you find?
1-9 You want to know the actual value of the batch.
Display the Financial Accounting screen for material AI-1202-0## at batch level
and compare the values with the results obtained in 1-5.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-11

1-10 In Invoice Verification, you create the invoice using the quantities that were
actually delivered to you.
1-10-1 Create the invoice document for the order and preview the document before
you save it.
1-10-2 Check the result in the purchase order history.




SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-12
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-13
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-3 Exercises



Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions
Topic: Inventory Correction


At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Post a goods receipt from Production without using a
production order
• Carry out an inventory correction when the actual active
ingredient proportion is different from the planned value
• Display the available quantity of a material in the base unit of
measure and in the proportion unit



You produce the finished product and enter the active ingredient
proportion at the goods receipt stage. The proportion differs
slightly from the planned value. You want to include this
information in your schedule and therefore you must correct the
basis for your planning.
1-1 You produce the finished product AI-1000-0##. It is managed in the base unit of
measure liter.

1-1-1 Set the active ingredient characteristic as the leading proportion for material
AI-1000-0##. Find out the planned value.
Planned value: _____________________________________________

1-1-2 Without using a production order, post an ‘other’ goods receipt with
movement type 521 to any new batch (or several new batches). The planned
active ingredient proportion has not quite been attained. Assign
characteristic values to the batch(es) accordingly.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-14
1-2 The available quantity for the finished product AI-1000-0## is still displayed for
the planned value. For planning purposes, you must make corrections to the stock.

1-2-1 Call the current stock/requirements list for the finished product.
Switch on the display of the available quantity in proportion units.
Make a note of the available quantity.
In the base unit of measure
In the proportion unit
Available quantity in base unit of measure: _________________
Available quantity in proportion unit: ________________

1-2-2 Create a second session. Here, you carry out an inventory correction for the
finished product.
Carry out the inventory correction in processing mode. Output a list that
also contains the batches.

1-2-3 Then update the current stock/requirements list.
How has the available quantity changed?
In the base unit of measure
In the proportion unit
Why has it changed?
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________

1-2-4 Call up the stock overview and check that the warehouse stocks are
displayed correctly in every unit of measure that has been defined.




SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-15
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-1 Solutions



Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions
Topic: External Procurement of an Active
Ingredient
1-1 The material AI-1201-0## contains an active ingredient, which is measured in the
proportion unit KI1. It is your job to purchase the material.
1-1-1 Create purchase order
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →
Create.→ Vendor/Supplying Plant Known

Field name or data type Values
Vendor 100
Purchasing org. 1000 / IDES Germany
Purchasing group 007 / Zuse, K
Company code SAP Germany
Plant 1100 / Berlin
Storage location 0001
Material AI-1201-0##
Quantity 40 KI1
Delivery date Next week
Price Any

1-1-2 On the item detail screen, choose Delivery. Maintain the tolerances for
overdelivery as a percentage, or choose the Unlimited indicator.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-16
1-2 Goods receipt of the material containing active ingredients
1-2-1 When 100 KG of the material is delivered, you assume that it contains the
planned value of 40% of active ingredient, that is, 40 KW1, which is the
exact ordered quantity.

1-2-2 Post the goods receipt via
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods
Movement, Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → PO Number Known.
Field name or data type Values
PO number See exercise 1-1
Quantity 100 KG
Batch Any
Active ingredient Do not valuate
Note: You can also post the goods receipt via the transaction MB01.
1-3 Display the purchase order history.
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →
Display → Item details → PO history
The system displays the goods receipt. The ordered quantity has been delivered (40
KI1).
1-4 Display valuation price
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Units of
Measure → Standard Price → Display

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1201-0##
Plant 1100
Proportion/product unit KI1
The valuation price for 100 KI1 is 15 UNI.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-17
1-5 Display the accounting view of the material AI-1201-0## at batch level
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Create
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Display

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1201-0##
View Accounting view 1
Organizational levels Values
Plant 1100
Batch = valuation category See exercise 1-2-2
The system displays the price per base unit of measure. This price is based on the
assumption that the base unit of measure contains the same active ingredient
proportion as specified in the planned value.
1-6 The goods receipt for material AI-1201-0## may be found in quality inspection.
1-6-1 Enter inspection result:
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording
Search for the inspection lots for your material AI-1202-0##. The system
will find one inspection lot and display it in the frame on the left-hand side.
Double-click line 9999 Check with material specification for work center in
the left frame.
Field name Values
Material AI-1201-0##
Operation 10 9999
On the entry screen:
Select the item and click Edit - Choose
[or the magnifying glass icon < ]: xQuer = differs from the planned value.
Edit - Lock [or choose the lock icon &],
(by-pass any dialog boxes by choosing Accept). . Save.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-18
1-6-2 Enter the usage decision.
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording
Double-click the line with inspection number 5000…in the left-hand frame.
On the entry screen:
In the UD code field, use F4 help to enter an acceptance without further
action and . save the usage decision.
A dialog box then appears, prompting you to post the quantity concerned
(100 KG) to the appropriate stock type: Enter 100 in the line To unrestricted
and . save again.
1-7 Display batch classification.
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch → Display
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Batch → Display
The result from QM has been transferred. The batch has a value that differs from
the planned value for the active ingredient characteristic.
1-8 An adjustment posting for the goods receipt is thus required.
1-8-1 Subsequent adjustment with reference to inspection lot
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch-specific
Units of Measure → Subsequent Adjustment f. Goods Receipt → Enter
with Ref. to Insp. Lot
1-8-2 Display PO history
Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing.→ Purchase Order
→ Display
Item details → PO history
The system displays two goods receipts. The delivered quantity is greater
than the ordered quantity. As a result of the subsequent adjustment
(exercise 1-9-1), the system created a second goods receipt, which reflects
the difference between the measured actual value and the planned value of
the active ingredient.
1-9 Display the accounting view of the material AI-1201-0## at batch level
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Create
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Display
Field name or data type Values
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-19
Material AI-1201-0##
View Accounting view 1
Organizational levels Values
Plant 1100
Batch = valuation category See exercise 1-2-2
The batch is now valuated differently due to the different active ingredient
content.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-20

1-10 Effects in Invoice Verification
1-10-1 Enter invoice
Logistics → Materials Management → Invoice Verification → Logistics
Invoice Verification → Document Entry → Enter Invoice

Field name or data type Values
Document date Today
Amount Invoiced value of goods + tax
Tax amount Tax amount
Reference to PO/scheduling agreement
PO number 45.... See exercise 1-1
The system accepts the invoice, even though the amount specified is higher
than planned. This is because of the overdelivery that was posted for the
purchase order. The overdelivery was possible because a tolerance was
entered for the PO item.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-21
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-2 Solutions



Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions
Topic: Process Orders and Job-order Costing
1-1 Create process order
Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process order → Create →
With material

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1200
Plant 1100
Order type PI01
Total qty 80 KW1
Start date Today
1-2 Extend material list
Goto → Material list
Include the third item:

Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1201-0##
Requirement qty 10 KG
Item category L
Operations 10

1-3 Determine and display costs
Process order → Functions → Determine costs
Goto → Costs → Itemization
The costs are displayed with the current valuation of the stocks at the moving
average price at plant level, not at the planned value.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-22
1-4 Batch determination for material AI-1201-0##
When you create or change a process order, select your component that is subject
to batch management AI-1202-0## and choose
Material → Batch management → Carry out determination
Choose a batch. It is advisable to choose a batch containing an active ingredient
proportion that differs from the planned value for the active ingredient.
1-5 Determine and display costs
Process order → Functions → Determine costs
Goto → Costs → Itemization
The system displays the costs for material AI-1201-0## using the stocks’current
valuation at batch level.
1-6 Release and save process order
Process order → Functions → Release
Process order → Save



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-23
Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-3 Solutions



Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions
Topic: Inventory Correction
1-1 Production for a finished material and batch valuation at goods receipt
1-1-1 Leading proportion of an active ingredient in material
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment
→ Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1000-0##
View Basic data
Additions → Proportion/Product Unit view
Set the active ingredient characteristic AIC020## as the leading proportion.
The planned value is 0.10000 LSL (LSL = LW1 per liter)
1-1-2 ‘Other’ goods receipt without reference to production order
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management.→ Goods
Movement → Goods Receipt → Other
Field name or data type Values
Movement type 521
Plant 1100
Storage location 0001
Material AI-1000-0##
Quantity 100 liters
Batch number Any
Active ingredient proportion Not 0.1000 LSL
for example, 0.3000 LSL or
0.02 LSL

SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-24
1-2 Correct stock with regard to Materials Planning
1-2-1 Current stock/requirements list for material AI-1000-0## in plant 1100.
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Environment → Stock → Stock/Requirements List
In the first field for units, enter liter (= base unit of measure) and in the
second field, enter LW1 (=proportion unit).
Choose ENTER so that the system can create the additional column for
displaying the available quantity in proportion units.
The available quantities are correct in both units of measure. The quantity is
displayed in proportion units for the actual value counted in the batches.
Only non-valuated batches are included at the planned value in this total.
1-2-2 Carry out inventory correction for material AI-1000-0##.
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch-specific
Units of Measure → Determine Inventory Correction Factors
Field name or data type Values
Material AI-1000-0##
Plant 1100
Online processing Set at Process
With list output Activate indicator
List output Set at Display batch
This report shows the inventory correction factor in total and the inventory
correction factor for each batch.
1-2-3 Current stock/requirements list for material AI-1000-0## in plant 1100.
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Environment → Stock → Stock/Requirements List
MRP uses only the base unit of measure.
For MRP purposes, the system multiplied the available quantity in the base
unit of measure with the inventory correction factor (total) in order to plan
materials on the basis of the active ingredient.
The available quantity in proportion units remains unchanged by the
inventory correction.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 19-25
1-2-4 Stock overview
Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management →
Environment → Stock → Stock overview
or
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Stock
→ Stock overview
The warehouse stocks are not affected by the inventory correction. The
stock overview shows the actual stock levels in all units of measure that
have been defined.


SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ The Central Unit of Measure for Product Quantities
¤ Relationship Between Units of Measure
¤ Maintenance of Units of Measurement in Customizing
¤ User-defined Calculation
¤ Linking of Master Data
¤ Material Master Maintenance
¤ The Product Quantity in the Specification
¤ Classification Maintenance in the Material Master
¤ Maintaining Units of Measurement in the Mat. Master
¤ Activating Product Quantity Management
Contents:
Data Concept in Product Quantity Management



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Carry out the steps necessary to maintain data in
product quantity management
¤ Explain how units of measure are defined and
how to convert quantities from one unit into
another
¤ Create units of measure and define them as
product units
¤ Describe the how product quantity management
is integrated with batch management
¤ Maintain quantity characteristics as class
characteristics
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Product Quantity Management: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-3
© SAP AG 1999
Product Quantity Management: Overview Diagram
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-4
© SAP AG 1999
¤ A company produces and stores steel beams in the
base unit of measure "kilogram". The beams vary
slightly in length, and thus also in weight.
¤ It should also be possible to show the stock of this
material as the number of beams on hand (that is to
say, in the unit "piece").
¤ In the same way, all other Logistics applications
should be able to use this material in the unit of
measure "piece". In addition, the correct weight
should be assigned to each piece of this material
(that is, to each individual beam).
Product Quantity Management: Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-5
© SAP AG 1999
The Central Unit of Measure for Product Quantities
Sales
Purchasing
BOM
A
B
B
C
B
Inventory
mgmt
Product unit



Þ The product unit runs like a thread through the applications and is used to replicate the alternative
unit of measure of a material in a batch.
Þ The conversion ratio between the product unit and the base unit of measure is continuously available
and can be displayed by each of the relevant applications.
Þ Unlike in Active Ingredient Management, when you make a specification in the product unit, the
entire stock - not just some of the materials in the batch - is assigned with the batch-specific
conversion factor and can be displayed in alternative units of measure.
Þ In Logistics you may thus enter the alternative product unit instead of the base unit of measure.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-6
© SAP AG 1999
Ratio
Product unit
Base unit of measure
=
Weight per piece
KPP
Piece PC
Kilogram
KG
Relationship Between Units of Measure



Þ The base unit of measure is the leading unit of measure for a material. If an entry is made in the
product unit, the system converts this to the base unit of measure before posting.
Þ The product unit relates to the entire stock of a batch. If there are several alternative units of measure
which may have different ratios to the base unit depending on the specific batch in question, different
product units must be used to represent the alternatives.
Þ The conversion formula for conversions between the product unit and the base unit of measure is
stored in the form of a ratio. This ratio constitutes a separate unit of measurement.
Þ In this example, the material is displayed in pieces as well as in the base unit of measure KG. PC has
been defined as the product unit.
Þ Conversion from the base unit of measure KG is carried out on a batch-specific basis.
Þ This ratio is recorded in the unit of measurement KPP (kilogram per piece).
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-7
© SAP AG 1999
Nondimensional
Dimension Weight
Maint. of Units of Measurement in Customizing
KG Kilogram
Pieces/steel beams PC
Pieces/steel beams PC
Alternative product unit
Should be
treated as...
Weight per piece (steel beam) KPP
Units of meas.
Product units



Þ All units of measurement to be used in product quantity management must have previously been
defined in Customizing.
Þ Units of measurement to be used as product units should not be assigned to a dimension.
Þ The role of the product unit is assigned to a unit of measurement in Customizing for Product
Quantity Management. Stocks of the material can be shown in this unit.
Quantity conversions are carried out on a batch-specific basis from the base unit of measure KG.
Þ Some of the most common units of measurement for the product unit are supplied with the standard
system. However, a self-chosen definition for an alternative unit of measure can be entered as the
unit of measurement and designated an allowed product unit at any time.
Þ To facilitate conversion into a standard unit of measure, the self-defined unit of measurement is
assigned a reference.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-8
© SAP AG 1999
User-defined Calculation
Calculation
Define base quantity from
product quantity
KPP KPP
KG/PC KG/PC
PPK PPK
PC/KG PC/KG
Base unit of measure = KG
Product unit = PC
Define the conversion factor in such a way that the result is > 1.
Calculation
Define product quantity from
base quantity



Example
Þ The quantity in the product unit PC is converted to the quantity in the base unit of measure KG on a
batch-specific basis.
Þ This ratio is recorded in the unit of measurement KPP (kilo per pc) or PPK (pc per kilo).
Þ To ensure that the characteristic value (measured in KPP or PPK) delivers plausible results for the
product unit, there are two ways of defining the unit of measure for this characteristic: On the basis
of the product unit or on the basis of the base unit of measure.
Þ Define the unit of measure in such a way that the characteristic value will generally be greater than 1.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-9
© SAP AG 1999
Linking of Master Data
Material
A
Batch 1
A
Batch 2
A
Batch 3
Specification
passed on
Characteristic Characteristic
weight weight per per pc pc
Batch class Batch class



Þ The ratio between the product unit and the base unit of measure is stored in a batch characteristic and
thus becomes part of the specification.
Þ The material transfers the information to its batches.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-10
© SAP AG 1999
Material Master Maintenance
Material Material master master
Batch class Batch class
Characteristic Characteristic
weight weight per per pc pc
Ratio KPP View
S =
Subst.
KG <=> PC
Unit of Unit of
meas meas. KPP . KPP



Þ Product unit characteristics are assigned the special view 'S' within the batch class.
Þ Characteristics with this view are recognized during material master maintenance. The information
for conversion beween product unit and base unit of measure is adopted in the material master.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-11
© SAP AG 1999
The Product Quantity in the Specification
Weight per pc
120 - 125 KPP
Test
certificate
3.1A 3.1B
Material master
Origin USA,
Switzerland
Origin USA
Batch
Weight
120 KPP
Test certificate
3.1B



Þ In Batch Management in the R/3 System, the material passes on its specification to the batch.
Depending on the system settings, either it is mandatory for the batch values to lie within the limits
defined in the material master or these values are merely taken as defaults from that source.
Þ Since the product quantity characteristic is part of the specification of the material and its individual
batches, the same logic applies. The exact product quantities in the individual batches are checked
against the data in the material master.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-12
© SAP AG 1999
Classification Maintenance in the Material Master
Weight per pc
120 - 125 KPP
Test certificate
- 3.1A
- 3.1B
- 3.1C
Origin
USA Switzerland
View:
Classification
Class type: Batches
Class for ‘steel
beams’
Material



Þ The product unit characteristic is allocated to the batch class and a value is assigned to it in the
material master.
Þ You have to enter a discrete value for the planned conversion factor. The relevant characteristic for
conversion must be defined as a single value, with no interval values.
Þ The planned value in the material master should be a mean value within the expected batch
conversion factors.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-13
© SAP AG 1999
Maintaining Units of Measurement in Mat. Master
Material
View:
Proportion/product unit of measure
GK <=> L
Char.
UoM
Prop. unit Pl. value
Weight per
pc
120 KPP PC
Kilogram /
pc
X
ProductUn
Y Base UoM <=>
PC KG
1 120 <=>



Þ After the classification view has been maintained, any product quantity characteristics are known to
the system.
Þ You must complete the information in the Proportion/Product Unit view: The system expects a
planned value for the conversion to the base unit of measure.
Þ The planned value specifies the assumed conversion ratio between the product quantity and the base
unit of measure in the characteristic unit of measurement.
If the concrete product quantity of a batch is not known for a certain transaction, the system uses the
planned value from the material master.
The planned value for the conversion between product quantiy and base unit of measure is
transferred to the units of measure table automatically.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-14
© SAP AG 1999
Activating Product Quantity Management
Material Material
Activate
product qty
management?
Yes Yes



Þ You can make several Customizing settings for Product Quantity Management in the system before
the component is activated.
Þ After the component is activated, the product quantity data is ready to be maintained in the material
master.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-15
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Carry out the steps necessary to maintain data in
product quantity management
¤ Explain how units of measure are defined and how
to convert quantities from one unit into another
¤ Create units of measure and define them as
product units
¤ Describe the how product quantity management is
integrated with batch management
¤ Maintain product quantities as class
characteristics
You are now able to:
Product Quantity Management: Summary



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-16
Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Exercises


Unit: Data Concept in Product Quantity
Management
Topic: Defining and Using Product Units


At the conclusion this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create your own units of measurement and define them as
conversion ratios
• Create characteristics to describe a product quantity and
maintain batch classes
• Extend the batch classification in the material master
• Use product units and maintain planned values
• Track warehouse stocks and available quantities in the product
unit and base unit of measure in the system


A material Steel beam, managed in the base unit kilogram,
consists of individual pieces that vary in length. Each beam
(piece) is roughly 2 meters long and weighs 20 kilograms. Slight
variations in the length of the pieces mean that the weight per
piece also varies. In Inventory Management, approximate
information in the form of a fixed conversion ratio at material
level is not enough. Each batch requires an exact, individual
conversion ratio. You want to achieve this objective with the aid
of Product Quantity Management.

1-1 Create unit of measurement (for the characteristic describing the ratio of the product
quantity to the base unit)
Create your own unit of measurement. It should then be used to carry out conversions
between the physical quantity and the product unit of measure. You will use this unit to
measure the ratio kilogram/piece. The new unit of measurement should be
nondimensional.
Enter a key ending with your group number (for example, U##). The new entry should be
defined with 3 decimals and be rounded to three decimal places. The entry of an ISO code
on the Details screen for the unit of measurement is not mandatory.
1-2 Define product unit
Verify whether the unit of measure piece can be used as a product unit.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-17
1-3 Define ratio unit
Define the ratio between physical quantity and product quantity for the unit of
measurement from 1-1 [U##]. Define the relationship of the unit of measure piece (as the
product unit) and kilogram (as the base unit of measure) to the unit of measure U##.
Define the ratio in such a way that the characteristic value will normally be a number
greater than 1.
5

1-4 Create characteristic
In the classification system, create a characteristic that satisfies the following
requirements:
• The key should end with your group number.
• The conversion ratio between piece and kilogram should be clearly defined in the
characteristic description.
• The status should be released.
• The data type should be numerical.
• The characteristic value assignment should consist of a single value.
In the previous exercise, you defined a unit of measurement for a conversion ratio
between physical quantity and product quantity.
• Use this unit of measurement as the unit for your characteristic.
• The characteristic should have three places before and three after the decimal point.
• Define a value interval for the characteristic (1 piece weighs roughly 20 KG).
• Allow the characteristic for class types 023 and 022.
1-5 Assign the characteristic to a class
Create a new class PM## for steel beams. Note that the substance view has to be
available at header level so that a planned value can be stored at material level for
product quantities or active ingredients.
Assign your new characteristic to the class and think about the substance view at
characteristic level too.

5
For example, if 1 PC = 100 KG, then the quotient is best defined with KG/ST. Since KG is the base
unit of measure, you choose Define calculation of base quantity from product quantity.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-18
1-6 Create a new material. You can use the copying facility.
The reference material is Y-351.
Create a new finished product PM-1000-0## for plant 1100. Adopt the views
Basic Data 1, Classification, Purchasing and Accounting 1 from the reference
material.
Make the following changes:
• The short text is "2 meter steel beam".
• Delete the assignment to a batch class.
Edit the views you have chosen and then save.
1-7 Maintain product quantity for a material
Change your material PM-1000-0##. Choose the Classification and Purchasing
views.
1-7-1 In the Classification view, assign your new class PM## and assign a
plausible value range to the characteristic.
1-7-2 From the Purchasing screen, go to the additional data and choose the
proportion/product unit view. Enter the planned value of 20 kg per
piece.
1-7-3 Also go to the additional view Units of Measure. Check the conversion
ratio for the planned value.
1-8 Post a goods receipt without a purchase order
Your material is delivered without a purchase order. Enter an other goods receipt
for a quantity of 100 pieces in a new batch. The weight per piece differs from the
planned value.
1-9 Display the material document. Call up the item details. To display the relation
between piece and kilogram in the batch, choose Goto → More functions →
Quantity conversion.
1-10 Call up the current stock/requirements list for material PM-1000-0##.
Also activate the display of the available quantity in the product unit.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-19
Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Solutions



Unit: Data Concept in Product Quantity
Management
Topic: Defining and Using Product Units
1-1 Create unit of measurement (for the characteristic describing the ratio of the product
quantity to the base unit)
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto →
SAP Reference IMG)
Global Settings → Check units of measurement
Pushbutton Units of measure (nondimensional)
Unit of measurement - Create

Field name or data type Values
Internal unit of measurement U##
Commercial format U##
Technical format U##
Unit of measurement text,
commercial
For example, KG/PC
Unit of measurement text,
technical
For example, KG/PC
Decimal places 3
Rounding to decimal places 3
1-2 Define product unit
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto →
SAP Reference IMG)
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Units of
Measure → Edit Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure
The unit of measure piece is listed. It can thus be used as a proportion unit or
product unit.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-20
1-3 Define ratio unit
Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto →
SAP Reference IMG)
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Unit of
Measure → Product Quantity Conversion → Define Calculation of Base
Quantity from Product Quantity
Pushbutton New entry
Field name or data type Values
Unit of measurement of
characteristic
U##
Base unit of measure KG
Batch-specific UoM
PC
1-4 Create characteristic
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics
or
Logistics → Central Functions →
Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics
Note the instructions in the exercise text, in particular:
Field name or data type Values
Unit of measurement of
characteristic
U##
No. of characters 6
Decimal places
3
Values
17 - 25 U##
1-5 Assign active ingredient characteristic to class
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Classification System → Master Data → Classes
or
Logistics → Central Functions →
Classification System → Master Data → Classes
Class → Create
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-21

Field name or data type Values
Class PM##
Description Class for steel beams
Application view
S
Characteristic See exercise 1-4
Application view S
1-6 Create new material
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Create
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Create

Field name or data type Values
Material PM-1000-0##
Industry Mechanical engineering
Material type Finished product
Template Y-351

Views Values
Views Basic data 1
Classification
Purchasing
Accounting 1

Organizational levels Values (new material and
template)
Plant 1100

Field name or data type Values
Material short text 2 meter steel beam
Class assignment Delete
Edit all the views you have chosen and then save.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-22
1-7 Maintain product quantity for a material
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately
or
Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately

Field name or data type Values
Material PM-1000-0##
Views Classification
Purchasing
Plant 1100

1-7-1 In the Classification view, assign the class PM## and assign values for the
active ingredient characteristic (for example, 18 to 22 U##).
1-7-2 In the Basic Data view, under Additional data, choose the
Proportion/Product Unit view. Enter B in the Units meas. use field. Enter
the required data.

Field name or data type Values
Planned value 20 U## ( = KG/PC)
Proportion/product unit PC

1-7-3 In the Proportion/Product Unit view, click the tab page button and choose
Units of measure.
The conversion is carried out at the planned value of 1 piece/20 KG.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 20-23
1-8 Goods receipt without purchase order
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management→ Goods
Movement → Goods Receipt → Other

Field name or data type Values
Movement type 501
Plant 1100
Storage location 0001
Material PM-1000-0##
Quantity 100 pieces
Batch number Any
Active ingredient proportion Not 20 U##
For example, 19 or 22 U##

1-9 Display material document
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Material
Document → Display
Call up the item details.
Goto → Additional functions → Quantity conversion
The conversion ratio shows that the batch contains 100 pc steel beams, with an
average weight of 19 KG/PC.
1-10 Current stock/requirements list for material PM-1000-0## in plant 1100.
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Environment → Stock → Stock/Requirements List
Enter kilogram (= base unit of measure) in the first field for units, and PC (=product
unit) in the second.
Choose ENTER to get the system to generate the additional column for displaying
the available quantity in the product unit.
The available quantities are shown correctly in both units of measure.



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 21-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Quantity Conversion with Product Unit
¤ Quantity Conversion in Inventory Management
¤ Stock Transfer – Cases
¤ Stock Transfer with Product Unit
Contents:
Product Units - Stock Transfer



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 21-2
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Carry out stock transfers involving batches to which
varying conversion factors apply for the conversion
of quantities from the base unit of measure into an
alternative unit and vice versa.
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Product Units of Measure: Unit Objectives



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 21-3
© SAP AG 1999
Product Units of Measure: Overview Diagram
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 21-4
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Again and again, your enterprise is faced with the
situation in which stocks of a material handled in
batches have to be transferred to other batch
stocks whose conversion factor between the
alternative and base units of measure differs from
that of the batch from which the transfer is made.
Product Units of Measure: Business Scenario



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 21-5
© SAP AG 1999
Quantity Conversion with Product Unit
¤ Status 3.0
• The conversion factor between alternative unit of measure
and base unit of measure is defined at material level.
• All batches of the material have this conversion factor.
¤ as of 4.0
• The conversion factors that are defined for all batches of the
material are planned values.
• The conversion factors of the individual batches are defined
when the batch is created and cannot subsequently be
changed They represent the exact value or an average value.
All goods movements are carried out with this conversion
factor.



Goal:
Þ You should ensure that a material does not have to be created for every dimension. Products that
differ only in dimension and in a few other characteristics should be grouped under one material
number. This reduces the data volume and makes maintenance easier.
Þ In Release 3.0, the conversion factor between the alternative unit of measure and the base unit of
measure is defined at material level.
Þ In the standard system from 4.0 onwards, you can manage products with different conversion factors
as batches under one material number.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 21-6
© SAP AG 1999
Quantity Conversion in Inventory Management
Sections, steel sheets
KG
PC
Fixed batch
conversion factor
Stockkeeping unit:
Batch unit:
Batch properties:
- Fusion number
- Origin
- Certificate
- Length (!) 6000 mm



Þ Scenario:
º The conversion factor is specified for a batch.
º All pieces are roughly the same weight. All goods movements are carried out with the conversion
factor for this batch.
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 21-7
© SAP AG 1999
Stock Transfer – Cases
Existing batch, same
conversion factor
Existing batch, different
conversion factor
New batch
Issuing batch Receiving batch



Þ Stock transfers between batches with different conversion factors in one or more product units are
fundamentally possible (T160M).
Þ The transferred quantity is checked for errors after the decimal point with the conversion factor of
the receiving batch.
º Example: Numbers of pieces are defined as whole numbers. Weight per piece, issuing
batch 300 kg Weight per piece, receiving batch 330 kg
Stock transfer of 300 kg = 0.91 pc Error after decimal point Stock transfer of 330 kg =
1.0 pc OK
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 21-8
© SAP AG 1999
Stock Transfer with Product Unit
Issuing batch Coil1
Weight per pc Ø 300 kg (e.g. from GR)
Receiving batch Coil3
Weight per pc 280 kg
Weight per pc 310 kg
Weight per pc 310 kg
Weight per pc 280 kg
¤ The user wants to transfer the lighter piece to an appropriate batch
¤ He or she has to manually enter another transfer posting line for the
remaining quantity in the segment
Receiving batch Coil2
Weight per pc 310 kg



Appendix:
If you change the conversion factor for a batch, you cannot subsequently post a reversal for this
batch, as it would result in inconsistencies.

Example of problem with reversal of a goods movement:
Þ Goods receipt of 3 pc 900 kg (weight per pc 300kg)
Þ Goods issue of 1 pc 300 kg (weight per pc 300 kg)
Þ Stock transfer of 1 pc @ 280 kg
Þ Remaining stock in batch of 1 pc 320 kg

Þ Conversion factor is changed
Þ Reversal of goods issue (300 kg = 0.94 pc cannot be posted due to error after decimal point)
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 21-9
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Carry out stock transfers involving two batches each
having a different conversion factor for the
conversion of quantities from the base unit of
measure into an alternative unit or vice versa
You are now able to:
Summary



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 22-1
© SAP AG 1999
Availability Check
for Batches
Summary (1)
Master Data
Batch Levels
Batch Specification
Batch
Status Management
Introduction
Batch Determination
Price Determination
Shelf Life Expiration Date
Batch
Batch
Batch
Batch ?
Batch
XXXX
+ YYY
= ZZZZ
Batch Where-used List
Batch
2
9



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 22-2
© SAP AG 1999
Summary (2)
Active Ingredient Prices
Appendix: Batch Creation in
Process Manufacturing
Batch-specific
Units of Measure
Integration of Batch-
specific Units of Measure
Active Ingred. Management -
Design and Data Concept
Batch Specification and
Quality Management
Act. and Planned Values
of AI Proportions
Prod. Quantity - Design
and Data Concept
Product Units of Measure -
Stock Transfers
Summary
Batch
Optimized Batch
Processing
Batch
Batch



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 22-3
© SAP AG 1999
Recommended Follow-up Activities
¤ Go through the exercises using IDES data or your own data
¤ Read on-line documentation
¤ Read IMG documentation
¤ Read release notes



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 23-1
© SAP AG 1999
¤ Menu Paths
Contents:
Appendix



SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 23-2
Frequently-used Menu Paths
Master Data
Activity Menu Path
Material master record Logistics → Materials Management → Material
Master → Material → Create|Change|Display
or
Logistics → Central Functions
→ Batch Management → Environment
→ Material Master → Material
→ Create|Change|Display
Batch master record Logistics → Central Functions
→ Batch Management → Batch
→ Create|Change|Display
or
Logistics → Materials Management → Material
Master → Batch → Create|Change|Display
Valuation record for active
ingredient management
Logistics → Central Functions
→ Batch Management → Batch-specific Units of
Measure → Standard Price
→ Create|Change|Display

Inventory Management
Activity Menu Path
Goods receipt | Transfer
posting | Goods issue
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods
Receipt|Transfer Posting|Goods Issue
Current
stock/requirements list
Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Environment → Stock →
Stock/Requirements List
Material documents Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Material Document →
Change|Display



Classification System
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 23-3
Activity Menu Path
Class Logistics → Central Functions → Classification →
Master Data → Classes
or
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch
Management → Environment → Classification
System → Master Data → Classes
Characteristic Logistics → Central Functions → Classification →
Master Data → Characteristics
or
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch
Management → Environment → Classification
System → Master Data → Characteristics

Quality Inspection
Activity Menu Path
Maintain material
specification
Logistics → Central Functions
→ Batch Management → Environment
→ Quality Planning for Material → Inspection
Planning → Material Specification → Edit|Display
or
Logistics → Quality Management
→ Quality Planning → Inspection Planning →
Material Specification → Edit|Display
Maintain master inspection
characteristic
Logistics → Central Functions → Batch
Management → Environment → Quality Planning
for Material → Basic Data → Inspection
Characteristic → Create|Change|Display

Enter result Logistics → Central Functions → Batch
Management → Environment → Quality Inspection
→ Worklist → Results Recording
or
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality
Inspection → Inspection Result → For
Operation|For Inspection Point →
Record|Change|Display
Enter usage reason Logistics → Central Functions
→ Batch Management → Environment
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 23-4
Activity Menu Path
→ Quality Inspection → Worklist
→ Results Recording
or
Logistics → Quality Management
→ Quality Inspection
Inspection Lot → Usage Decision
→ Record|Change|Display
Inspection lot Logistics → Central Functions → Batch
Management → Environment → Quality Inspection
→ Inspection Lot → Editing →
Create|Change|Display
or
Logistics → Quality Management → Quality
Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing →
Create|Change|Display

SD
Activity Menu Path
Sales order Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales →
Order → Create|Change|Display
Create delivery Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales →
Order → Subsequent functions → Outbound
Delivery

Production
Activity Menu Path
Production order Logistics → Production → Production Control →
Order → Create|Change|Display



Production Planning
Activity Menu Path
Process order Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order
→ Process order → Create|Change|Display|Release
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 23-5
Activity Menu Path
Master recipe Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data
→ Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List →
Create|Change|Display

Batch Where-used List
Activity Menu Path
Display batch where-used
list in Inventory
Management
Logistics → Central Functions
→ Batch Management → Tools
→ Batch Usage → Pick-Up List|Display
or
Logistics → Materials Management
→ Inventory Management →
Environment → Batch Where-Used List → Display

Define Batch Search Strategies in the Application
Activity Menu Path

Logistics → Central Functions
→ Batch Management → Batch Determination
→ Batch Search Strategy → For Inventory
Management|For Production Order|For Process
Order|For Sales and Distribution|For Warehouse
Management → Create|Change|Display


Customizing
Activity Menu Path

Tools → Accelerated SAP → Customizing
→ Edit Project
Implementation Projects → SAP Implementation
Guide (IMG)
Main menu paths for
setting up Batch
Management
Logistics - General → Batch Management →
Specify Batch Level and Activate Status
Management
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Number Assignment
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 23-6
Activity Menu Path
Logistics - General → Batch Management →
Creation of New Batches
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Valuation
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Status Management
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Where-Used List
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-
Specific Material Units of Measure
Batch Determination Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Determination and Batch Check → Condition Tables
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Determination and Batch Check → Access Sequences
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Determination and Batch Check → Strategy Types
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Determination and Batch Check → Batch Search
Procedure Definition
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Determination and Batch Check → Batch Search
Procedure Allocation and Check Activation
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Determination and Batch Check → Activate
Automatic Batch Determination in SD
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Determination and Batch Check → Define Selection
Classes
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Determination and Batch Check → Define Sort Rules
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch
Determination and Batch Check → Maintain Batch
Allocation Strategy Number Ranges

Customizing for Active Ingredient Management
Activity Menu Path
SAP - Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management
(C) SAP AG LO955 23-7
Activity Menu Path
Define units of
measurement
General Settings → Check units of measurement
→ Units of measurement
Proportion units for Active
Ingredient Management
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-
Specific Material Units of Measure → Edit Batch-
Specific Material Unit of Measure
Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-
Specific Material Units of Measure → Calculate
Proportional Factors → Define Calculation of
Proportion Quantity from Base Quantity|Define
Calculation of Base Quantity from Proportion
Quantity


Customizing for Product Quantity Management
Activity Menu Path
Define units of measure General Settings → Check units of measurement
→ Units of measurement
Product units for Active
Ingredient Management
Logistics - General → Batch Management
→ Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure
→ Edit Batch-Specific Material Unit of Measure
Logistics - General → Batch Management
→ Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure →
Product Quantities Conversion → Define
Calculation of Product Quantity from Base Quantity|
Define Calculation of Base Quantity from Product
Quantity



LO955 Batch Management ....................................................................................................................................... 0-1 Copyright ............................................................................................................................................................... 0-2 Materials Management ...................................................................................................................................... 0-3 Prerequisites....................................................................................................................................................... 0-4 Target Group...................................................................................................................................................... 0-5 Course Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 1-1 Course Goals...................................................................................................................................................... 1-2 Course Objectives.............................................................................................................................................. 1-3 Course Content (1) ............................................................................................................................................ 1-4 Course Content (2) ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5 Course Overview: Diagram (1)......................................................................................................................... 1-6 Course Overview: Overview Diagram (2)........................................................................................................ 1-7 Main Business Scenario .................................................................................................................................... 1-8 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................ 2-1 Introduction: Unit Objectives............................................................................................................................ 2-2 Introduction: Course Overview Diagram (1).................................................................................................... 2-3 Introduction: Overview Diagram (2) ................................................................................................................ 2-4 Business Background ........................................................................................................................................ 2-5 Integration of Batch Management..................................................................................................................... 2-6 Batch Management in Logistics........................................................................................................................ 2-7 Introduction: Unit Summary ............................................................................................................................. 2-8 Master Data............................................................................................................................................................ 3-1 Master Data: Unit Objectives............................................................................................................................ 3-2 Master Data: Course Overview Diagram.......................................................................................................... 3-3 Master Data: Business Scenario........................................................................................................................ 3-4 Business Definition of ....................................................................................................................................... 3-5 The Term ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-6 Master Data Structure........................................................................................................................................ 3-7 Master Data Structure........................................................................................................................................ 3-8 Material Master Record and Batch Master Record .......................................................................................... 3-9 Assignment of Batch Number......................................................................................................................... 3-10 Batch Creation ................................................................................................................................................. 3-11 Master Data: Unit Summary ........................................................................................................................... 3-12 Exercise Data Sheet......................................................................................................................................... 3-13 Master Data Exercises ..................................................................................................................................... 3-16 Master Data Solutions ..................................................................................................................................... 3-18 Batch Levels .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1 Batch Levels: Unit Objectives .......................................................................................................................... 4-2 Batch Levels: Course Overview Diagram ........................................................................................................ 4-3 Batch Levels: Business Scenario ..................................................................................................................... 4-4 Batch Unique per Material Number and Plant.................................................................................................. 4-5

Batch Unique per Material Number.................................................................................................................. 4-6 Batch Unique per Client and Material Number................................................................................................ 4-7 Customizing....................................................................................................................................................... 4-8 Procedure Following a Change in the Batch Level .......................................................................................... 4-9 Batch Levels: Summary .................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Batch Specification................................................................................................................................................ 5-1 Batch Specification: Unit Objectives................................................................................................................ 5-2 Batch Specification: Course Overview Diagram.............................................................................................. 5-3 Batch Specification: Business Scenario............................................................................................................ 5-4 Integration.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-5 Batch Classification........................................................................................................................................... 5-6 Characteristic Inheritance.................................................................................................................................. 5-7 Batch Classification and Characteristic Inheritance......................................................................................... 5-8 Maintaining Master Data I ................................................................................................................................ 5-9 Maintaining Master Data II ............................................................................................................................. 5-10 Customizing: Tips and Tricks ......................................................................................................................... 5-11 Batch Specification: Unit Summary ............................................................................................................... 5-12 Batch Specification Exercises ......................................................................................................................... 5-13 Batch Specification Solutions ......................................................................................................................... 5-17 Batch Status Management ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1 Batch Status Management: Objectives ............................................................................................................. 6-2 Batch Status Mgmt: Course Overview Diagram .............................................................................................. 6-3 Batch Status Management: Business Scenario ................................................................................................ 6-4 Business Background ........................................................................................................................................ 6-5 Integration.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-6 How Batch Status Management Works ............................................................................................................ 6-7 Example ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-8 Tips & Tricks 1.................................................................................................................................................. 6-9 Tips & Tricks 2................................................................................................................................................ 6-10 Batch Status Management: Summary ............................................................................................................. 6-11 Batch Status Management Exercises .............................................................................................................. 6-12 Batch Status Management Solutions.............................................................................................................. 6-14 Availability Check for Batches ............................................................................................................................. 7-1 Availability Check: Unit Objectives ................................................................................................................. 7-2 Availability Check: Overview Diagram ........................................................................................................... 7-3 Availability Check: Business Scenario ............................................................................................................. 7-4 Batch Definition and Availability Check.......................................................................................................... 7-5 Availability Check and Status Management..................................................................................................... 7-6 Availability Check: Summary........................................................................................................................... 7-7 Batch Determination.............................................................................................................................................. 8-1 Batch Determination: Unit Objectives.............................................................................................................. 8-2 Batch Determination: Course Overview Diagram............................................................................................ 8-3

Batch Determination: Business Scenario.......................................................................................................... 8-4 Batch Determination in the Logistics Process .................................................................................................. 8-5 Principal of Batch Determination...................................................................................................................... 8-6 Batch Determination for Goods Movements .................................................................................................... 8-7 Batch Determination in Production................................................................................................................... 8-8 Batch Determination in Sales............................................................................................................................ 8-9 Batch Determination in Sales.......................................................................................................................... 8-10 Batch Determination in Warehouse Management .......................................................................................... 8-11 Batch Determination in Warehouse Management .......................................................................................... 8-12 Batch Determination: Application Master Data ............................................................................................. 8-13 How Customizing and the Applications Are Linked...................................................................................... 8-14 Settings in Customizing................................................................................................................................... 8-15 Condition Technique in Batch Determination ................................................................................................ 8-16 Batch Determination: Unit Summary ............................................................................................................. 8-17 Batch Determination Exercises ....................................................................................................................... 8-18 Batch Determination Solutions ....................................................................................................................... 8-31 Price Determination............................................................................................................................................... 9-1 Price Determination: Objectives ....................................................................................................................... 9-2 Price Determination: Course Overview Diagram............................................................................................. 9-3 Price Determination: Business Scenario ........................................................................................................... 9-4 Functionality...................................................................................................................................................... 9-5 Condition Technique in Pricing for Batches..................................................................................................... 9-6 Display in Billing Document............................................................................................................................. 9-7 Partial Stocks and Their Combinations............................................................................................................. 9-8 Structure of Valuation for a Single Batch......................................................................................................... 9-9 Price Determination: Summary....................................................................................................................... 9-10 Shelf Life Expiration Date .................................................................................................................................. 10-1 Shelf Life Expiration Date: Unit Objectives................................................................................................... 10-2 Shelf Life Expiration Date: Overview Diagram ............................................................................................. 10-3 Shelf Life Expiration Date: Business Scenario............................................................................................... 10-4 Business Background ...................................................................................................................................... 10-5 Integration........................................................................................................................................................ 10-6 Shelf Life Expiration Date Check in Goods Receipt...................................................................................... 10-7 Central Fields in the Purchase Order .............................................................................................................. 10-8 Calculation of the Shelf Life Expiration Date ................................................................................................ 10-9 SLED Check in Batch Determination........................................................................................................... 10-10 Shelf Life Expiration Date: Summary .......................................................................................................... 10-11 Shelf Life Expiration Date Exercises............................................................................................................ 10-12 Shelf Life Expiration Date Solutions ........................................................................................................... 10-15 Batch Where-used List ........................................................................................................................................ 11-1 Batch Where-used List: Objectives................................................................................................................. 11-2 Batch Where-used List: Overview Diagram.................................................................................................. 11-3

Business Scenario............................................................................................................................................ 11-4 Business Background ...................................................................................................................................... 11-5 Batch Tracking over Several Manufacturing Levels ...................................................................................... 11-6 Batch Where-used List for Trading Goods..................................................................................................... 11-7 Batch Where-used List: Summary .................................................................................................................. 11-8 Batch Specification and Quality Management ................................................................................................... 12-1 Batch Specification: Unit Objectives............................................................................................................. 12-2 Batch Specification: Overview Diagram ....................................................................................................... 12-3 Batch Specification: Business Scenario......................................................................................................... 12-4 Quality Management (QM) Inspections in Logistics ..................................................................................... 12-5 Simplified Batch Maintenance with QM ........................................................................................................ 12-6 Creating a Material Specification.................................................................................................................... 12-7 Setting up QM Insp. Data in the Mat. Master Record.................................................................................... 12-8 Transfer of Inspection Results ........................................................................................................................ 12-9 Example: Quality Inspection upon GR from Production ............................................................................. 12-10 Batch Specification: Summary..................................................................................................................... 12-11 Batch Specification and Quality Management Exercises............................................................................. 12-12 Batch Specification and Quality Management Solutions ............................................................................. 12-16 Appendix: Batch Creation in Process Manufacturing ........................................................................................ 13-1 Appendix: Batch Creation: Unit Objectives ................................................................................................... 13-2 Appendix: Batch Creation Overview Diagram............................................................................................... 13-3 Appendix: Batch Creation Business Scenario ................................................................................................ 13-4 Process Flow.................................................................................................................................................... 13-5 Inspection During Production: Master Data ................................................................................................... 13-6 Inspection During Production: Master Recipe................................................................................................ 13-7 Inspection During Production: Material Master ............................................................................................. 13-8 Inspection During Production: Mat. Specification ......................................................................................... 13-9 Master Recipe and Material Specification.................................................................................................... 13-10 Master Recipe and Material Specification.................................................................................................... 13-11 Checks in the Production Process ................................................................................................................. 13-12 Creation of Partial Lots ................................................................................................................................. 13-13 Relationship Between Partial Lots and Batches ........................................................................................... 13-14 Batch Number Assignment ........................................................................................................................... 13-15 Appendix: Batch Creation: Summary ........................................................................................................... 13-16 Optimized Batch Processing ............................................................................................................................... 14-1 Optimized Batch Processing: Unit Objectives................................................................................................ 14-2 Optimized Batch Processing: Overview Diagram.......................................................................................... 14-3 Optimized Batch Processing: Business Scenario ........................................................................................... 14-4 Mass-Processing of Batches............................................................................................................................ 14-5 Batch Information Cockpit: Introduction........................................................................................................ 14-6 Batch Information Cockpit: Screen Layout .................................................................................................... 14-7 Batch Information Cockpit: Navigation Area................................................................................................. 14-8

Batch Information Cockpit: Selection Area.................................................................................................... 14-9 User Settings.................................................................................................................................................. 14-10 Optimized Batch Processing: Summary ....................................................................................................... 14-11 Optimized Batch Processing: Exercises........................................................................................................ 14-12 Optimized Batch Processing: Solutions........................................................................................................ 14-14 Introduction to Batch-specific Units of Measure................................................................................................ 15-1 Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Objectives................................................................................................. 15-2 Batch-specific Material UoMs: Overview Diagram....................................................................................... 15-3 Batch-specific Material UoMs: Business Scenario ........................................................................................ 15-4 Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Differences ............................................................................................... 15-5 Use of Active Ingredients................................................................................................................................ 15-6 Physical Quantity and Active Ingredient Quantity......................................................................................... 15-7 Calculating the Quantity.................................................................................................................................. 15-8 Prices for Active Ingredients........................................................................................................................... 15-9 Planned and Actual Active Ingredient Proportions ...................................................................................... 15-10 Use of Product Units ..................................................................................................................................... 15-11 Batch-Specific Calculation of the Product Quantity .................................................................................... 15-12 Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Summary ................................................................................................ 15-13 Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure.................................................................................................. 16-1 Integration: Unit Objectives ............................................................................................................................ 16-2 Integration: Overview Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 16-3 Integration: Business Scenario........................................................................................................................ 16-4 Batch Management Requirement as Prerequisite ........................................................................................... 16-5 Batch-specific UoMs as an Attribute of a Batch ............................................................................................ 16-6 Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure.............................................................................................. 16-7 Batch-specific Units of Measure in Logistics................................................................................................. 16-8 Integration: Summary...................................................................................................................................... 16-9 Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management ............................................................................................... 17-1 Data Concept: Unit Objectives........................................................................................................................ 17-2 Data Concept: Overview Diagram .................................................................................................................. 17-3 Data Concept: Business Scenario.................................................................................................................... 17-4 The Central Unit of Measure for Active Ingredients...................................................................................... 17-5 Relationship Between Units of Measure......................................................................................................... 17-6 Maint. of Units of Measurement in Customizing ........................................................................................... 17-7 Percentage and User-defined Calculation....................................................................................................... 17-8 Linking of Master Data I ................................................................................................................................. 17-9 Linking of Master Data II.............................................................................................................................. 17-10 Active Ingredient Content in the Specification............................................................................................. 17-11 Active Ingredient Characteristic: Special Features....................................................................................... 17-12 Classification Maintenance in the Material Master ...................................................................................... 17-13 Maintaining Units of Measurement in Mat. Master ..................................................................................... 17-14 Activating Active Ingredient Mgmt in Customizing.................................................................................... 17-15

Data Concept: Summary ............................................................................................................................... 17-16 Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-1 Exercises ..................................................................... 17-17 Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-2 Exercises ..................................................................... 17-19 Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-3 Exercises ..................................................................... 17-20 Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-1 Solutions...................................................................... 17-22 Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-2 Solutions...................................................................... 17-24 Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-3 Solutions...................................................................... 17-25 Active Ingredient Prices ...................................................................................................................................... 18-1 Active Ingredient Prices: Unit Objectives ...................................................................................................... 18-2 Active Ingredient Prices: Overview Diagram................................................................................................. 18-3 Active Ingredient Prices: Business Scenario .................................................................................................. 18-4 Standard Price per Active Ingredient .............................................................................................................. 18-5 Valuation of Single Batches Based on Act. Ingredients................................................................................. 18-6 Valuation Based on Several Active Ingredients ............................................................................................. 18-7 Sales Price Based on Active Ingredients ........................................................................................................ 18-8 Active Ingredient Prices: Unit Summary........................................................................................................ 18-9 Active Ingredient Prices Exercises ............................................................................................................... 18-10 Active Ingredient Prices Solutions................................................................................................................ 18-13 Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions.................................................................................................... 19-1 Actual and Planned Values: Unit Objectives.................................................................................................. 19-2 Actual and Planned Values: Overview Diagram ............................................................................................ 19-3 Actual and Planned Values: Business Scenario.............................................................................................. 19-4 From Planned Value to Actual Value ............................................................................................................. 19-5 Planned and Actual Values in the Master Data .............................................................................................. 19-6 Inventory Correction Factor ............................................................................................................................ 19-7 Actual and Planned Values: Summary............................................................................................................ 19-8 Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-1 Exercises............................................................................ 19-9 - ...................................................................................................................................................................... 19-11 TC .................................................................................................................................................................. 19-13 Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-1 Solutions .......................................................................... 19-15 Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-2 Solutions .......................................................................... 19-21 Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-3 Solutions .......................................................................... 19-23 Data Concept in Product Quantity Management ................................................................................................ 20-1 Product Quantity Management: Unit Objectives............................................................................................ 20-2 Product Quantity Management: Overview Diagram ...................................................................................... 20-3 Product Quantity Management: Business Scenario........................................................................................ 20-4 The Central Unit of Measure for Product Quantities ..................................................................................... 20-5 Relationship Between Units of Measure......................................................................................................... 20-6 Maint. of Units of Measurement in Customizing ........................................................................................... 20-7 User-defined Calculation................................................................................................................................. 20-8 Linking of Master Data ................................................................................................................................... 20-9 Material Master Maintenance........................................................................................................................ 20-10

............................................................................. 21-5 Quantity Conversion in Inventory Management ................................................................................................................... 20-15 Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Exercises ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-14 Product Quantity Management: Summary.................... 21-9 Summary (1) ..................................................................................................................................... 20-19 Product Units ....... 20-13 Activating Product Quantity Management ........................................................................................................... 22-2 Recommended Follow-up Activities .................................................... 21-1 Product Units of Measure: Unit Objectives................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-3 Product Units of Measure: Business Scenario..............................................................................................Stock Transfer........ 20-11 Classification Maintenance in the Material Master .......................................... 22-3 Appendix................................................................................ 23-1 Frequently-used Menu Paths............................................................. Master ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-6 Stock Transfer – Cases ........................ 23-2 ....................................................................................... 21-4 Quantity Conversion with Product Unit ..... 20-16 Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Solutions............................................................. 21-2 Product Units of Measure: Overview Diagram ............................................ 22-1 Summary (2) .................................................................................. 21-8 Summary.............................................................................................................................................................. 20-12 Maintaining Units of Measurement in Mat................. 21-7 Stock Transfer with Product Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................The Product Quantity in the Specification.....................................................................

6C September 2000 50040836 .LO955 Batch Management LO955 Batch Management © SAP AG 1999 © SAP AG R/3 System Release 4.

Program Neighborhood®. © SAP AG 2003 Trademarks: Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. XML.. SAP. NT®. Tivoli®. MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems. ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation. DB2 Universal Database. S/390®. DHTML. zSeries. Intelligent Miner. MarketSet and Enterprise Buyer are jointly owned trademarks of SAP AG and Commerce One. the Citrix logo. World Wide Web Consortium. Inc. R/2. VideoFrame®. Parallel Sysplex®. WINDOWS®. iSeries. and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.com.Copyright Copyright 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved. z/OS. Citrix®. AS/400®. JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems. AFP. EXCEL®. WinFrame®. PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. MetaFrame®. HTML. OS/400®. used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. . AIX®. mySAP. Microsoft®. xSeries. UNIX®. JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems. pSeries. All rights reserved. Informix and Informix® Dynamic ServerTM are trademarks of IBM Corporation in USA and/or other countries. WebSphere®. OS/390®. MVS/ESA. R/3. SAP Logo. Netfinity®. Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. mySAP. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Inc. OSF/1®. ICA®. and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. OS/2®. Massachusetts Institute of Technology. DB2®. Word®. IBM®. X/Open®.

Materials Management Level 2 3 days LO510 Inventory Management LO515 3 days Invoice Verification LO520 3 days Purchasing Details and Optimization LO525 2 days Consumption-Based Planning and Forecasting LO540 2 days Procurement of External Services 2 days LO925 Cross-Application Business Processes in SD and MM LO640 3 days Foreign Trade 2 days LO715 QM in Procurement © SAP AG 1999 Level 3 5 days LO550 Cross-Functional Customizing in MM 2 days LO521 Pricing in Purchasing LO020 Processes in Procurement 5 days LO955 3 days Batch Management LO235 KANBAN 2 days .

© SAP AG 1999 .MM. PP.Prerequisites Six months' experience in one of the R/3 Logistics applications . Basic knowledge of the classification system. SD. or PP-PI.

Target Group Audience: Members of the project team Project team Administrators Members of user departments that are involved in Batch Management Duration:3 days © SAP AG 1999 Notes to the user The training materials are not teach-yourself programs. . On the sheets. there is space for you to write down additional information. They complement the course instructor's explanations.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Course Overview Contents: Course Goals Course Objectives Course Content Course Overview Diagram Main Business Scenario © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 1-1 .

or PP-PI © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 1-2 . PP.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Course Goals This course will prepare you to: Use the Batch Management functionality Make the necessary Customizing settings for Batch Management in the applications MM.SAP . SD.

Batch Status Management. you will understand the following subjects of Batch Management: Master Data Customizing The following are dealt with in detail: Batch Determination. and the Batch Where-used List Basic data and the uses of Active Ingredient and Product Quantity Management © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 1-3 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Course Objectives At the conclusion of this course.SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Course Content (1) Preface Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Course Overview Introduction Master Data Batch Levels Batch Specification Batch Status Management Availability Check for Batches Unit 8 Unit 9 Unit 10 Unit 11 Unit 12 Batch Determination Price Determination Shelf Life Expiration Date Batch Where-used List Batch Specification and Quality Management © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 1-4 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Course Content (2) Unit 13 Appendix: Batch Creation in Unit 18 Process Manufacturing Unit 19 Unit 14 Optimized Batch Processing Unit 20 Unit 15 Batch-specific Units of Measure Unit 21 Unit 16 Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure Unit 22 Unit 17 Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management Active Ingredient Prices Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Product Quantity Units .Stock Transfers Summary Appendix © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 1-5 .SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Course Overview: Diagram (1) Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Mgmt Batch Batch Where-used List Batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 1-6 .SAP .

Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 1-7 .SAP . Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act. and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Course Overview: Overview Diagram (2) Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. Quantity .

You are a member of the project team who has expertise in sales.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Main Business Scenario Your company is implementing SAP and Batch Management. or IT and are assigned to configure Batch Management in SAP. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 1-8 . production. purchasing.SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Introduction Contents: Business background Integration of Batch Management within the R/3 System Batch Management in Logistics © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 2-1 .

you will be able to: Provide a short overview about the relation of Batch Management to its application in different branches of industry Give information about general integration of this functionality in the R/3 System © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 2-2 .SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Introduction: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Introduction: Course Overview Diagram (1) Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Mgmt Batch Batch Where-used List Batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 2-3 .SAP .

Quantity .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Introduction: Overview Diagram (2) Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act. and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod.SAP .Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 2-4 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Business Background Batch Management can be used in ALL industries It is mainly used in the following: Chemicals Pharmaceuticals Cosmetics Health and hygiene Foodstuffs Retail © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 2-5 .SAP .

Its use does not restrict existing functionality in any way. standing for "Logistics General". where it can be used irrespective of the industry sector or branch of industry. In the R/3 System.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration of Batch Management R/3 integration model SD MM PP FI CO AM LO PM HR QM R/3 WF IS PS © SAP AG 1999 Batch management is a new module in the R/3 System in Release 3. it is therefore structured under the identification code "LO". It is linked to Logistics applications. (C) SAP AG LO955 2-6 .0 and is a cross-application development in Logistics.

You can only search for batches via the batch determination function if the batches are classified. but can also be used without classification. from procurement to sales. It is closely linked with classification.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Management in Logistics Batch management Classification Procurement Production Warehouse management SD Warehouse management A A B B A A A Purchase order © SAP AG 1999 W/house Process/ production order W/house Sales order Batch Management incorporates the entire logistics process.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 2-7 . The new functionality works with all existing batch records.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Introduction: Unit Summary You are now able to: Provide a short overview about the relation of Batch Management to its application in different branches of industry Give information about general integration of this functionality in the R/3 System © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 2-8 .SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Data Contents: Batch Definition in the R/3 System The Term “Batch” in the SAP R/3 System Master Data Structure Material Master Record and Batch Master Record Assignment of Batch Number Batch Creation © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 3-1 .SAP .

SAP . you will be able to: Define the term “batch” Understand the requirements of Batch Management for master data © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 3-2 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Data: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Data: Course Overview Diagram Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Mgmt Batch Batch Where-used List Batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 3-3 .SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Data: Business Scenario Your company has be able to differentiate between certain material stocks for one or more of the following reasons: Traceability in the case of complaints/recall situation Search via expiration date ISO certification © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 3-4 .SAP .

The essence of a manufacturing batch is therefore its homogeneity.SAP ." Food and Drug Administration in 'Good Manufacturing Practice' (GMP) © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 3-5 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Business Definition of "Batch" "A batch is a quantity of any drug produced during a given cycle of manufacture.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management The Term “Batch” in the SAP System Production lot Process order/ production order Charges Batches © SAP AG 1999 A production lot can be manufactured in several production runs. The same technical requirements apply to the entire production lot. you would use the term “production lot” if a material is manufactured in several charges in a reactor according to the same process order. Example: In the chemical industry. The result of each production run is a batch. (C) SAP AG LO955 3-6 . The result of each charge is a batch.

and not of the batch itself. 1 309-140 Batch 2 © SAP AG 1999 Mat. Batch A2 308-188 Batch A3 Quality: 1 / 10 l can Batch A2 Mat-no. (C) SAP AG LO955 3-7 . 309-140 Batch Mat. no. The following structure is recommended: All criteria making a batch reproducible are criteria of the batch material. The advantage of organizing master data in this way is that it enables you to plan the different models of a product individually. In the SAP R/3 System. no. 307-160 Batch A1 Mat-no. 308-188 Mat-no. This specification identifies the batch as a non-reproducible unit. materials are planned at material level and not at batch level. 308-188 Mat-no.SAP . no. 307-160 Batch A3 Mat. 307-160 Quality: 1 / 50 l bar Batch A1 Quality: 2 / 50 l bar Mat-no. The batch record should contain only data that is unique to precisely this batch.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Data Structure Materials planning Product: epoxy resin Mat-no. 309-140 Batch 3 The definition of the term batch also influences the definition of the term material.

.99 Batch 2 Production date: 11. or similar.01. is packed in different containers..08. the batches and their specification data are located below the material number.SAP ...the materials The product. (C) SAP AG LO955 3-8 . It is included in the slide for illustrative purposes only.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Data Structure Product: epoxy resin Material 308-188 Material 309-140 Material 307-160 Batch 1 Production date: 11. .the batch Organizationally. which remains the same.99 Batch 3 Production date: 11. It is distinguished by means of material numbers...the product A generic term that does not exist as a master record in the SAP R/3 System.11. ..99 © SAP AG 1999 The master data hierarchy shows. . has different quality classes..

the current period. you can specify the batch number upon the first goods movement for a batch. (C) SAP AG LO955 3-9 . C1 55/3b This number can be assigned either externally or internally. The indicator for batch requirement is contained in the following views of the material master record: Sales and distribution. © SAP AG 1999 In the SAP R/3 System. The same applies when you cancel the batch requirement. stipulating in it that the material is to be handled in batches. batch master records always depend on material master records. General plant data. Even if the indicator appears in several views. In this case you also have to reorganize the batch master records.SAP . Work scheduling. Batch mgmt reqmt Material 308-188 AXZ 4362-89 Create the batch master record manually or when posting a goods movement. Batch numbers can be assigned internally or externally. Purchasing. you have to post out all the stocks from the previous fiscal year. Storage 1. The system then creates the batch master record in the background. You can then set the indicator for batch requirement and post the stock back into the system in batches.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Material Master Record and Batch Master Record Set the batch management requirement indicator in the material master record. You must first create a material master record. If a material changes from a material that is not subject to batch requirement to one that is subject to batch requirement. it is displayed as being set in all the other views. If it is set in one of the views. and the previous period. it is the same indicator. Alternatively. The batch can have any alphanumeric number. You can then reset the indicator for batch requirement to blank and post the stock back into the system. This means that you have to enter a batch number every time there is a goods movement. You can create a batch master record directly when maintaining master data. and Warehouse management. You can define alternative number ranges. We post batches FOR a material.

You can create dependencies for particular variables (for example. You can use this exit to change the number the system determines.SAP . This function module is delivered empty and can be filled by customers with their own programs without having to modify the source code. EXIT_SAPLV01Z_001.You can create dependencies for particular variables (for example. for a plant or material). These numbers can be alphanumeric. The batch numbers can be numerical only. users assign batch numbers according to a particular template. for a plant or material). Edit the assigned batch number using variables and templates. You can use this exit to replace the proposed number range object BATCH_CLT and/or external interval 02 with a number range object and/or external interval of your own. EXIT_SAPLV01Z_002. or you can use it to determine a number of your own. You can use this exit to define your own number range object and/or interval. © SAP AG 1999 Customer function calls make it easier to customize the SAP R/3 System. Once you have run the following function modules for batch number assignment.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Assignment of Batch Number Standard: Internal External Customer Function Calls 1 Change the number 1 2 2 range. for example. the system will assign batch numbers automatically without any further action on your part. this exit ensures that the structure for batch number assignment is maintained. You can use the following function modules to control the manual entry of batch numbers: EXIT_SAPLV01Z_003. EXIT_SAPLV01Z_004. There are user exits for internal and external batch number assignment. containing variables or templates. (C) SAP AG LO955 3-10 . You can use this exit to define your own checking rules without being restricted to a number range. If .

SAP . The following variations are possible: Automatic/manual without check (= delivery status as before) Automatic/manual with check against external number range Automatic/manual with check in customer exit Automatic/no manual creation Manual without check Manual with check against external number range Manual with check in customer exit No new creation Define creation for production/process order You can make the following settings: Automatic creation of batch upon order creation or release Automatic classification upon batch creation Valuation of free characteristics of a batch to be specified (C) SAP AG LO955 3-11 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Creation Goods movement 101 521 Create batch master manually Raw matls Finished products Automatic/ No manual creation Automatic or manual with check against external number range Manual without check No new creation Production or process order New order Release order Automatic batch numbers? © SAP AG 1999 Define creation upon goods movements or in batch master You can define for each movement type whether a new batch is created upon a goods receipt and how it is created.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Data: Unit Summary You are now able to: Define the term “batch” Understand the requirements of Batch Management for master data © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 3-12 .

1 L concentrate/liter Water Batch Batch class for paint AI content % Liter substance/ liter AI Viscosity pH level LO955 3-13 Blue paint Class type Classes 023 231 AICL00010## AICL00010## Characteristics M001 M009 (C) SAP AG .SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Exercise Data Sheet Key to Icons in Exercises and Solutions Exercises Solutions Objectives Business Scenario Tips & Tricks Warning or Caution Data Used in Exercises Type of Data Materials Data in Training System Y-500 // Y-500_## T-HT2## T-HT1## AI-1201-0## AI-1202-0## AI-1200-0## AI-1000-0## H2O Cetapharm-N (tablet) Aspirin Orange mixture type 334 Orange juice concentrate Orange concentrate type 334 Fruit nectar 0.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management M010 M011 Purity of color Covering power (C) SAP AG LO955 3-14 .SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Type of Data Characteristics Data in Training System M012 M013 AIC010## AIC020## Label Available for: Active ingredient Active ingredient KG active ingredient 1 KG active ingredient 2 Liter active ingredient 1 Liter of active ingredient 1 Batch determination in Inventory Management: Mvt type/plant/mat. Sales org.SAP . Distribution channel Customer 007 1000 1020 22 7777 (C) SAP AG LO955 3-15 .B Berlin Wald & Maier Lux. internal number assignment Cetapharm-N (tablet) Berlin Delivering warehouse C. Germany Industrial buyer Flatter & Asche AG Düsseldorf Proportion unit KW1 KW2 LW1 Ratios Strategy type LSL % ZMM1 ZSD1 ZPI1 Order type Recipe group for matl T-HT2## Plant Storage location Vendor PI01 T-TAB## 1100 0001 1000 100 Purchasing group Purchasing org. Batch determination in Sales and Distribution: Customer/material Batch determination for production orders Order type/plant/component Process order.E. IDES Germany Berlin. L.

When the R/3 System is being implemented. Use the following values: Material: Y-500-## Replace ## with your group number. Levels Copy From: Plant 1100 1100 Storage location 0001 0001 Sales organization 1020 1020 Distribution channel 22 22 Edit all views! (C) SAP AG LO955 3-16 . There is a template for all the master data you create in the exercises below. for example 01. but put your own group number at the end of each master record you create. Industry: Pharmaceuticals Material type: Semi-finished product Org. you create these materials in the system. You can use this. and use your own data. you will be able to: • Create a batch-managed material Some materials in your company are handled in batches.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Data Exercises Unit: Master Data Topic: Creating a Batch-Managed Material At the conclusion of this exercise.SAP . You can copy it if you wish. using similar batch-managed materials as a template. Copy all of material master record Y-500. 1-1 Create a new material master record Create a new material master record.

SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 3-17 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Save your material.

Values Y-500-## Pharmaceuticals Semi-finished product Y-500 Values All Values (new material and template) 1100 0001 1020 22 (C) SAP AG LO955 3-18 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Data Solutions Unit: Master Data Topic: Creating a Batch-Managed Material 1-1 Create a new material master record Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Create – General → Immediately or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Create .General → Immediately Field name or data type Material Industry sector Material type Template Views Views Organizational levels Plant Storage location Sales organization Distribution channel Edit all views before you save! Save your material.SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Levels Contents: Batch Unique per Material Number and Plant Batch Unique per Material Number Batch Unique per Client and Material Number Customizing Procedure Following a Change in the Batch Level © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 4-1 .SAP .

SAP . you will be able to: List the levels at which batch numbers can be valid.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Levels: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. Explain the implications of setting the area of validity of batches at each of the three levels Describe the requirements that must be satisfied in the event of a change in the batch level © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 4-2 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Levels: Course Overview Diagram Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Mgmt Batch Batch Where-used List Batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 4-3 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Levels: Business Scenario Your company has to decide which batch level best suits its requirements considering the following aspects: Is the same material to be subject to a batchmanagement requirement in one plant but not in another? How are batch numbers currently structured? Is the SAP project international.SAP . so that it is essential to be able to trace batch numbers exactly? © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 4-4 .

However.2000 VISCOSITY: 8 Batch A1 EXP.: 18.01. The system does not support this. you are recommended to switch to a higher batch level.: 17.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Unique per Material Number and Plant Material no. even though the batches do not necessarily have the same specification. the batch quantity transferred assumes the specification of the destination batch. (C) SAP AG LO955 4-5 .: 19.01.2001 VISCOSITY: 6 © SAP AG 1999 If the batch level is set to Plant/Material in your system.01.2000 VISCOSITY: 7 Batch A1 EXP. In this case. 309-140 309- Plant 1 Plant 2 Plant 1 Plant 2 Batch A1 EXP.01. you can transfer a stock from one plant to another between batches with the same number.: 11.SAP . you can only achieve this through organizational measures. If you want the batch specification to be unique across all plants.2000 VISCOSITY: 5 Batch A1 EXP. In such cases. 308-188 308- Material no. the following applies: The batch number can be reassigned for a material with a different specification in each plant.

The same batch number can be reassigned with a different specification for each material.01. (C) SAP AG LO955 4-6 .: 11. the following applies: A batch has the same specification for all plants at which a material is stored.2000 VISCOSITY: 7 Batch A1 EXP.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Unique per Material Number Material no.2000 VISCOSITY: 5 © SAP AG 1999 If the batch level is set to Material in your system. 308-188 308- Material no.: 17. 309-140 309- Plant 1 Plant 2 Plant 1 Plant 2 Batch A1 EXP.01.

308-188 308- Material no.2003 VISCOSITY: 7 A1 Batch A2 EXP.05.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Unique per Client and Material Number Material no. (C) SAP AG LO955 4-7 .2002 VISCOSITY: 5 © SAP AG 1999 If the batch level is set to Client in the system: The same batch number can only be assigned once within the entire client. It is uniquely assigned to one material number. 309-140 309- Batch A1 EXP.: 17.SAP .01.: 11.

Batch status management is also affected by this change and has to be subsequently maintained. You cannot go back to material/plant level. In the standard SAP R/3 System. the default setting is the plant level. You can switch to a higher level at any time.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Customizing S TAR T Batch level Batch unique at plant level Batch level Batch unique at material level ONE-WAY Batch level Batch unique at client level © SAP AG 1999 You can select the area of validity of batches in Customizing. You have three batch levels to choose from. (C) SAP AG LO955 4-8 . This is due to the organization of the batch data which has to be converted whenever you switch batch level. Switching back to a lower (more specific) level is so far allowed only from client level to material level.

This analysis must precede actual batch reorganization. you will have to prepare a reorganization. Only after a successful data update can batch management be used at the new level. the same batch number could be assigned for a material number in each plant.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Procedure Following a Change in the Batch Level Batch A1 B2 B3 C4 Plant 01 A1 B3 Material C4 B2 C3 B1 Batch B1 B2 C4 C3 Plant 02 Material 308-188 308-188 Plant level Reorganization program Plant level Batch A1 B1 B2 B3 C3 C4 Material level Material Material level 308-188 © SAP AG 1999 If a batch number has hitherto been unique in a plant but is now only to be unique for a material. The batch number is unique for each material at the new batch level. It determines all batches that occur in several plants. we assume that they have completely different specifications.SAP . Now you have to check whether identical batch numbers exist for the material in both plants. In the example. this change will have to be accompanied by a change in the batch numbers. If this is the case. A further distinction according to plant is no longer made. Hitherto. It also allows you to carry out a test run and provides you with a log. An auxiliary program is automatically offered in Customizing as soon as a change in the batch level has taken place. The batches did not have to be identical since they were entirely independent of each other. (C) SAP AG LO955 4-9 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Levels: Summary You are now able to: List the levels at which batch numbers can be valid. Explain the implications of setting the area of validity of batches at each of the three levels Describe the requirements that must be satisfied in the event of a change in the batch level © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 4-10 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification Contents: Integration Batch Classification Characteristic Inheritance Batch Classification and Characteristic Inheritance Maintenance of Master Data Customizing: Tips and Tricks © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 5-1 .SAP .

you will be able to: Prepare classification data so that Batch Management can function properly © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 5-2 .SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification: Course Overview Diagram Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Mgmt Batch Batch Where-used List Batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 5-3 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification: Business Scenario Your company chooses to classify its batches for the following reasons: Batch determination Certificates of analysis Reporting Each of the reasons mentioned requires classified batches. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 5-4 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration Batch management Batch Class Specification Characteristics Classification system © SAP AG 1999 You can use the classification system in conjunction with batch management. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-5 . production issues. you must prepare the classification data to include the corresponding batch specifications. whether in connection with quality issues. The attributes (that is. The classification system and batch management are closely linked. or complaints. For batch management to function correctly. The specification for a batch master record is based on a batch's classification.SAP . the specifications) are stored as characteristic values. The characteristics for materials managed in batches provide information for any kind of evaluations on particular attributes of batches. You have to classify batches in order to use the batch determination function.

The material and its batches must be classified via the same class. They are required for batch determination. C © SAP AG 1999 All classes used for batch classification are assigned to class type 022/023. Characteristics can pass on their values by inheritance. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-6 . B.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Classification Class type "batches” Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Material Batch Characteristics: A. This ensures that the same characteristics are used for the material and the batch.SAP .

A discreet value must be within the predefined interval. the characteristic value of the batch can be no higher than the inherited value range. Classification allows lists of numerical or alphanumerical values. batch X1 inherits the requirements for its characteristic value from material X. A more limited interval will also be accepted if it is a partial quantity of the interval of material X.SAP . In the example shown. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-7 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Characteristic Inheritance Material Epoxy resin X Batch Epoxy resin X1 12000 11000 10000 9000 8000 7000 CHARACTERISTIC 6000 5000 10000 9000 8000 7000 Viscosity © SAP AG 1999 If a batch inherits characteristics. The characteristic value of batch X1 cannot have a value interval greater than that of material X. not just numeric value intervals.

00-0. Characteristic inheritance acts like a check mechanism. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-8 .50 Since the characteristics are the same for the material and its batches. they can be regarded as the sole values allowed for all objects assigned to this class.SAP . It allows or disallows “additional values” that are not within the limits of the sets of values. This requires an indicator to be either set or not set in the characteristic master record.30 Viscosity Color Epoxy resin Volatile proportions © SAP AG 1999 5000-12000 0-5 23-25 0. the characteristic values can be passed on from the material to its batches by inheritance.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Classification and Characteristic Inheritance Class type “batches” Class 3 Epoxy resin Characteristics Viscosity at 25° Color Epoxy resin Volatile fraction Material Epoxy resin X Batch Epoxy resin X1 Viscosity Color Epoxy resin Volatile fraction 7250 1-3 23-25 0. If ranges of values or fixed values are defined for a characteristic of a class.

(C) SAP AG LO955 5-9 . Characteristics Class X Viscosity at 25° Color Epoxy resin Volatile fraction Assign the characteristics to the class. The class type is otherwise 023. You are not therefore preparing multiple classification.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Maintaining Master Data I Viscosity 5000-12000 Color 0-5 Epoxy resin 23-25 Volatile proportions 0. First. In the final step. The class type applicable depends on the batch level chosen. © SAP AG 1999 Since the specifications of a material and its batches are stored as classification data. You can create a selection of different classes for this purpose. The value intervals can be further restricted in the process. class type 022 is defined in the standard SAP R/3 System. The assignment you make must be to class type 022 or 023 since they have been provided in the standard SAP R/3 System specially for batches.00-0. you must prepare the classification system accordingly. Now.50 Classification system Create the characteristics. Class X Class type “batch” Create the class. you define the attributes that the material and its batches are to have. the characteristics are assigned to batches. The system specifies the correct class type automatically. you create the classes that you want to use for the material and its batches. You create them in the classification system as characteristics. If you have specified plant level as the area of validity in Customizing.SAP . Choose the class type for batches. You can subsequently assign only one class to the material and to the batch.

The sets of values specified for the characteristics are proposed as default values. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-10 . If you create a batch for the material. You assign the batch class in the “Classification” view of the material master record. The system checks whether the characteristic values entered are within the limits allowed if the characteristics have been defined accordingly.30 Choose allowed characteristic values for your batch. the material's classification data is copied automatically.50 Classify your material using the batch class.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Maintaining Master Data II Materials Management Class type 'batch' Class X Material Epoxy resin Y Viscosity 5000-8000 Color 0-5 Epoxy resin 23-25 Volatile proportions 0. Post a batch for this material. Batch Epoxy resin Y1 Viscosity Color Epoxy resin Volatile fraction © SAP AG 1999 7250 1-3 23-25 0. You create both the material master record and the batch master record in Materials Management.00-0.SAP . The “Additional values allowed” indicator must not be set in this case. You can restrict all sets of values specified for batch characteristics. To use the entire functionality offered by batch management. you must first classify the material.

'free' standard characteristics are offered in the system. If the content of the data field changes. you can use Customer Function Calls to automatically adopt the master data from a source batch when you create a batch. In addition.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Customizing: Tips and Tricks Standard characteristics LOBM_LVORM Deletion flag LOBM_ZUSTD LOBM_VFDAT LOBM_VERAB Status Expiration date Availability date MCHA Data field Reference characteristic © SAP AG 1999 The standard R/3 System already contains certain characteristics. that is. it is not only referenced. Though a 'free characteristic' is defined independently of existing data fields. it is also supplied with the standard R/3 System. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-11 . You can also copy and change the characteristic valuations of free characteristics in this way. As of 4. A reference characteristic is linked to a data field via table MCHA/MCH1.SAP .0. They are characteristics that have a key position for batch selection. The content of this data field is stored directly in the classification system as a characteristic value. This improves selection run performance. The standard characteristics listed are reference characteristics. You should always use the characteristic 'deletion flag'. The information is updated redundantly. You should therefore include them both in the respective batch classes and in the selection classes in batch determination if the respective business application is used. They are shown here as “standard characteristics”. One example is the characteristic 'remaining shelf life'. the change is also made in the characteristic value.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification: Unit Summary You are now able to: Prepare classification data so that Batch Management can function properly © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 5-12 .

SAP . There is a template for all the master data that you will create in the exercises below. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-13 . To do this. you will be able to: • Create characteristics and a class for a material that is handled in batches • Classify material • Post a goods receipt for a material that is handled in batches and simultaneously valuate the batch characteristics For materials handled in batches. You also want to assign characteristic values at goods receipt. you have to define and assign classes and characteristics in the classification system.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification Exercises Unit: Batch Specification Topic: Specifying Batches At the conclusion of this exercise. and use your own data only. you want to store classes in which the typical characteristics are defined. You can copy it if you wish. However. you must put your own group number at the end of each master record you create.

SAP . The key for the relevant template in the system is listed on the right. You should be able to choose two or more values at the same time. You can use class 231 as a template. Save the class. for example. Which indicator must be set to do this? 1-1-2 Create a class and assign characteristics Create a class C##. in which you use your own characteristics. Choose both the Classification view and the Sales and Distribution view: SalesOrgData 1 Organizational levels: Plant 1100 Sales organization 1020 Distribution channel 22 • • • (C) SAP AG LO955 5-14 . Note that the characteristics of the class are also copied. allow values that are not included in its list of values. Ensure that you have used the class type that is allowed for batches. Asia.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-1 Create characteristics and a class for a material that is handled in batches 1-1-1 Create characteristics Create the following characteristics for your material in the classification system. 01. Which indicator controls this? For the characteristic M3-## (purity of color). Where do you set the default value? Specify for the characteristic M6-## (available for) that your batch is available in Europe. that is. 1-2 Classify a batch managed material and store a sales price 1-2-1 Change the material you created Y-500-##. Enter the values yes and no as possible characteristic values for M5-## and select yes as a default value. Where can you set this in the characteristic? Assign the value interval of your choice to the characteristic M4-### (covering power) Define M5-## (label) as a required entry. and North America. M1-## M2-## M3-## M4-## M5-## M6-## Viscosity pH level Purity of color Covering power Label Available for Template: M001 Template: M009 Template: M010 Template: M011 Template: M012 Template: M013 M1-## (viscosity). Replace ## with your group number. • • • Assign any value interval to the characteristic Do not allow any interval values for the characteristic M2-## (pH level). values that you have not explicitly allowed. Australia. 01). Copy this transaction (Change material) to your favorites. Replace ## with your group number (for example. You have to change them afterwards.

extend a value that is not listed as a possible entry. Use plant 1100 as the delivering plant. For the characteristic M2-## (pH level). Data 1 view. For the characteristic M5-## (label). Now enter batch class C##. Save your material.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management If necessary. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-15 . Delete the assignment of the batch class you copied before. For the characteristic M6-## (available for). Call up valuation for the characteristics. choose Extras → Change class type to do this. 1-2-2 Maintain the sales price. For the characteristic M3-## (purity of color).50 per kilo. Go to the Sales Org. Enter a price of $3. allow both possible answers. you want to have the complete value interval available later in the batch classification. limit the interval. For the characteristic M4-## (covering power). Go to the SD: Sales Org.SAP . Data 1 view. In this view. Specify the target values as follows: • • • • • • For the characteristic M1-## (viscosity). enter a discrete value from the interval. choose the Conditions pushbutton. choose at least two values.

The way the system is currently configured. • (C) SAP AG LO955 5-16 .SAP . To do this. • • • Enter the batch number of your choice. Movement type: 501 Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0001 On the New items screen. Copy the transaction (‘other’ goods receipt) to your favorites. return to the entry screen via the icon with the green arrow. Now choose Goods movement → Goods receipt → Others. enter material Y-500-## and the quantity you want to post to stock. Note: To enter more goods receipt items. choose Logistics → Materials management → Inventory Management.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-3 Classify batches – goods receipt Valuate the batch characteristics during the goods receipt. Enter discrete values for the characteristics. it displays the classification view when you choose the Goods receipt without reference to purchase order function. Repeat this transaction for some batches. Remember that you want to search in Batch Determination after making this specification.

The Interval values allowed field is not set in the basic data for the characteristic. • • • • • (C) SAP AG LO955 5-17 . if you can specify several values in the batch’s characteristic value assignment. select the Additional values field.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification Solutions Unit: Batch Specification Topic: Specifying Batches 1-1 Create characteristics and a class for a material that is handled in batches 1-1-1 Create characteristics Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics or Logistics → Central Functions → Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics Choose the icon for creating characteristics with a template or choose Characteristic → Copy from… Create new characteristics. Note: You can allow interval values only if the characteristic has several values. In the value range for the characteristic. Special requirements: • • Do not allow any interval values for the characteristic M2-## (pH level). choose Yes in the column for the proposed value. that is. Define M5-## (label) as a required entry. set the Entry required field. For the characteristic M3-## (purity of color). In the value range for the characteristic. In the basic data for the characteristic. Enter the values yes and no as possible characteristic values for M5-## and select yes as a default value. using as a template the characteristics specified. allow values that are not included in the list of values for this characteristic.

You should be able to choose two or more values at the same time. in which you set your own characteristics. In the basic data for the characteristic.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management • Specify for the characteristic M6-## (available for) that your batch is available in Europe. You have to change them afterwards. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-18 . Field name or data type Class Class type Icon for Create with reference Field name or data type Reference class Values 231 Values C## 023 (Batches) Note that the characteristics of the class are also copied. Asia.SAP . Save the class. and North America. Australia. • 1-1-2 Create class and assign characteristics Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Classification System → Master Data → Classes or Logistics → Central Functions → Classification System → Master Data → Classes Create a class C##. define that the characteristic can have several values.

limit the interval. Enter the class C## as the assignment. enter a discrete value from the interval. Field name or data type View Values Sales and distribution: SalesOrgData 1 LO955 5-19 (C) SAP AG . Field name or data type Material View Values Y-500-## • • Classification view Sales and distribution: SalesOrgData 1 Organizational levels Plant Sales organization Distribution channel Class type 1100 1020 22 023 (Batches) If necessary.SAP . 1-2-2 Maintain the sales price and use the supplying plant 1100. For the characteristic M5-## (label). For the characteristic M6-## (available for).Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 Classify a batch managed material and store a sales price Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Copy this transaction (Change material) to your favorites. choose Extras → Change class type to do this. Delete the assignment of the batch class you copied before. extend a value that is not listed as a possible entry. For the characteristic M2-## (pH level). you want to have the complete value interval available later in the batch classification. 1-2-1 Change the classification view and the Sales and Distribution view in your material master record Y-500-##. Specify the target values as follows: • • • • • • For the characteristic M1-## (viscosity). For the characteristic M3-## (purity of color). For the characteristic M4-## (covering power). allow both possible answers. choose at least two values.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management [Conditions:] Amount Field name or data type View Supplying plant Save your material. (C) SAP AG LO955 5-20 . Valuate the batch characteristics during the goods receipt. Initial screen Field name Movement type Plant Storage location Values 501 1100 0001 At item level: Field name Material Quantity Batch number Characteristic value assignment Values Y-500-## Any Any.50 UNI Values Sales and distribution: SalesOrgData 1 1100 Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management. internal or external Any or within the allowed values Repeat this transaction for some batches: Enter other items for your material Y-500## in the document and assign more batch numbers and characteristic values before you save the document. Choose Goods movement → Goods receipt → Others. 1-3 Classify batches – goods receipt 3.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Status Management Contents: Business Background Integration Functionality Example Tips & Tricks © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 6-1 .SAP .

SAP . you will be able to: Decide whether you want to monitor and control batch statuses using Batch Status Management Identify batch statuses Change batch statuses © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 6-2 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Status Management: Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Status Mgmt: Course Overview Diagram Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Mgmt Batch Batch Where-used List Batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 6-3 .SAP .

SAP . it is necessary that incoming batch stocks are initially assigned the status Restricted until such time as they are released from quality inspection. In your enterprise. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 6-4 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Status Management: Business Scenario Your company has specified the batch level as the material or client level. The users want to make transfer postings changing the status of batch stocks in simple and straightforward manner.

(C) SAP AG LO955 6-5 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Business Background Stores 1 Batch A1 Stores 2 Batch A1 Stores 3 Batch A1 Stores 4 Batch A1 Stores 5 Batch A1 100 kg Restricted 0 kg Restricted 2 kg Restricted 226 kg Restricted 54 kg Restricted Material 308-188 308Batch A1 Status = Restricted Batch status management © SAP AG 1999 The batch status is a central tool for identifying use of the batch as Restricted or Unrestricted. This results in an automatic transfer posting with regard to the individual stocks.SAP . It is valid at the batch level set in Customizing. You change the batch status in the batch master record.

two stock types directly depend on the batch status: A batch can only be included in 'unrestricted-use stock' if it has the status 'unrestricted'. You can make a direct transfer posting between stocks only by changing the indicator in the batch master record.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration Goods movement Returns Open PO qty Consignment. Stock transfer (SLoc) Blocked stock Independent of batch status Quality inspection Unrestricted-use stock Batch status “unrestricted” Change in batch master record Batch status “restricted” © SAP AG 1999 Restricteduse stock In Inventory Management.SAP . order rel. A batch can only be included in 'restricted-use stock' if it has the status 'restricted'. ordered Reserved GR blocked stock Production order Stock transfer (plant) Stock trans. These stocks are changed when the usual goods movements are made in Inventory Management. All other stocks do not indicate the status of the batch. (C) SAP AG LO955 6-6 . Postings are made irrespective of the status indicator in the batch master record.

If a quantity of batch material is withdrawn from them.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management How Batch Status Management Works en t Returns Stock transfer (plant) Stock transfer (SLoc) On-order stock Consgt. (C) SAP AG LO955 6-7 . it depends on the batch status whether it can be posted to unrestricted or restricted stock. A change document is created in respect of the master record change and a material document is created for the transfer posting.SAP . order s od Go m em ov Blocked stock Go od s Quality inspection Change in batch status in batch master record t en Unrestricted stock Internal transfer posting from Unrestricted to Restricted Restricted stock Material document + change document © SAP AG 1999 A batch stock cannot be transferred directly from unrestricted-use stock to restricted stock. Direct transfers are possible between all other stocks. ord. the system makes an internal transfer posting for the batch stock. m ov em Reserved GR blocked stock Production order Stock transp. If you change the status indicator when maintaining a batch master record.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Example Material 308-188 Batch A1 Status: UNRESTR. Unrestricted-use Unrestrictedstock Restricted-use Restrictedstock Quality inspection 100 kg 0 kg Stock transfer to quality control 20 kg Movement type 322 0 kg 80 kg Status change Status: RESTRICTED 0 kg 80 kg 20kg 20kg Stock transfer to unrestricted stock 20 kg Mvt type 321 0 kg 100 kg 0 kg © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 6-8 .SAP . UNRESTR.

Batch class X Batch Material Ensure that selection class “ Y ” is used in the strategy record of the respective application. You should therefore assign it.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Tips & Tricks 1 Batch class X LOBM_ZUSTD Selection class Y Assign reference characteristic LOBM_ZUSTD to your batch class “X” in the classification system.. .. to the respective batch class as a characteristic. Ensure that your batches are classified with batch class “ X ”. the system picks out only unrestricted-use batches for a delivery. you should also use the batch status as a selection criterion for batch determination. This functionality is effective only in conjunction with batch determination. The reference characteristic LOBM_ZUSTD stores the batch status in the classification system.. the standard SAP R/3 System comes with reference characteristics.. . This prevents long run times.. (C) SAP AG LO955 6-9 . Selection class Y Strategy record © SAP AG 1999 If you use batch status management.. this combination ensures that only batches with the required status are selected. As already mentioned in the chapter on batch specification.SAP . to the respective strategy record as a selection criterion. Also assign the same reference characteristic to your selection class “ Y ”. not when you select a batch manually. In batch determination. For example.

The reference characteristic is automatically assigned the value of a field. For example. you can define as characteristics all attributes that you consider important and useful for subsequent batch selection. Like reference characteristics. a useful addition to the standard characteristic “status” would be the characteristic “blocking reasons” or also “possible use”. Restr. you assign user-defined characteristics to the batch class and to the strategy record.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Tips & Tricks 2 Reference characteristic “status” Unrestr. User-defined characteristic blocking reasons Damaged Spoiled Incorrect certificates © SAP AG 1999 Inspection required In addition to the standard characteristics.SAP . You can store additional information in user-defined characteristics as required. You create user-defined characteristics in the classification system. (C) SAP AG LO955 6-10 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Status Management: Summary You are now able to: Decide whether you want to monitor and control batch statuses using Batch Status Management Identify batch statuses Change batch statuses © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 6-11 .

Save your batch. 1-1-3 Optional: Search for the material document that was created as a result of the change to the batch and make a note of the number: Material document: _________________________________________ (C) SAP AG LO955 6-12 . Copy this transaction (Change batch) to your favorites. 1-1 Change the batch master record and set the status to “restricted” 1-1-1 Check the stocks of Y-500-##. The stock overview displays these changes. you will be able to: • Change an unrestricted batch to a restricted batch • Change the Stock Overview display version to reflect restricted batches You want to see the effect of the change in batch status.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Status Management Exercises Additional Exercise: Unit: Batch Status Management Topic: Assigning a Batch the Status “Restricted” At the conclusion of this exercise. Copy the transaction (stock overview) to your favorites. 1-1-2 Change the status of one of your batches to “restricted”. You can save the batch status as a characteristic and use it in Batch Determination.SAP . Use the values below: Material: Y-500-## Batch: (enter the batch number of your choice) Set the status "restricted".

Check the batch that you posted to ‘restricted’ stock. double-click the line containing the batch concerned and then scroll down the list. 1-2-2 Display the stock overview for material Y-500-## again. Remove the No lines with zero stock indicator.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 6-13 . Make sure that Display version 14 is set on the initial screen. For information about units of measure in the ‘restricted’ status. The No lines with zero stock indicator can be copied as selected.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 Display several versions of the stock overview to track ‘restricted batches’: 1-2-1 Display the stock overview for material Y-500-##. Batches with stocks marked as ‘restricted’ are easily visible.

Field name or data type Material Values Y-500-## 1-1-2 Change the status of one of your batches to “restricted”. Copy this transaction to your favorites.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Status Management Solutions Unit: Batch Status Management Topic: Assigning a Batch the Status “Restricted” 1-1 Change the batch master record and set the status to “restricted” 1-1-1 Check the stocks of Y-500-##. Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch → Change or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Batch → Change 1-1-3 Optional: Search for the material document that was created as a result of the change to the batch and make a note of the number: Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → List Displays → Material Documents (C) SAP AG LO955 6-14 . Logistics → Materials management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock overview or Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Stock → Stock overview Copy this transaction to your favorites.

(C) SAP AG LO955 6-15 . 1-2-2 Display the stock overview for material Y-500-## again. Menu path description under 1-1-1. Check the batch that you posted to ‘restricted’ stock. Field name or data type Material Display version Values Y-500-## 14 Make sure that Display version 14 is set on the initial screen. Batches with stocks marked as ‘restricted’ are easily visible. Menu path description under 1-1-1. double-click the line containing the batch concerned and then scroll down the list.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 Display several versions of the stock overview to track ‘restricted batches’: 1-2-1 Display the stock overview for material Y-500-##. Call up the transaction from your favorites. The No lines with zero stock indicator can be copied as selected. Call up the transaction from your favorites. Field name or data type Material Display version Values Y-500-## 1 Remove the No lines with zero stock indicator. For information about units of measure with the status ‘restricted’.SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Availability Check for Batches Contents: Effects of the Batch Definition on the Availability Check Availability Check and Status Management © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 7-1 .SAP .

you will be able to: Outline the special aspects of the availability check in the case of a material subject to a batchmanagement requirement © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 7-2 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Availability Check: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Availability Check: Overview Diagram Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Management © SAP AG 1999 Batch Where-used List Batch Batch (C) SAP AG LO955 7-3 .SAP .

However. in the case of stock withdrawals for production.SAP . the same batch is to be regarded as "available". © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 7-4 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Availability Check: Business Scenario Your company wishes to treat batches with the status "restricted" as "unavailable" for the purposes of materials planning.

SAP . By definition. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 7-5 . It should run here without taking the replenishment lead time into account.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Definition and Availability Check The availability check is one of the checks carried out during the batch determination process. The MRP data of a material that is subject to a batch management requirement must include a suitable checking group. a batch is unique and cannot therefore be replenished.

Unrestr. If you want to find “unrestricted” batches only. the system differentiates between “unrestricted” and “restricted” batches. In Customizing. You have the option here of displaying restricted batch stocks as available or unavailable as you require. the system selects only batches with the characteristic value “blank”. Unrestr. If you use the characteristic “LOBM_ZUSTD” (batch status) in batch determination. (C) SAP AG } } Batches of material 308-188 Status: UNRESTRICTED Available stock > 0 Status: Unrestr. The batches to be made available are selected in batch determination. Restr. Only “unrestricted” batches are proposed that are available in sufficient quantity.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Availability Check and Status Management Selection criteria: Material 300-188 Batch C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 © SAP AG 1999 Characteristic value LOBM-ZUSTD Unrestr. the system checks the availability of the batches selected. Restr. C1 C2 Available quantity: 100 kg 150 kg Maximum proposal: C1 C2 C4 0 kg C2 C6 50 kg C6 LO955 7-6 .SAP . you can set the format for the available stocks in the current stock/requirements list. After the selection run. Restr.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Availability Check: Summary You are now able to: Outline the special aspects of the availability check in the case of a material subject to a batchmanagement requirement © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 7-7 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination Contents: Batch Determination in the Logistics Process The Principle of Batch Determination Batch Determination in the Case of Goods Movements Batch Determination in Production Batch Determination in Sales Batch Determination in Warehouse Management Batch Determination: Master Data in the Applications Link Between Customizing and the Applications Settings in Customizing Condition Technique in Batch Determination © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 8-1 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. you will be able to: Describe how Batch Determination works and how it is integrated in the Logistics process © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 8-2 .SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination: Course Overview Diagram Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Mgmt Batch Batch Where-used List Batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 8-3 .SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination: Business Scenario Your company’s requirements are to: Select the most appropriate batch to meet customer needs. first out). © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 8-4 .SAP . Select the most appropriate component batch to make a quality product. without using the Warehouse Management System. Issue stock based on FIFO or FEFO (first expiration.

This can be done at two points: in the sales order and in the delivery. You manually enter the batch number numerically or alphanumerically. Batch numbers are assigned to materials with batch requirement at goods receipt (external procurement or in-house production). Batch determination works automatically. there are different points at which you can assign a batch to a material. batch determination is used to specify suitable components for the finished product right at the production order stage. order Process/ production order W/house Sales order/ delivery Batch assignment Batch assignment Batch determination © SAP AG 1999 Batch determination In Logistics. you can initiate batch determination according to the LIFO or FIFO principle (but also according to other criteria) in the transfer order. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-5 . In warehouse management. In the case of goods movements. you need to find the correct batch for goods issues such as for a consumption posting for an order or for a transfer posting. In Production.SAP . If you want to use a particular batch in the Logistics process. Sales needs to find the batch that fits the customer's requirements most closely. you first have to find the batch with the required specification in stock.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination in the Logistics Process Procurement Production Warehouse management Sales Warehouse management A A B B A A A W/house Purch.

If you now want to find a suitable batch for a business transaction. For business transactions where batch determination is to be used. You can change them for the current business transaction.15% © SAP AG 1999 Batches require you to enter specifications. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-6 . you also classify the strategy record using a class of class type 022 or 023.5700 Acidity 10% . You classify the batch record using a class of batch class type 022 or 023. If you have a number of different requirements. The system searches for batches that have the required characteristic values. They provide user support by helping you to make suitable changes to your entries and thus to continue the search. Like the batch record. you will have to create the corresponding number of records. storing the required selection criteria as characteristic values for this selection class. You store the batch's specifications as characteristic values. the system accesses the relevant strategy record. auxiliary functions such as a strategy analysis and log printout are offered.5700 Selection characteristics Viscosity 7450-7800 7450Refractive index 1. The structure of the search strategy depends on the settings made in Customizing. Linked to these strategy records are the target values for which you search with regard to a particular business transaction. you have to enter strategy records.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Principal of Batch Determination Batch 4243 Strategy record Y Batch class 4 Selection class 2 Batch characteristics Color 1 Viscosity 7500 Refractive index 1.SAP . If required. Its characteristic values are proposed. depending on the setting for the batch level in Customizing. Both discrete values and defined intervals are possible.

1997 © SAP AG 1999 Batch determination can be fully used for stock transfers and goods issues. Rem.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination for Goods Movements Search strategy • Movement type • Material • Plant Characteristics Bch status: UNR. Date: 01. status: Exp. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-7 .SAP . 10 days Goods issue Material X Batch 456c W/house W/house Characteristics Batch status: UNR. In the standard setting. Date: Exp. shelf life: Rem.02. batch determination runs online.

you can also define search procedures that allow batch determination for repetitive manufacturing. As with batch determination in the other applications.7 • Expiration date 01.02.97 Search strategy • Component X Material X Batch 456a Characteristics • Density 5. They are stored as characteristic values of the individual BOM items. or pull lists.0.. This allows the use of batch determination even if a component is backflushed. Only if no BOM item is classified does the system check whether a classified strategy record exists. kanban. you have to search for them at the time of the goods issue posting for the production order using batch determination in Inventory Management. Here. Batch splitting is possible..02.7 Rem. the selection criteria are then taken from the strategy record. For Release 4. suitable batches can be selected in the production order for the individual components.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination in Production Production Warehouse A B Warehouse management Process/ production order Batch determination Material X Batch 456b Characteristics • Density 5.7 • Expiration date 01. they must be found in the transfer order at the latest. •Component X © SAP AG 1999 In production. batch determination can work in two different ways: The selection criteria for the component are contained in the BOM (bill of material) and are fixed values for batch determination. using batch determination in Warehouse Management.shelf life 10 days BOM for finished product Y-351 •. If the batches have not yet been determined in the production order. If the batches have not yet been determined in Sales.97 Characteristics Density 5. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-8 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination in Sales Warehouse Management System Delivery Batch determination A B Search strategy Sales A W/house Material X Batch 456c Sales order Search strategy Batch determination © SAP AG 1999 In Sales. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-9 . batch splitting is possible. the batch number is transferred to delivery and the warehouse management system. Otherwise.SAP . If successful. the batch numbers selected are in turn transferred to the warehouse management system. they must be found in the transfer order at the latest. If the batches have not yet been determined in Sales. batch determination is left up to the following functions. batches can be determined at two points: You can search for the suitable batch when creating the sales order. If successful. using batch determination in Warehouse Management. If the batch is not determined until delivery.

you must change your entries and run the batch determination procedure again. you must first create a strategy record.02. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-10 . This record contains fields typical of the corresponding business transaction. 10 days If you want to use batch determination in Sales for a business transaction.7 • Rem.SAP . the search was successful.7 • Expiration date 01. You classify it using a selection class in order to store the required specification for the business transaction as a characteristic value. In batch determination. If they match. shelf life Rem. the classification of the batch records is compared with that of the strategy record. The characteristic values are default values that you can change or exclude if required. shelf life Rem.05 W/house Sales A A B Sales order Delivery note Search strategy •Customer 9911 •Destination GB Characteristics •Density 5. 10 days © SAP AG 1999 Batch determination Search strategy •Customer 9911 •Material X Characteristics •Density 5.7 • Rem.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination in Sales Warehouse management Material X Batch 456c Characteristics • Density 5. If not.

The standard function uses status and shelf life to determine the batch for stock transfer. 002 • Movement type 261 Characteristics Batch status: Unr. Date: Characteristics Batch status: Unr. The order in which batches are to be listed is controlled by the sort rule.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination in Warehouse Management Transfer order A Material X Batch 456c Search strategy B • Warehouse no. Rem. For example. By sorting according to date field. the system searches for those batches with the status “unrestricted-use” and the shortest shelf life.02. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-11 . batch determination is used for goods issues and stock transfers. shelf life: Rem. Here. Unr. You want the batches to be sorted by shelf life expiration date.05 Exp. goods movements can be made on the basis of the LIFO and FIFO principle. You can change it in the selection record. you want to post replenishment of a material to be handled in batches to its fixed storage bin in the picking location. where you can also vary the selection criteria. For the transfer posting. batch determination runs in the background. Unr. life: 10 days W/house W/house A B © SAP AG 1999 In Warehouse Management. Exp.SAP . Date: 01.

the system creates a new batch. stock category. classification is carried out for the new batch.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination in Warehouse Management IM System Create batch Goods receipt Goods issue PP System Production order Mat. and special stock. Due to the overlapping systems (PP and SD). Bch Qty X 456 100 Evaluation Material X Batch 123 WM System © SAP AG 1999 When goods are issued in Inventory Management. the system either transfers to the WM System the batches to be picked via the production order or the delivery (in this case the system searches for the batches defined). If the stock that has been posted is placed in storage. it is posted with reference to the batch. the system posts a goods receipt for purchase orders or a production order in Invnetory Management. For external or internal inbound deliveries. the system uses particular batches. Y C 456 20 Transfer order Material X Batch 123 From: 902 To: 100 Material X Batch 123 SD System Delivery Mat. which are then staged via picking strategies in Warehouse Management. plant. the batch number forms the material identification and thereby acts as a criterion for splitting stock in the Warehouse Management System. Alongside the material number. X C 123 10 Mat. or the WM System determines the batches. All relevant business transactions and evaluations take the batch into account.SAP . If you post material that has batch management requirement. At the same time. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-12 . The batch is included in all processes in the Warehouse Management System. The batch number is recorded in the quant that is updated as a result of the goods receipt.

The default quantity rule determines the quantity in which the batches sought have to be available. For different purposes. The sort rule specifies the sequence in which the batches found are listed. You may want an issue quantity to come only from a single batch or to be made only in whole pallets. A USER EXIT allows you to match the default quantity to your company's requirements. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-13 . The 'number of batch splits' determines the maximum number of batches that may be proposed after a search run.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination: Application Master Data When? What? Business transaction Selection class Sort rule Default quantity rule Number of batch splits How? Strategy records PP/PP-PI © SAP AG 1999 MM WM SD Batch determination depends on the strategy records of the respective application. The selection class specifies which characteristics the batch is to have.SAP . you have to create different strategy records in the system. The strategy record determines how the result of the search run is to be displayed. The strategy record determines what is looked for. The strategy record that applies to the business transaction is established by the system.

1 SD Sales organization Distribution channel Order type Plant Movement type 2 Warehouse no. the system accesses the corresponding entry of the application.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management How Customizing and the Applications Are Linked PP/PP-PI MM WM 1 Warehouse no. You can define the search procedures differently for different business transactions in the application. They are the link to the rules used to find the valid strategy record for the respective business transaction. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-14 . 2 Movement type 2 2 Division Sales document type Search procedures © SAP AG 1999 Search procedures are stored in Customizing for each application in which you can run batch determination. using it to locate the relevant entries in Customizing. As soon as the batch determination procedure is running.

the strategy types contain control parameters according to which the batch determination procedure is to run. If the table contains many fields. the strategy record is valid for a very special combination of data. The access sequence defines the order in which the system searches for existing strategy records. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-15 . As a reference for the strategy records. The system finds the search procedure (of the application) that is valid on this occasion. If it contains few fields. They are linked to an access sequence. In the access sequence. The access sequence consists of condition tables. the strategy record has a more general validity.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Settings in Customizing PP/PP-PI MM Search procedures WM SD Strategy types Access sequences Condition tables © SAP AG 1999 Dependent on the search procedure is a series of Customizing entries for each application in which batch determination is possible. the condition tables should be grouped from 'Specific' to 'General'. The condition tables describe groups of fields that have been used as a model to create strategy records. It contains the group of strategy types that are to be read.SAP .

strategy record. to start with a table with several entries ('Customer'. You then arrange the tables in access sequences. the system continues with the next table in the access sequence. in other words.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Condition Technique in Batch Determination Condition tables Cust.. Final accessing of the batches for a defined purpose and from defined points of view is stored in the search procedure. The details for batch determination are defined in the strategy type. Material Sales org. They will be used later to form the link between business transaction.and combine in a procedure. This is the order in which you want the system to search for existing strategy records.SAP . It is advisable to focus the scope of the search at first..assign to a strategy type. 1 Choose the central fields 1 from the business transactions and enter in tables.. You may assign the strategy type once only. Material Plant Material Sales organization Access sequence Material Strategy type 2 Define the sequence of the condition 2 tables in the search process. an access sequence may be used by several strategy types.. for example. and 'Material' in our example) and to end with a more general search (made here only via the material number).. you must choose fields from the business transactions 'sales order'. 'delivery'. In Customizing.. Material Plant Material Cust. 'goods movement'. 'transfer order'. you choose one access sequence. If the search is not successful using the fields in the first table. and batch found. The strategy type entries are passed on as default values for the strategy records in the application. 3 Search procedure © SAP AG 1999 Strategy type Strategy type Strategy type 4 Strategy type 4 . These include. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-16 . For each strategy type. However. You can link different access sequences together by combining more than one strategy type. and 'production/process order' and enter them in condition tables.. whether batch splitting is to be allowed or how the default quantity is calculated. 3 .. 'Plant'.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination: Unit Summary You are now able to: Describe how Batch Determination works and how it is integrated in the Logistics process © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 8-17 .

and SD. application-specific rules for Batch Determination. In Customizing. or 3-1/3-2. Carry out parts A and B of the exercise. PP. you will be able to: • Understand settings for Batch Determination in Customizing • Create and verify batch search strategies Upon goods movements in Inventory Management or In SD or In Process Manufacturing Upon goods movements. PP-PI. Then look for the application that is of most interest to you: Section 1-1/1-2. You can use the same selection class and sort rule for all parts of the exercise. These are created centrally in Customizing: (C) SAP AG LO955 8-18 . the system picks out the batch numbers in stock that meet particular selection criteria.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination Exercises Unit: Batch Determination Topic: Batch Determination in the Various Application Components At the conclusion of this exercise. you can define flexible. 2-1/2-2.SAP . We have prepared exercise data you can use to set up and carry out Batch Determination for the application components MM.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management a) Define selection class Call up the Create selection class function.SAP . In the sort rule. Create a new sort rule 040SO_## to sort the batches found for the characteristic M1-## (viscosity). you sort the batches found according to a given characteristic for batch determination . The selection class contains the characteristics for which you want to find batches in the system. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-19 . Create a new selection class 023SE_## with the characteristics M1-## (viscosity) and M2## (pH level).in ascending or descending order. b) Define and edit sort rules Call up the Create sort rule function.

In Customizing. Enter the data for these in the strategy record you subsequently create in Inventory Management. you can use your own selection class and sort rule. The Selection class and Sort rule fields are empty. You must not change the strategy type ZMM1 that has been defined for this exercise! Strategy type ZMM1 has been defined for this exercise. However.General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check Call up each of the functions that affect Inventory Management: 1-1-1 Function: Condition tables The condition tables define the fields outlining a particular transaction for which batches are to be found. the trigger for batch determination. technically. When you create your own strategy type.SAP . In the example. choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project → SAP Reference IMG). You can make your own entries if you wish. even though they have various characteristics. IMPORTANT: Please do not change the strategy type ZMM1. Note that Customizing tables are blocked if you try to access the strategy type using the change function. Choose Logistics .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-1 Batch determination for goods movements: Customizing You want to find batches of trading goods with a particular pH level and viscosity for a stock transfer or goods issue. However. It is best if the system reads the more specific condition tables and then the general ones. you can thus use the same strategy type for all materials used in the course. You can enter your own combinations if you wish. However. Look at the existing entries. They contain default values that are transferred to the strategy records of each of the application components. Do not use the (C) SAP AG LO955 8-20 . 1-1-3 Function: Strategy types Strategy types are a template. the standard entries are usually sufficient. This procedure offers more flexibility. the standard entries are usually sufficient. Look at the existing entries. it is more advisable to assign the selection class and sort rule to the strategy record in the application component. for example. 1-1-2 Function: Access sequences Access sequences describe the order in which the system reads the condition tables. They are always created with reference to a concrete strategy type. Look at the default values for strategy type ZMM1 and note the access sequence with which it is linked. Changing it would change the strategy type for all the participants.

Is it assigned to a movement type that you want to try to use in batch determination. it is advisable to copy the Batch search strategy function to your favorites. If you use these. use your selection class as a selection criterion and your sort rule as a sort criterion. and you do not need any additional documents. 1-2 Batch determination for goods movements 1-2-1 Create batch search strategy for Inventory Management Create a batch search strategy with reference to strategy type ZMM1. you do not have to change or extend the material master data. the batch search procedure combines the strategy types and then assigns them to a movement type (see section 1-1-5). 1-1-4 Function: Define batch search procedure Combinations of strategy types form search procedures. A batch search procedure combines all strategy types that are to be taken into account for each particular transaction type in the application component. 1-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure This shows which search procedure is used for which purpose. Link the strategy record to your material and the movement type you want to use. Check which entry the strategy type ZMM1 contains. use movement type 201 or 311. NOTE for movement type 201: NOTE for movement type 311: (C) SAP AG LO955 Cost center 1000 has been created. In the strategy record. You can enter storage location 0002 as the 8-21 . 1-2-2 Post goods movement with batch determination Post the goods movement with the movement type for which you have maintained data. As you may subsequently want to change the batch search strategy. Define your target values for the selection characteristics. If possible.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Customizing tables for any longer than necessary.SAP . In MM. RECOMMENDATION: For test purposes. Look at the search procedure that contains strategy type ZMM1. use the display function. The system takes all the remaining data from the strategy type.

In Inventory Management. choose Strategy analysis. Choose Batch Determination → Without selection criteria. To display a comparison of the selection values from the strategy record with the batch’s actual characteristic values. you initiate batch determination by entering an asterisk (*) in the Batch field. The system shows all available. existing batches for this material.SAP . choose Selection criteria. To see how the system found the strategy record used. For more information. you can double-click it. The system displays all batches that match your selection criteria. To overwrite the target values of the selection characteristics.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management receiving storage location for this stock transfer. The search result changes. This shows you why a batch was found or why it was not displayed. Enter the material number and quantity. choose Classification. Choose Change and enter a smaller interval or a single value. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-22 .

The Selection class and Sort rule fields are empty. choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project → SAP Reference IMG). it is more advisable to assign the selection class and sort rule to the strategy record in the application component.SAP . However. Choose Logistics . However. You fill these fields subsequently in the strategy record you create in the SD menu. even though they have various characteristics.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 2-1 Batch determination in Sales and Distribution: Customizing Case 1: You want to find batches of trading goods with a particular pH value and viscosity in a sales order. However. Look at the existing entries.General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check Call up each of the functions that affect SD: 2-1-1 Function: Condition tables The condition tables define the fields outlining a particular transaction for which batches are to be found. Look at the default values for strategy type ZSD1 and note the access sequence with which it is linked. You can make your own entries if you wish. technically. You can enter your own combinations if you wish. the trigger for batch determination. you can thus use the same strategy type for all materials used in the course. (Note: Batch splitting is not possible here. 2-1-2 Function: Access sequences Access sequences describe the order in which the system reads the condition tables. The batch numbers are transferred to all follow-on documents. the standard entries are usually sufficient. In the example. You must not change the strategy type ZSD1 that has been defined for this exercise! Strategy type ZSD1 has been defined for this exercise. the standard entries are usually sufficient. you can use your own selection class and sort rule. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-23 . The Batch number field must not be filled in the sales order. In Customizing. It is best if the system reads the more specific condition tables and then the general ones. When you create your own strategy type.) Case 2: You want to find batches of trading goods with a particular pH value and viscosity in a delivery for a sales order. They are always created with reference to a concrete strategy type. Look at the existing entries. This procedure offers more flexibility. for example. They contain default values that are transferred to the strategy records of each of the application components. 2-1-3 Function: Strategy types Strategy types are a template.

Check which entry the strategy type ZSD1 contains. Is it assigned to a sales document type that you want to try to use in batch determination? RECOMMENDATION: The entry TA is the standard order for the exercise. Look at the search procedure that contains strategy type ZSD1. The entries are used for both SD documents – the sales order and the delivery. If possible. use the display function.SAP . 2-1-4 Function: Define batch search procedure Combinations of strategy types form search procedures. Do not use the Customizing tables for any longer than necessary. distribution channel. A batch search procedure combines all strategy types that are to be taken into account for each particular transaction type in the application component. Changing it would change the strategy type for all the participants. 2-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure This shows which search procedure is used for which purpose. division. In SD. 2-1-6 Function: Activate automatic batch determination in SD Find out what this function is used for and how it has been configured in Customizing. the batch search procedure combines the strategy types and then assigns them to a combination of sales organization. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-24 . Note that Customizing tables are blocked if you try to access the strategy type using the change function. and sales document type (see section 2-1-5).Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management IMPORTANT: Please do not change the strategy type ZSD1.

The system takes all the remaining data from the strategy type. For more information. To overwrite the target values of the selection characteristics. choose Selection criteria.SAP . you can double-click it. Choose Batch Determination → Without selection criteria. Define your target values for the search characteristics. choose Strategy analysis. As you may subsequently want to change the batch search strategy. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-25 . it is advisable to copy the Batch search strategy function to your favorites. Use the data below: Customer: 7777 sales organization: 1020 Distribution channel: 22 Division: 00 Order number: Any Display the item overview. you can see the batches found here. In the strategy record. The search result changes. Choose Edit → Batch determination. The system displays the selection screen for batch determination with all the required information. including all the batches that match your selection criteria.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 2-2 Carry out batch determination in Sales and Distribution 2-2-1 Create a batch search strategy record for SD Create a batch search strategy record with reference to strategy type ZSD1. Choose Change and enter a smaller interval or a single value. To see how the system found the strategy record used. After the search has run. use your selection class as a selection criterion and your sort rule as a sort criterion. Link the strategy record to your material Y-500-## and the customer 7777. 2-2-2 For case 1 (sales order): Create sales order and carry out batch determination Create your own sales order with the order type standard order.

Then choose New batch determination. choose Classification. you can see why a batch was found or why it was not displayed.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 8-26 . existing batches for this material. which you are familiar with from exercise 2-2-2. The system displays the selection screen for batch determination. This also contains all the information that is described for batch determination in the sales order under 2-2-2. To display a comparison of the selection values from the strategy record with the batch’s actual characteristic values.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management The system shows all available. 2-2-3 For case 2 (delivery): Create delivery and carry out batch determination Remove the batch number entered in the item overview. Choose Sales document → Deliver Enter: Shipping point: 1100 Selection date: Current date + at least 1 week In the delivery document. choose Goto → Item → Batch split. In this way.

even though they have various characteristics. They are always created with reference to a concrete strategy type. use the display function. In the example. Do not use the Customizing tables for any longer than necessary. it is more advisable to assign the selection class and sort rule to the strategy record in the application component. 3-1-2 Function: Access sequences Access sequences describe the order in which the system reads the condition tables. If possible. When you create your own strategy type. Fill these fields subsequently in the strategy record you create in the Process Manufacturing menu. However. You can enter your own combinations if you wish. The Selection class and Sort rule fields are empty. the standard entries are usually sufficient. This procedure offers more flexibility. technically. However. the trigger for batch determination. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-27 . choose Logistics . you can thus use the same strategy type for all materials used in the course. You must not change the strategy type ZPI1 that has been defined for this exercise! Strategy type ZPI1 has been defined for this exercise. You can make your own entries if you wish.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 3-1 Batch determination in process manufacturing: Customizing You want to manufacture a material T-HT2## and have to have the system search for a suitable batch for the component Y-500-##. the standard entries are usually sufficient.SAP . Look at the existing entries. IMPORTANT: Please do not change the strategy type ZPI1. Look at the default values for strategy type ZPI1 and note the access sequence with which it is linked.General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check Call up each of the functions that affect process manufacturing: 3-1-1 Function: Condition tables The condition tables define the fields outlining a particular transaction for which batches are to be found. you can use your own selection class and sort rule. Look at the existing entries. Changing it would change the strategy type for all the participants. 3-1-3 Function: Strategy types Strategy types are a template. In Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project → SAP Reference IMG). However. Note that Customizing tables are blocked if you try to access the strategy type using the change function. They contain default values that are transferred to the strategy records of each of the application components. It is best if the system reads the more specific condition tables and then the general ones. for example.

SAP . To which order type and plant is it assigned? (C) SAP AG LO955 8-28 . A batch search procedure combines all strategy types that are to be taken into account for each particular transaction in the application. 3-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure This shows which search procedure is used for which purpose. the batch search procedure combines the strategy types and then assigns them to a combination of plant and order type (see section 3-1-5).Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 3-1-4 Function: Definition of batch search procedure Combinations of strategy types form search procedures. Look at the search procedure that contains strategy type ZPI1. Check which entry the strategy type ZPI1 contains. In PP-PI.

SAP . The system accepts the master recipe with the modified BOM. 3-2-2 Create batch search strategy for production process Go to Logistics → Central functions → Batch Management → Batch Determination → Batch Search Strategy → For Process Order → Create Create a strategy record with the following data: Strategy type: ZPI1 Order type: Plant: Material: PI01 Y-500-## 1100 3-3-3 Create process order and carry out batch determination for components Open a process order for material T-HT2##. Enter 1 kg as the required quantity and Stock item as the item category. Go directly to the BOM. Enter a total quantity of 100 000 pieces and the current date as the start date. Add your material Y-500-## to the list of components by choosing Edit → New entries. Save the BOM. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-29 . mark the quantity as a fixed quantity. Use the data for which you have just created a strategy record. Call up the material overview. choose Selection criteria. you can double-click it.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 3-2 Carry out batch determination in the production process 3-2-1 Change BOM You have to prepare the data for batch determination with your batch material. including all the batches that match your selection criteria. choose Strategy analysis. Select your components that are subject to batch management and choose Material → Batch management → Carry out determination The system displays the selection screen for batch determination with all the required information. To see how the system found the strategy record used. To overwrite the target values of the selection characteristics. In the General data for the item. Use the data below: Material: T-HT2## Plant: 1100 Use: 3. For more information.

This shows you why a batch was found or why it was not displayed. To display a comparison of the selection values from the strategy record with the batch’s actual characteristic values. The system shows all available. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-30 . Choose Batch Determination → Without selection criteria. choose Classification. The search result changes.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Choose Change and enter a smaller interval or a single value.SAP . existing batches for this material.

SAP .General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check → Define Selection Class d) Define and edit sort rules Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch Determination → Selection and Sort → Sort Rule → Create or Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto → SAP Reference IMG): Logistics . Goto → SAP Reference IMG): Logistics .General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check → Define Sort Rules (C) SAP AG LO955 8-31 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Determination Solutions Unit: Batch Determination Topic: Batch Determination in the Various Application Components c) Define selection class Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch Determination → Selection and Sort → Selection Class → Create or Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project.

1-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure The search procedure Z00001 is assigned to movement types 201 and 311.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-1 Batch determination for goods movements: Customizing In Customizing. 1-1-4 Function: Definition of batch search procedure The search procedure Z00001 contains the strategy type ZMM1. choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project → Goto → SAP Reference IMG). Choose Logistics . RECOMMENDATION: For test purposes. use your selection class as a selection criterion and your sort rule as a sort criterion. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-32 . it is best to stick to movement type 201 or 311. 1-2 Batch determination for goods movements 1-2-1 Create a batch search strategy record for Inventory Management Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch Determination →Batch Search strategy → For Inventory Management → Create In the strategy record.General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check Call up each of the functions that affects Inventory Management: 1-1-1 Function: Condition tables 1-1-2 Function: Access sequences 1-1-3 Function: Strategy types You must not change the strategy type ZMM1 that has been defined for this exercise! Look at the default values for strategy type ZMM1 and note the access sequence with which it is linked.SAP . If you use these. you do not have to change or extend the material master data and you do not need any additional documents.

Choose Batch Determination → Without selection criteria. using the movement type for which you have maintained data. Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management. Choose Strategy analysis and Selection criteria. → Goods movement → Goods issue || movement type 201 or Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Transfer Posting || movement type 311 Enter the material number and quantity.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Field name or data type Strategy type Movement type Material Selection criteria Values ZMM1 201 or 311 Y-500-## 023SE_## Define your target values for the selection characteristics. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-33 .SAP . Sort 040SO_## 1-2-2 Post goods movement with batch determination Post the goods movement.

2-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure The search procedure SD0001 is assigned to sales organization 1020. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-34 .General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check Call up each of the functions that affect SD: 2-1-1 Function: Condition tables 2-1-2 Function: Access sequences 2-1-3 Function: Strategy types You must not change the strategy type ZSD1 that has been defined for this exercise! Look at the default values for strategy type ZSD1 and note the access sequence with which it is linked. distribution channel 22.SAP . and sales document type TA. Choose Logistics . division 00.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 2-1 Batch determination in Sales and Distribution: Customizing In Customizing. 2-1-4 Function: Definition of batch search procedure The search procedure SD0001 contains the strategy type ZSD1. choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project → Goto → SAP Reference IMG).

Field name or data type Strategy type Customer Material Selection criteria Values ZSD1 7777 Y-500-## 023SE_## Define your target values for the selection characteristics.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 2-2 Carry out batch determination in Sales and Distribution: 2-2-1 Create batch search strategy for SD Logistics → Central functions → Batch Management → Batch Determination → Batch Search Strategy → For Sales and Distribution → Create In the strategy record. 7777 Any Y-500-## Any (C) SAP AG LO955 8-35 .SAP . it is advisable to copy the Batch search strategy function to your favorites. Sort 040SO_## As you may still want to change the batch search strategy. 2-2-2 For case 1 (sales order): Create sales order and carry out batch determination Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create Field name or data type Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division Sold to party PO number Material Quantity Values Standard order 1020 22 00. use your selection class as a selection criterion and your sort rule as a sort criterion.

Then choose New batch determination. which you are familiar with from exercise 2-2-2. Choose Batch Determination → Without selection criteria. Choose Strategy analysis and Selection criteria. click the green arrow. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-36 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Choose Edit → Batch determination. Enter: Field name or data type Shipping point Selection date Values 1100 Current date + at least 1 week In the delivery document. choose Goto → Item → Batch split.SAP . Choose Sales document → Deliver If you receive a warning message. 2-2-3 For case 2 (delivery): Create delivery and carry out batch determination Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Change Remove the batch number entered in the item overview. The system displays the selection screen for batch determination.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 3-1 Batch determination in process manufacturing: Customizing In Customizing.General → Batch Management – Batch Determination and Batch Check Call up each of the functions that affect process manufacturing: 3-1-1 Function: Condition tables 3-1-2 Function: Access sequences 3-1-3 Function: Strategy types You must not change the strategy type ZPI1 that has been defined for this exercise! Look at the default values for strategy type ZPI1 and note the access sequence with which it is linked. choose (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Choose Logistics . (C) SAP AG LO955 8-37 . Goto → SAP Reference IMG).SAP . 3-1-4 Function: Definition of batch search procedure The search procedure CO0001 contains the strategy type ZPI1. 3-1-5 Function: Assign batch search procedure Search procedure CO0001 is assigned to order type PI01 and plant 1100.

Field name or data type Requirement qty Item category Save the BOM. Selection characteristics 040SO_## Values 1 kg Stock item (C) SAP AG LO955 8-38 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 3-2 Carrying out batch determination in the production process: 3-2-1 Change BOM Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Bill of material → Material BOM → Change. 3-2-2 Create batch search strategy record for the production process Logistics → Central functions → Batch Management → Batch Determination → Batch Search Strategy → For Process Order → Create Create a strategy record with the following data: Field name or data type Strategy type Order type Plant Material Selection class Values ZPI1 PI01 1100 Y-500-## 023SE_## Define your target values for the selection characteristics.SAP . Use the data below: Field name or data type Material Plant Use Values T-HT2## 1100 3 Add your material Y-500-## to the list of components by choosing Edit → New entries.

Choose Batch Determination → Without selection criteria. Choose Change and enter a smaller interval or a single value. (C) SAP AG LO955 8-39 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 3-2-3 Create process order and carry out batch determination for components Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process order → Create → With material Field name or data type Material Plant Order type Total qty Start date Values T-HT2## 1100 PI01 100. Select your components that are subject to batch management and choose Material → Batch management → Carry out determination Choose Strategy analysis and Selection criteria.SAP . Choose Batch Determination → Without selection criteria. The search result changes. Go to the material overview.000 pcs Today The system accepts the master recipe with the modified BOM.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Price Determination Contents: Functionality Condition Technique in Pricing for Batches Presentation in the Billing Document Partial Stocks and Their Combinations Structure of Valuation for a Single Batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 9-1 .

you will be able to: Describe the use of the condition technique in the price determination process for batches Outline the effects of and prerequisites for individual batch valuation © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 9-2 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Price Determination: Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Price Determination: Course Overview Diagram Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Mgmt Batch Batch Where-used List Batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 9-3 .SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Price Determination: Business Scenario Your company makes batches of widely varying quality and wants to price by batch. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 9-4 .

You can proceed differently from batch to batch.SAP . © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 9-5 . If you want a batch to have a different sales price.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Functionality You can define a separate sales price for each batch. you must create a separate condition record for it in SD.

Material Batch Customer Access sequence Material Material Material Batch Batch Condition type 2 Define the sequence of the condition 2 tables in price determination...Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Condition Technique in Pricing for Batches Condition tables Cust. 3 3 .SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 9-6 .. 4 . Material Material Batch Group the important fields in 1 1 condition tables. If you want to be able to store a price at batch level. Calculation procedure © SAP AG 1999 Condition type Condition type Condition type You will find the described settings in Customizing for SD. you can define a pricing condition for the material and define a different price for certain batches only.. you must include the Batch number field in a condition table...and combine as a 4 calculation procedure. By making different entries in Customizing.assign to a condition type... Pricing uses condition technique.

set the indicator 'B' or 'D' as the billing quantity in the item details. TAN. Choose 'Sales' -> 'Billing' -> 'Billing Documents'-> Maintain Copying Control for Billing Documents -> 'Copying Control: Delivery Document to Billing Document'.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Display in Billing Document Go to Customizing for Sales and Distribution.. You can store different prices for the different batches. for key combination F2. LF.. You can change the display in the system through the Customizing settings described... This requires that the invoice document shows batch prices. the display at main item level. If. © SAP AG 1999 The delivery allows batch splitting. You can choose between a total price at item level or all individual batch prices per item.SAP .. . for example. the display with a batch split at item level. set the indicator 'G' or 'H' as the billing quantity in the item details.. (C) SAP AG LO955 9-7 . . you want to have .

you can valuate partial stocks separately within the plant level. You not only have to set the indicator for batch requirement.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Partial Stocks and Their Combinations Batch mgmt requirement Split valuation and split inventory management according to set valuation categories G Mgmt of partial stocks Split inventory management in batches (number = open) Inventory management in batches and split valuation according to set valuation categories Split inventory management and split valuation in batches = valuation for a single batch X © SAP AG 1999 As well as managing batches in Inventory Management. (C) SAP AG LO955 9-8 . The last procedure is known as valuation for a single batch. You can valuate them according to set valuation categories or you can decide individually for each batch.SAP . but also have to set the “valuation category” field to “X” at plant level on the accounting screen for the material. This means that stock valuation can be defined differently for each batch.

In addition. Batch 2 Quantity 60 St. Batch 1 Quantity 40 MAP 4. Quantity MAP 0001 1 X 10 5.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Structure of Valuation for a Single Batch Valuation Plant Plant Material 0001 1 Valuation area Material Valuation cat. This contains specific valuation data. loc. 0001 Quantity 30 Stor.20 SLoc Stor. the system creates a valuation record for each batch used.00 Valuation cat.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 9-9 .00 Batch Batch 1 Batch 2 Quantity 10 Quantity 20 Batch 1 Batch 2 Quantity 30 Quantity 40 © SAP AG 1999 For materials subject to the valuation for a single batch procedure. loc. price 6. 0002 Quantity 70 Valuation cat. You have to use moving average price control for materials at valuation level because the moving average price is managed for the whole valuation area. the stocks and stock values are managed on a cumulative basis at valuation area level.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Price Determination: Summary You are now able to: Describe the use of the condition technique in the price determination process for batches Outline the effects of and prerequisites for individual batch valuation © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 9-10 .SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Shelf Life Expiration Date Contents: Business Background Integration Shelf Life Expiration Date Check in Goods Receipt Central Fields in the Purchase Order Calculation of the Shelf Life Expiration Date Shelf Life Expiration Date Check in Batch Determination © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 10-1 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Shelf Life Expiration Date: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. you will be able to: Explain the significance of the shelf life expiration date in connection with materials subject to a batch management requirement Verify how the system calculates the shelf life expiration date of a newly-delivered batch © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 10-2 .SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Shelf Life Expiration Date: Overview Diagram Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Management © SAP AG 1999 Batch Batch Where-used List Batch (C) SAP AG LO955 10-3 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Shelf Life Expiration Date: Business Scenario Your company requires that the remaining shelf life of bought-in components handled in batches must be sufficiently long to enable it to manufacture the finished product and ship it to the customer in good time. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 10-4 . An enterprise that is not using the Warehouse Management (WM) component wishes to record the shelf life expiration date of quantities of materials in the SAP System.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Business Background The shelf life expiration date check is particularly important in the following industries: Foodstuffs Retail Pharmaceuticals Chemicals Cosmetics Health and hygiene © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 10-5 .

© SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 10-6 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration The shelf life expiration date check can be used with and without batch management requirement. You can decide whether you want to use it in individual cases. It must be maintained for goods receipt before you can use it in batch determination. It does not restrict existing functionality.SAP .

Can be maintained. controlled via the period indicator. The function module exit EXIT_SAPLMHD1_001 in SAP enhancement SAPLMHD1 is used to calculate and check the shelf life expiration date (SLED).SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Shelf Life Expiration Date Check in Goods Receipt Important fields in master records Material master record • Remaining shelf life • Total shelf life Must be maintained. Set at the time of the goods receipt posting. Batch master record • Expiration date © SAP AG 1999 The time you specify in the material master can be defined in days or in other time periods. The system checks date against this value. (C) SAP AG LO955 10-7 . You can use this exit to modify the data for calculating and checking the SLED. This value is used to calculate the expiration date.

A check is made against this data upon other goods receipt postings.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Central Fields in the Purchase Order Purchase order Header Vendor Batch master record Items Goods receipt Additional data Vendor Vendor batch Batch Expiration date Vendor batch Batch Expiration date Expiration date Vendor batch © SAP AG 1999 In the order document. (C) SAP AG LO955 10-8 . your master record will contain information on the vendor. Likewise. This is the batch number under which the vendor manages his goods. In the purchase order. you can specify a minimum value for the shelf life expiration date. his batch number. you can earmark the vendor batch in the purchase order. and the shelf life expiration date specified. This requires you to have already created the target batch number. Your master record is then created when the posting is made. you can earmark the target batch to which the posting is to be made upon goods receipt. If the target batch already exists in the system. The data is entered in the batch record upon the first goods receipt posting or is entered manually. You can also post the goods receipt to new batches.

The difference between the shelf life expiration date and the posting date is the remaining shelf life of the goods received. It must not be less than the minimum remaining shelf life from the material master record.SAP . You can overwrite the existing entry in the batch master record if a warning message has been set in Customizing for this case. If the total shelf life has not been stored in the material master record.K. It: Calculates the shelf life expiration date of the goods received. the system compares the shelf life expiration date of the goods received with the shelf life expiration date that has been calculated. If it were less. You specify the date of production when making the goods receipt posting.07/10/97 = 11 days Shelf life expiration date Total shelf life: 20 days Remaining shelf life 11 >10 => O. Checks the shelf life expiration date that has been calculated. The system calculates the shelf life expiration date the first time a batch is received: It is calculated from the date of production plus the total shelf life.! Remaining shelf life: 10 days Material master record © SAP AG 1999 If both the total shelf life and the minimum remaining shelf life are maintained. depending on the setting in Customizing. the system would respond with a warning or an error message. you must enter the shelf life expiration date at this point. Upon the next goods receipt for the same batch.: 07/01/99 Batch master record Expiration date 07/01/97 + 20 days = 07/21/99 07/21/97 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Calculation of the Shelf Life Expiration Date Posting date: 07/10/99 Goods receipt Material 4712 100 items Date of prod. the system executes two functions in succession. (C) SAP AG LO955 10-9 .

SAP . For the shelf life expiration date to be calculated dynamically. object dependencies must be defined and linked to characteristic LOBM_LFDAT.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management SLED Check in Batch Determination Delivery date 11/15/97 + remaining shelf life 10 days Strategy record Y = 11/25/97 Batch 4243 Selection class 4 Selection characteristics Batch class 2 Remaining shelf life (direct entry) Delivery date (set by system) 11/25/97 < 11/28/97 Batch characteristics Expiration date 11/28/97 (can be calculated by the system) => OK ! => O © SAP AG 1999 In batch determination. The system uses these two characteristic values to calculate a minimum required shelf life expiration date of the batch sought if standard characteristic LOBM_LFDAT has been maintained accordingly. you can make a selection using the batch's shelf life expiration date. For example. The SAP R/3 System comes with the standard characteristics. the material is to be available in production or to have reached the customer by the required delivery date. You enter the required remaining shelf life in the strategy record. Depending on the business transaction. (C) SAP AG LO955 10-10 . this can be the required batch specification for production or the requirements of the customer to whom the delivery is to be made. This requires you to include standard characteristic LOBM_RLZ for the remaining shelf life in the selection criteria as well as standard characteristic LOBM_LFDAT for the delivery date.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Shelf Life Expiration Date: Summary You are now able to: Explain the significance of the shelf life expiration date in connection with materials subject to a batch management requirement © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 10-11 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Shelf Life Expiration Date Exercises Unit: Shelf Life Expiration Date Topic: Shelf Life Expiration Date Check At the conclusion of this exercise. Call up the master data for material Y-500-##.. the system should calculate and check the shelf life expiration date at goods receipt.. extend the following data in the General Plant Data / Storage 1 view: Minimum remaining shelf life: 30 days Total shelf life: 50 days (C) SAP AG LO955 10-12 .. how the system calculates the shelf life expiration date of the delivered batch ..SAP . You want to verify. For plant 1100.. whether the remaining shelf life meets the requirements 1-1 Change the shelf life data in the material master Use the transaction Change material master from your favorites.. you will be able to: • Define rules in the master data to check the shelf life expiration date • Carry out goods receipts with shelf life expiration date check for purchase orders • Verify the shelf life expiration date in the batch master record For materials with a limited shelf life that are handled in batches. .

SAP . This is the quickest way of copying a reference purchase order in a system that is not configured for the individual user. Save the purchase order and make a note of the number. You can change the value.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 Post goods receipt for purchase order with entry of shelf life expiration date/production date 1-2-1 First of all. Order the material Y-500-##. You can then copy it. Call up the item details and check in the delivery section that the remaining shelf life of 30 days has been copied from the material master. Choose Item → More functions → Additional data. Again choose Purchase order Copy. purchasing group Zuse. Option 1: Choose Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known. Create a new purchase order for vendor 100. Go to the item screen for the second item. purchasing organization 1000 and purchasing group 007. purchasing organization IDES Germany. Purchase order: ____________________________________________ (C) SAP AG LO955 10-13 . You can also create a purchase order yourself with vendor 100. Option 2: Use transaction ME21 in the command field (entry "/NME21"). Adopt the item shown and enter your own material as the second item. company code IDES AG Germany. Enter purchase order number 4100000955 as a reference document. Save the purchase order and make a note of the number. K. create the purchase order. A remaining shelf life of 30 days is shown.

The system then calculates the shelf life expiration date and checks whether the remaining shelf life is sufficient. Then display the classification for several batches of material Y-500-##. Extend the batch number of your choice. All batches have transferred the expiration date (current value) in the batch classification to the relevant characteristic (there may not be a current value if the expiration date was not checked at goods receipt). Try to track how the system calculated the date. Save your goods movement. You can add the standard characteristic for the expiration date to the class C## of your material (search for the characteristic LOBM* via F4 help). Call up the item details and the batch section in it. as you entered a total shelf life in exercise 1-1. the system automatically filled the expiration date field. • 1-3 Verify shelf life expiration date in the batch master record Call up the batch master record from your favorites or via the menu. Hints: • • You can also try out the same procedure without entering a total shelf life in the system. The system prompts you to enter a date of production.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2-2 Post the goods receipt. (C) SAP AG LO955 10-14 . You can also post the goods receipt via the transaction MB01. As you see. Enter a date. • • Enter your purchase order number. Copy the purchase order item by selecting it on the Item Overview screen and setting it to OK.SAP .

SAP . copy the reference purchase order 4100000955 (Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known). You can then copy it. create the purchase order. Using transaction ME21 or ME21N.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Shelf Life Expiration Date Solutions Unit: Shelf Life Expiration Date Topic: Shelf Life Expiration Date Check 1-1 Change the shelf life data in the material master Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Field name or data type Material View Plant Minimum remaining shelf life Total shelf life Values Y-500-## General Plant Data / Storage 1 1100 30 days 50 days 1-2 Post goods receipt for purchase order with entry of shelf life expiration date/production date 1-2-1 First of all. You can also create a new purchase order. (C) SAP AG LO955 10-15 .

SAP . Field name or data type Vendor Purchasing org.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management It is important that you create a purchase order item for material Y-500-##. Field name or data type PO number Batch Production date Values See exercise 1-2-1 Any 2 weeks previously Note: You can also post the goods receipt via the transaction MB01. Purchasing group Plant Storage location Material Quantity Price Minimum remaining shelf life Values 100 1000 / IDES Germany 007 / Zuse. 1-3 Verify shelf life expiration date in the batch master record Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Batch → Display. K 1100 / Berlin 0001 Y-500-## Any Any 30 days (taken from the material master) 1-2-2 Post the goods receipt via Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → PO Number Known. (C) SAP AG LO955 10-16 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Where-used List Contents: Business Background Batch Tracking over Several Manufacturing Levels The Pick-up List Batch Where-used List for Trading Goods © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 11-1 .SAP .

SAP . you will be able to: Describe the functions of the batch where-used list © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 11-2 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Where-used List: Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Where-used List: Overview Diagram Introduction Availability Check for Batches ? Batch Master Data Batch Determination Batch Batch Levels Batch Price Determination XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ Batch Specification Batch Shelf Life Expiration Date 29 Batch Status Management © SAP AG 1999 Batch Batch Where-used List Batch (C) SAP AG LO955 11-3 .SAP .

A report is required to determine where the batch is located. which customers need to be contacted.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Business Scenario Your company needs to recall one or more batches from the market due to quality reasons. and what component batches went into the recall batch. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 11-4 .SAP .

As of Release 3. it can also be used for the material type trading goods. The documenting of batch movements in the system also extends to transfer postings covering changes in batch numbers and to physical stock transfers.SAP .0 of the SAP R/3 System. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 11-5 . It has particular importance with regard to questions of product liability.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Business Background The batch where-used list documents the progress of a batch through an enterprise.

or add batch master data). Together with the material document. the system records the numbers of the reference documents such as the production order and sales order. each batch has its own document journal. product R = raw material Bottom up Using Inventory Management functionality. The progress of a batch is recorded only if an inventory posting has been made. the batch where-used list shows a batch's progress through the company. if you want to reorganize columns.SAP . refer to the step Set Up Customer Exit for Batch Where-used List in the Implementation Guide (IMG) for Batch Management. Display options 1. From the initial posting through to deletion from inventory. calculate totals. • The function module EXIT_SAPLCHVW_001 in the SAP enhancement SAPLCHVW is provided for the batch where-used list.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Tracking over Several Manufacturing Levels Top down Customer A Sales order F1 Production order S1 Production order R1 Purchase order Vendor © SAP AG 1999 Customer B Sales order Customer C Sales order F2 Production order S2 Production order R2 F = finished product S = semi-fin. the system logs links between batches across all manufacturing levels through to the sales order and batch splits. In addition. ALV list: You can enhance this list with additional modifications or fields (for example. You use this exit to fill the fields you have added to the ALV list of the batch where-used list (for example. Tree structure: Hierarchical format 2. • For more information. The display variants top down and bottom up describe the perspective on the batch's lifecycle. You can also edit the batch where-used list graphically. (C) SAP AG LO955 11-6 . fields with batch master data such as the shelf life expiration date).

The result is a document journal that likewise shows the delivery note and sales order. In the case of a trading good to be handled in batches. and then branches to the batch where-used list. (C) SAP AG LO955 11-7 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Where-used List for Trading Goods Pick-up list PickBilling document Sales order Scheduling agreement Delivery note Customer A Sales order T1 Customer B Sales order T1 Purchase order Plant 02 T = Trading Goods Vendor © SAP AG 1999 The “pick-up list” makes it easier to access the batch where-used list from an SD document: it selects the flagged documents for the material. there is no detailed list of possible manufacturing levels. reads the batches used therein.SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Where-used List: Summary You are now able to: Describe the functions of the batch where-used list © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 11-8 .SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification and Quality Management Contents: Quality Management (QM) Inspections in Logistics Simplified Batch Maintenance with QM Creating a Material Specification Setting up QM Inspection Data in the Material Master Record Transfer of Inspection Results Example: Quality Inspection upon Goods Receipt from Production © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 12-1 .SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.SAP . you will be able to: Describe the steps involved in maintaining batch data from within the Quality Management module © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 12-2 .

Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act. Quantity .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification: Overview Diagram Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred.Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 12-3 . and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod.SAP .

The inspection results are recorded and are to be transferred directly into the batch classification. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 12-4 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification: Business Scenario Your company uses the QM component to check batches that have been produced.SAP .

or the product produced in-house is inspected before being added to stock. (C) SAP AG LO955 12-5 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Quality Management (QM) Inspections in Logistics Material 308-188 to be handled in batches A1 A2 B3 A4 C4 Goods receipt Production Goods issue © SAP AG 1999 Quality inspections can be made in a wide variety of areas in Logistics.SAP . If goods are delivered externally. Goods procured externally are inspected for the first time upon goods receipt. Inspections accompanying production are made during the production process. Goods stored in a warehouse can be subject to quality inspection at regular intervals. New batches can be created in each inspection of a material to be handled in batches if this seems necessary on the basis of the QM results. they are inspected before delivery to customers.

The batch keeps its specification values in the characteristics of the batch class. To distinguish them from master inspection characteristics. The inspection values can be transferred to the batch classification automatically. If the master inspection characteristic describes the same thing as the general characteristic. they are referred to as general characteristics. You do this in the QM master record Material specification. characteristics © SAP AG 1999 General characteristics QM uses master inspection characteristics to store inspection results. you should link them to avoid duplicate maintenance. result Batch A1 Classification Viscosity Covering power 750 CP 85% Viscosity 750 CP Covering power 85% Master insp. (C) SAP AG LO955 12-6 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Simplified Batch Maintenance with QM Goods receipt Material 308-188 A1 308-188 QM insp.SAP .

they are included in the material specification. where a master inspection characteristic is assigned to each general characteristic. the values specified for this characteristic must be within a single interval. you have to set up the data as follows: You have to define as a numeric value the general characteristic that you want to transfer to the inspection results. character X Classification System General characteristic A Batch class Material Master insp. (C) SAP AG LO955 12-7 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Creating a Material Specification Quality Management Master insp. This link clearly determines which master inspection characteristic transfers its result to which general characteristic. If master inspection characteristics have already been created in the system with reference to general characteristics of the material. You must always create a master inspection characteristic with reference to the general characteristic in QM. This ensures that the interval limits of the general characteristic are transferred if a quality inspection is made using a material specification. In addition. A material specification is created for the material in the QM system. character Y General characteristic B Classification data X Y Material specification A B © SAP AG 1999 To transfer the inspection results from quality management to the batch specification automatically.SAP .

you must maintain the indicator Inspect with specification in the QM view of the material master record. lot Inspection type .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Setting up QM Insp. © SAP AG 1999 If you want the material specification of a material to be considered in the quality inspection.. You can set this indicator for each inspection type. Master Record QM inspection data Material view QM Details on Inspection with specification Insp.. (C) SAP AG LO955 12-8 . Data in the Mat.SAP .

The inspection is otherwise regarded as terminated (discontinued) and the value can be transferred only manually from the inspection characteristic to the general characteristic. With the usage decision. The mean value of the inspection characteristic concerned is written to the general characteristic automatically if the inspection characteristic has the status closed. the values are transferred from the master inspection characteristic to the general characteristic assigned. (C) SAP AG LO955 12-9 .non-closed (open) characteristics © SAP AG 1999 The inspection results are recorded in the quality inspection and the individual inspection characteristics then closed.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Transfer of Inspection Results Save usage decision Inspection results Batch class General characteristics Result Result Automatic . This is followed by the usage decision on the material inspected.closed characteristics Inspection results Manual No Yes Batch class General characteristics ? .SAP .

lot 1234 X Y 96 1750 Usage decision © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 12-10 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Example: Quality Inspection upon GR from Production Material 308-188 QM data Characteristic value assignment Insp. type Batch A1 A B 96 1750 Production Results recording 1234 1234 Goods receipt Batch A1 Insp.SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification: Summary You are now able to: Describe the steps involved in maintaining batch data from within the Quality Management module © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 12-11 .

you will be able to: • Create a master inspection characteristic in QM and link it with a material’s class characteristics • Create inspection lots when you enter a goods receipt for a purchase order • Enter a usage decision • Check that the inspection result is transferred to the class characteristics of the batch concerned You intend to include the inspection results in the valuation of your batch managed materials that are subject to inspection. You have to prepare the system so that the automatic transfer runs smoothly. Click Inspection settings again. test your settings using a concrete example. To be on the safe side. Choose Enter. Enter inspection type 05 (=inspection for ‘other’ goods receipt) and activate this inspection type by selecting the Active Field. Save the changes in the material master.SAP . Change the Quality Management view in the material master of material Y-500-##.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification and Quality Management Exercises Additional Exercise: Optional Unit: Batch Specification and Quality Management Topic: Linking Master Inspection Characteristics with a Material’s Class Characteristics At the conclusion of this exercise. Click Create inspection data. Set the indicator for Inspection with specification and remove the indicator for Task List. provided that the inspection characteristic is consistent with the classification characteristic. plant 1100 and define an inspection procedure for the material: Click Inspection setup. 1-2 (C) SAP AG Link master inspection characteristic and class characteristic LO955 12-12 . 1-1 Preparations Maintain QM data in material master Use the transaction Change material master from your favorites.

M4-## Save. 1-2-2 Create master inspection characteristic Create a master inspection characteristic and link it to the class characteristic M4-##.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2-1 Edit material specification Check whether material Y-500 -## and its class characteristic covering power (M4-##) are linked to QM.SAP . characteristic Valid from Current date Class characteristic Status = released. Save the specification. (C) SAP AG LO955 12-13 . Give the master inspection characteristic the number 4-4##. 4-4## 1-2-3 Edit material specification Carry out step 2 again: Display the link you have created between the master inspection characteristic 4-4## and the class characteristic M4-##. Use the data below: Plant 1100 Master insp.

Use the transaction from your favorites or call it up from the menu. (By-pass any dialog boxes by choosing Accept). On the entry screen: In the UD code field. 2-3 Record the usage decision. 2-2 Enter the inspection result. (If you assign a value to this characteristic at this point. use F4 help to enter an acceptance without further action and save the usage decision. plant 1100. Assign your own batch number.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 2-1 Goods receipt for purchase order with creation of inspection lot Create a batch and an inspection lot.Lock [or choose the lock icon &]. 1 This is the value measured for the characteristic covering power in quality inspection. Double-click line 9999 Check with material specification for work center in the left frame. Double-click the line with inspection number 5000…in the left frame. The system will find one inspection lot exactly and display it in the frame on the left-hand side. Assign values to all characteristics. Using movement type 501. apart from the characteristic covering power. quality inspection will overwrite the value).SAP . Save. post an ‘other’ goods receipt of 500 KG to storage location 0001. Edit . On the entry screen: Select the item and click Edit – Characteristic – Choose [or the magnifying glass icon < ]: xQuer = 921. Select the Inspection Lot Stock tab and post the quantity concerned (500 KG) to the appropriate stock type: Enter 500 in the line To unrestricted and save again. LO955 12-14 (C) SAP AG . Search for the inspection lots for your material Y-500-##.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 2-4 Check the batch classification: Display the stock overview for material Y-500-##: Double-click the relevant batch line and call up the classification data: The value 92% is entered as the characteristic value for covering power. (C) SAP AG LO955 12-15 .

(C) SAP AG LO955 12-16 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Specification and Quality Management Solutions Unit: Batch Specification and Quality Management Topic: Linking Master Inspection Characteristics with a Material’s Class Characteristics 1-1 Preparations Maintain QM data in material master Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Field name or data type Material View Organizational level Plant Inspection type 1100 05 Values Y-500-## Quality Management Pay attention to the instructions for inspection type 05 in the exercise text. Save the changes in the material master.SAP .

2 1-2-2 Create master inspection characteristic Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Planning for Material → Basic Data → Inspection Characteristic → Create Field name or data type Plant Master insp. (C) SAP AG LO955 12-17 . characteristic Valid from Class characteristic Status 1-2-3 Edit material specification Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Planning for Material → Inspection Planning → Material Specification → Edit Field name or data type Material Values Y-500-## Values 1100 4-4## Current date M4-## Released The class characteristic M4-## is assigned to master inspection characteristic 4-4##.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 Link master inspection characteristic and class characteristic 1-2-1 Edit material specification Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Planning for Material → Inspection Planning → Material Specification → Edit Field name or data type Material Plant Values Y-500-## 1100 The class characteristic M4-## does not have an equivalent in QM. Save the specification. you can enter a result for numerical characteristics only. 2 Only characteristics that have been defined numerically can be linked. In QM.

Field name Material XQuer (result) (characteristic 4-4##) Values Y-500-## 923 3 This is the value measured for the characteristic covering power in quality inspection. the system creates an inspection lot when you save an ‘other’ goods receipt. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management.→ Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → Other Initial screen Field name Movement type Plant Storage location At item level: Field name Material Quantity Batch number Characteristic value assignment Values Y-500-## 500 KG Any. Values 501 1100 0001 Due to the configuration of QM in the material master (inspection type 05). 2-2 Enter the inspection result: Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording Execute the transaction and enter the result. internal or external Any or within the allowed values No characteristic value assignment for the characteristic covering power.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 2-1 Goods receipt for purchase order with creation of inspection lot Create a batch and an inspection lot. LO955 12-18 (C) SAP AG .SAP .

. A (acceptance without further action) 2-4 Check the batch classification: Display the stock overview for material Y-500-##: Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview or Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Stock → Stock overview (C) SAP AG LO955 12-19 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 2-3 Enter the usage decision: Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Usage Decision → Record Field name Material Insp. lot UD code Values Y-500-## 5000..SAP ..

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Appendix: Batch Creation in Process Manufacturing Contents: Process Flow Inspection During Production: Master Data Inspection During Production: Master Recipe Inspection During Production: Material Master Inspection During Production: Material Specification Master Recipe and Material Specification Checks in the Production Process Creation of Partial Lots Relationship Between Partial Lots and Batches Batch Number Assignment © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 13-1 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Appendix: Batch Creation: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. you will: Understand how batch maintenance is integrated with Quality Management in production An operation from PP-PI serves as an example. Be able to explain how production can control batch creation © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 13-2 .SAP .

Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 13-3 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Appendix: Batch Creation Overview Diagram Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. Quantity .SAP . and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod. Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act.

SAP . © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 13-4 . The quantities taken from the production process and examined can be posted to more than one batch within a production run.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Appendix: Batch Creation Business Scenario Your company. The examination can yield different quality results. checks the batches it produces at various inspection points in the production process. which is engaged in process manufacturing.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Process Flow Receipt in warehouse 9 9 1 1 Open process order Confirmations 8 8 Header Operations Phases 2 2 Copy Master recipe with QM data Production process Quality insp.SAP . Quality inspections are made in the production process based on defined inspection points in the recipe. Depending on how your system is configured in Customizing. and batch assignment 7 7 Process instructions Resource assignment Material components 3 3 Availability check . The system checks the availability of the material components. . Quantities of materials produced are confirmed and posted to stock. (C) SAP AG LO955 13-5 . you can open a process order based on a master recipe in different ways: manually using a material without using a material from one or more planned orders created in material requirements planning. Material withdrawal 6 6 Create control recipe -> PI sheet 4 4 Order release Insp. an inspection lot is created upon release of the order. Materials are withdrawn from stock on the basis of the requirements in the PI sheet. The control recipe is sent manually and the person responsible processes the resulting PI sheet on the process control system. You can also create the inspection lot manually. The data from the master recipe (in which QM data is also maintained) is copied to the order. This results in partial lots to which batch numbers are assigned. lot is created 5 5 © SAP AG 1999 In PP-PI. . A control recipe is created from the order.

Master insp. The inspection type Inspect during production must be activated in the material master record. You can define QM data at header level and operation level. You plan how and what you want to inspect. Inspection results are transferred only to those general characteristics that are linked to a master inspection characteristic via the material specification. The inspection lot is created either manually or automatically upon release of the process order. (C) SAP AG LO955 13-6 . character Y insp.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Inspection During Production: Master Data PP-PI Master recipe Insp.SAP . character X insp. The QM view and the QM inspection data must be maintained in the material master record of the material to be produced. lot 1234 MM Material view QM Material specification Master insp. © SAP AG 1999 QM General characteristic A General characteristic B The inspection requirements for operations and phases are defined in the master recipe.

(C) SAP AG LO955 13-7 .Time-related . you enter which sampling procedure is to be used.Quantity-related . frequency © SAP AG 1999 There are a number of different settings you have to make in the master recipe.Unrestricted Indicator for last partial lot assignment Char. Sampling procedure with inspection points and insp.SAP . you can define in the inspection grid whether you want the inspection intervals to be: time-related quantity-related unrestricted. QM data is maintained in the master recipe header. you can set the indicator Last partial lot assignment so that the order is confirmed as a partial lot only after all the operations have been executed. The sampling procedure determines the inspection frequency. In the last operation or phase. For the inspection characteristic in the operation or phase. At operation or phase level. you set the inspection points indicator.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Inspection During Production: Master Recipe Master recipe Header QM data Inspection points Operation/phase Inspection grid . Here.

Choose the inspection type Inspection during production in the QM inspection data.SAP . lot © SAP AG 1999 In the material master record of the material to be produced. (C) SAP AG LO955 13-8 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Inspection During Production: Material Master QM inspection data Material view QM Inspection type details: Inspection type: Inspect in production Inspection with specification Insp. to be considered. Inspect with plan causes a plan (recipe in this case). there are a number of different settings that you have to make in the QM view. Set the following indicators in the inspection type details: Inspect with specification determines that values are copied from QM to the batch classification. Characteristic inspection indicates that an inspection is made for characteristics stored in the recipe. in which the inspection is defined.

You assign values to the batch class characteristics during in-production quality inspection. You create master inspection characteristics in QM and assign them to operations and phases in the master recipe. you define values allowed for the material.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Inspection During Production: Mat. Quality inspection results are stored in them as characteristic values. charac. Here. The general characteristics that are passed on to the batches by inheritance are primarily important for batch determination. 5 Covering power 0 . 1 Viscosity 1700 -1780 CP General characteristic A Viscosity 1700 -1780 CP Master insp. charac.98% © SAP AG 1999 General characteristics are linked to master inspection characteristics in the QM master record Material specification. (C) SAP AG LO955 13-9 . The aim of linking master inspection characteristics and class characteristics is to transfer the result values from the quality inspection to the batches automatically. Specification Material specification Master insp. The general characteristics are stored in the material master record.SAP .98% General characteristic B Covering power 0 .

if required. 5 Covering . Since the recipe can apply to several materials.SAP . The list of inspection characteristics in the recipe can differ from that in the material specification. you must maintain the operation data in Customizing for inspection types.. 1 Viscosity 200 . (C) SAP AG LO955 13-10 . 20 Operation 10 Master insp. You can create master inspection characteristics in QM.. charac. 2 Temperature . 1 Viscosity 1700 -1780 CP 20 Master insp. characteristics Master recipe 10 Operation 10 Master insp. 3 Density .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Recipe and Material Specification Coordination of master insp... You can use master inspection characteristics in the master recipe and the material specification at the same time.. it is possible for the interval values here to differ from those in the material specification. 4 pH © SAP AG 1999 . charac. charac. If the inspection is made using the material specification only. You can then include them in the recipe and. change the interval values. power 30 Operation 10 Master insp... charac. charac.2000 CP Specification ? ? Master insp. Master insp. charac..

charac. the system copies the requirements from the material specification to the inspection lot. 1 200 .SAP . Master recipe 10 Operation 10 Master insp. 10 Operation 10 Master insp. charac. charac. the total characteristics from the recipe and the specification form the list of master inspection characteristics for the inspection lot. charac. 1 1700 -1780 CP Specification Copy Master insp. 3 30 Operation 10 Master insp. charac. 5 If you use the master recipe and the material specification together. charac. 3 30 Operation 10 Master insp. charac. 1 1700 -1780 CP 20 Master insp. (C) SAP AG LO955 13-11 . 4 Insp. charac. 4 9999 Master insp. The data in the master recipe is suppressed. charac.2000 CP 20 Master insp. 5 © SAP AG 1999 Copy Master insp.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Master Recipe and Material Specification Coordination of master insp. charac. charac. 2 20 Operation 10 Master insp. lot Insp. 2 20 Operation 10 Master insp. If the characteristics' value intervals differ. charac.

the results of the quality inspection can be automatically transferred from the inspection characteristics to the corresponding general characteristics of the quantity produced. In this recipe. By means of a link. (C) SAP AG LO955 13-12 .SAP . the inspection characteristics are used in operations and phases in the master recipe. Values are transferred only between characteristics linked by a material specification. you can either create inspection characteristics or refer to existing master inspection characteristics.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Checks in the Production Process Operation 10 Charge Partial lot 1 Operation 20 Operation 30 React Discharge Partial lot 1 Partial lot 1 Viscosity Mat no. 303-188 Batch A1 1 Viscosity Temperature 3 2 Density 4 Covering power pH value Covering power 5 © SAP AG 1999 In the in-process inspection.

If you do not confirm any (partial) quantities in production or if you do not use inspection points. the system offers you the option of creating a new partial lot or of adopting the preceding one at each inspection point. the inspection results are recorded for the entire inspection lot. you can create an inspection lot. In the case of a material to be handled in batches. splitting it into partial lots if required.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Creation of Partial Lots Operation 10 Operation 10 Charge Charge 1 2 1 2 Operation 20 Operation React 20 React 3 3 Operation 30 Discharge 4 5 4 5 Inspection point 10 ' 20 ' 20 ' Partial lot 1 Partial lot 2 © SAP AG 1999 This graphic representation shows the connection between inspection points and partial lots. For each process order. you always record the results in inproduction quality control with reference to them. Your decision should depend on whether different inspection results for the quantities produced require assignment to separate partial lots. you can record inspection results for the inspection characteristics of the same operation several times in succession.SAP . different partial lots later allow separate inventory management since a batch can be created from each partial lot. In contrast to inspection without inspection points. (C) SAP AG LO955 13-13 . if production is in quantities. If you decided on inspection points in the master recipe. However.

In addition. If values differ between the partial lots.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Relationship Between Partial Lots and Batches Partial lot 1 Partial lot 2 Partial lot 3 Viscosity pH value 1930 cst 7. you can group partial lots for a batch.SAP . when recording inspection results with inspection points.5 Viscosity pH value 1950 cst 7.5 Batch 1 © SAP AG 1999 Batch 2 If several partial lots are created in a production run. Reference is made to this number upon goods receipt from Production. The inspection results of the individual partial lots are of key importance here.5 Viscosity pH value 1950 cst 7. a separate batch number can be assigned to each partial lot. it may be advisable to manage the stocks later in separate batches. (C) SAP AG LO955 13-14 .

for individual partial lots created for the inspection lot and confirmed as (partial) quantities. order 60000780 Partial lot 1 Goods receipt Batch A1 A1 Insp.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Number Assignment Process order/production order 60000780 Header level Batch Goods receipt A1 Batch A1 Process order/ prod.SAP . A batch number can be assigned for each partial lot or several partial lots can be grouped under the same batch number. lot 1234 Partial lot 2 Goods receipt Batch A2 A2 © SAP AG 1999 You can specify the batch number in one of two places for the subsequent goods receipt: at header level of the process order/production order created if the entire order is confirmed as a single quantity. (C) SAP AG LO955 13-15 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Appendix: Batch Creation: Summary You are now able to: Understand how batch maintenance is integrated with Quality Management in production Explain how production can control batch creation © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 13-16 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Optimized Batch Processing Contents: Mass-processing of batches Batch Information Cockpit: Introduction Batch Information Cockpit: Screen Layout Batch Information Cockpit: Navigation Area Batch Information Cockpit: Selection Area User Settings © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 14-1 .

you will be able to: Select batches via common attributes Create worklists for batches Transfer batches from the where-used list into the worklist Process batch master records from within the worklist © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 14-2 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Optimized Batch Processing: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Optimized Batch Processing: Overview Diagram Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod.Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 14-3 . Quantity . Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act.

SAP . you want to make changes to the batch master records © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 14-4 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Optimized Batch Processing: Business Scenario You want to group together various batches with common attributes for further processing and take a look at stock figures and the data in the batch master record You also wish to gain a quick overview of the usage of certain batches Occasionally.

Click on a batch in the selection result area or in the worklist to display the batch data in the righthand part of the screen. Folders can be assigned to any number of users. You can differentiate between public and private worklist folders. you copy the selection result into the relevant folder on the initial screen. (C) SAP AG LO955 14-5 . A private folder can only be processed by the user assigned to it.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Mass-Processing of Batches Navigation: Selection result Processing: Details Batch master record: Change/Display Worklist © SAP AG 1999 Straightforward changing of batch data You can use the "Mass Processing of Batches" function to select batches on a cross-material and plant basis and then display and change your data.SAP . To do so. Worklist folders are organized in Customizing for Batch Management: There you create new folders and assign them to users. Grouping of batches in the worklist folder You can fill the worklist with any number of batches. You can also navigate over and between the batches in the relevant lists. you can structure the worklist using worklist folders. To improve handling. The content of a folder that has been designated as "public" can be displayed and processed by all the users who are assigned to it.

SAP . classification characteristics.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Information Cockpit: Introduction Central tool facilitating extensive access to batch information.g. Designed as a single-screen transaction. and classification data (e. batch. shelf life. stock. batch where-used list) (C) SAP AG LO955 14-6 . Flexible selection of batches on the basis of material. classification status) Combination of several existing functions Batch master Batch where-used List Shelf life list Integration of new "Batch Worklist” functionality © SAP AG 1999 You use the Batch Information Cockpit to Select batches Display information relevant to batches Invoke detail functions (batch master.

(C) SAP AG LO955 14-7 . and classification data Selection result Stock or processing: Batch master record Batch usage © SAP AG 1999 Selection You can choose the selection setting you wish to work with.SAP . stock. You define user-group-specific selection settings in Customizing for Batch Management.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Information Cockpit: Screen Layout Navigation: Worklist Area for selection Batch selection on the basis of certain material. batch. shelf life.

Sub-area: Selection result: batches Focus on the batch definition of the selected batches 2. Sub-area: Selection result: stock Focus on the stock situation of the selected batches 3. Sub-area: Batch worklist Option of filling and processing within the Cockpit © SAP AG 1999 Navigation: Selection result Stock Worklist Hierarchical or list display can be chosen in the first two sub-areas. For the navigation area. material short description) (C) SAP AG LO955 14-8 . you can: Deactivate individual sub-areas Specify the sequence of sub-areas Determine which sub-areas are to initially be open Specify whether the selection result "batches" or "stock" is initially to be shown as a list You can freely determine the width of the navigation area.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Information Cockpit: Navigation Area Flexibly adjustable via user settings 1. You can specify the form in which the material is to be shown in the navigation area (material number.SAP .

MSPR) Directly influences the grouping and sequence of the display fields in the navigation area Answers to concrete questions in the batch environment. MSKU. MARD.SAP . planner Batch Classification Stock Usage Reset selection criteria BMBC iwdf5070 INS © SAP AG 1999 Selection of any required batch information Flexibly definable in Customizing: Deactivation of individual selection tabs Changing the title of selection tabs Adding own selection fields to the selection tabs (tables MARA. MCHA.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Information Cockpit: Selection Area Batch Info Cockpit Edit Utilities System Help Batch Information Cockpit List Selection result: batches 5 batches found Y-351 C1 FE Selection Result in folder Restart Details Selection (SAP standard) Reset all selection criteria Material List Selection result: stock 5 stocks found Y-351 Material Plant Batch Material type Industry Batch worklist Standard folder (16 batches) Division Valuation category Mat. such as: Which batch has the status "Unrestricted"? Which batches must be used because their shelf lives have nearly expired? Which "unrestricted" batch stocks exist for a product group and how are the batches specified? Which batch stocks exist within a certain materials planner's area of responsibility? (C) SAP AG LO955 14-9 . MSKA. MSLB. MCHB. MARC. MKOL.

Database selection Maximum no. (matl description) Material no.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management User Settings Batch Information Cockpit Start settings User group assignment User group selection Navigation area Active Selection result: batches Selection result: stock Batch worklist Width of navigation area Width in mm 70 Sequence Display 1 2 3 Detail function Standard detail function BMAN SAP 1 List Current settings Material format Material number Material no.SAP . (matl description) Material descr. (C) SAP AG LO955 14-10 . of batches 100 Deactivate confirmation prompt when copying to worklist when deleting from worklist © SAP AG 1999 Possibility of adjusting and storing Cockpit settings on a user-specific basis Examples: Determining a selection setting Deactivating individual navigation areas Determining the width of the navigation area Showing the material as the material number and/or the material's short description ...

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Optimized Batch Processing: Summary You are now able to: Select batches via common attributes Create worklists for batches Transfer batches from the where-used list into the worklist Process batch master records from within the worklist © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 14-11 .SAP .

1-1 Managing the worklist 1-1-1 Take a look at the defined worklist folders in Customizing. To make your job easier. The materials should also belong to the class N-003 and not be classified.SAP . select the two materials lauryl alcohol and lemon juice and copy all batches of these two materials into your private folder (standard folder or the one you created yourself). You can then work on these batches later. You (C) SAP AG LO955 14-12 . What is the significance of the Public indicator? ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ Optional: Create your own private folder.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Optimized Batch Processing: Exercises Unit: Optimized Batch Processing Topic: Batch Information Cockpit At the conclusion this exercise. Optional: Assign your user to your newly created private folder. you will be able to: • Manage worklists • Select and process batches • Analyze and evaluate information about batch usage and the stock situation Every day you work with batches that have certain properties and have to monitor and occasionally change stock and batch data. at your convenience. you wish to create worklists of batches that are to be processed. 1-2-2 In the Selection Results: Batches area. Select batches of materials in plant 1100 that begin with the letter T and end with your group number. 1-1-2 Assign your user to the public folder PUBL. 1-2 Using the Batch Information Cockpit 1-2-1 Call up the Batch Information Cockpit transaction.

Widen the navigation area to 100 mm. Add up the quantities of unrestricted stock. 1-2-7 Make an entirely new selection for batches of material Y-500-XX in plant 1100 whose shelf life is due to expire in the next 100 days. select batch C4 of material 350-100 and obtain information on the usage of this batch. Make sure that the remaining shelf life is shown as the exact number of days in each case. 1-2-5 Display the unrestricted stocks in the Selection Result: Stock area. What is the total stock figure? ____________________________________ 1-2-6 In the Selection Result area. Which symbol is used to identify batches whose shelf life will expire within the next 100 days in the Selection Result area? ________________________________________ 1-2-8 Change the status of critical batches to restricted. 1-3 Optional: Batch Information Cockpit: User Settings 1-3-1 Call up the Batch Information Cockpit transaction again. 1-3-2 Check the current setting in the Cockpit. Configure the Batch Information Cockpit with the aid of user settings according to the following criteria: • • Deactivate the Selection Result: Stock Arrange the Worklist: Batches and Selection Result: Batches in such a way that the Worklist: Batches is displayed above the Selection Result: Batches. Switch to the list display in the Selection Result: Stock area. 1-2-3 Now exit the Batch Information Cockpit transaction and immediately call it up again. Save the user settings. What is the content of the public and private folders? _______________________________________ _______________________________________ _______________________________________ 1-2-4 Select all batches of the materials Y-500-XX and 350-100 in plant 1100.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management can also select further materials or batches in the selection area and move them to the public folder. Sort the selected batches by the status Unrestricted.SAP . Change the material display to Material number (Material short description). • • • (C) SAP AG LO955 14-13 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Optimized Batch Processing: Solutions Unit: Optimized Batch Processing Topic: Batch Information Cockpit 1-1 Managing the worklist 1-1-1 Take a look at the defined worklist folders in Customizing. Logistics General → Batch Management → Tools → Worklist → Define Worklist Folders What is the significance of the Public indicator? You can differentiate between public and private worklist folders. A private folder can only be processed by the user assigned to it. Folders can be assigned to any number of users.SAP . The content of a folder that has been designated as Public can be displayed and processed by all the users who are assigned to it. 1-1-2 Assign your user to the public folder PUBL. Logistics General → Batch Management → Tools → Worklist → Assign Worklist Folders to Users (C) SAP AG LO955 14-14 . Goto → Display SAP Reference IMG. Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project.

hold down the control key while selecting the two materials with the left-hand mouse button. 1-2-2 In the Selection Result area in the left-hand part of the navigation area. 1-2-3 New call of the Batch Information Cockpit transaction. You can also select further materials or batches in the selection area and move them to the public folder. Then click on the Selection in folder button and choose the relevant folder (standard folder or new folder of your own). Values T*## 1100 N-003 Not classified (C) SAP AG LO955 14-15 . What are the contents of the public and private folders? The private folder should contain the batches of the two materials copied there in exercise 1-2-2.SAP . The public folder contains batches copied into it by both yourself and other course participants. Logistics→ Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Batch Information Cockpit Tab Material Classification Field name Material Plant Batch class Classification status Execute selection button.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 Using the Batch Information Cockpit 1-2-1 Call up the Batch Information Cockpit transaction. select the two materials lauryl alcohol and lemon juice. To do so.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2-4 Select all batches of the materials Y-500-XX and 350-100 in plant 1100. navigate to the batch where-used list via Details – Where used. Batches whose shelf life exceeds the 100 days specified as selection criterion are identified by a green signal. 1-2-7 Make a completely new selection by clicking the Selection button at the top of the right-hand frame. 1-2-5 Select the Unrestricted-use column and click the Sort in ascending order icon. Batches whose shelf life is due to expire within the next 100 days are identified by a yellow color signal. select batch C4 of material 350-100. A red color signal appears next to batches whose shelf lives have expired. Use the icon with the magnifying glass to enlarge the stock overview.901 kg 1-2-6 In the Selection Result area. What is the total stock figure? 10. In the Selection Result: Stock area. Tab Material Shelf life Field name Material Plant Values Y-500-XX 1100 Values Y-500-XX 350-100 1100 Remaining shelf 100 life Format of remaining shelf life Exact number of days Execute selection button. Switch to the list display in the Selection Result: Stock area. Activate the Selection Result: Stock area via the relevant icon or through the menu via Batch Info Cockpit – Display Selection Result: Stock. If the batch master record is displayed in the right-hand frame.SAP . Select the Unrestricted-use column and click the Total icon. click the Display as list button. (C) SAP AG LO955 14-16 . Tab Material Field name Material Plant Execute selection button.

You can process further batches by clicking the Next batch button or by selecting the next batch in the Selection Result area. you can change the batch status to Restricted.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2-8 You can invoke detailed data on a certain batch by clicking on the relevant batch in the Selection area. In this mode. 1-3 Optional: Batch Information Cockpit: User Settings 1-3-1 Configure the Batch Information Cockpit with the aid of user settings. Logistics→ Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Batch Information Cockpit Utilities → User Settings (C) SAP AG LO955 14-17 . You can switch to change mode via the Display/Change icon. If you see the batch where-used list. you can view the batch master data via Detail -> Batch master.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Introduction to Batch-specific Units of Measure Contents: Batch-specific Units of Measure: Differences Using Active Ingredients Physical Quantity and Active Ingredient Quantity Calculating the Quantity Prices for Active Ingredients Planned and Actual Active Ingredient Proportions Using Batch-Specific Units of Measure Batch-Specific Calculation of the Product Quantity © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 15-1 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.SAP . you will be able to: Describe the business background to active ingredient management and product quantity management Understand the most important issues and influencing factors involved in active ingredient management using product units © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 15-2 .

SAP . Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act. and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod.Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 15-3 . Quantity .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch-specific Material UoMs: Overview Diagram Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch-specific Material UoMs: Business Scenario Your company wishes to be able to measure and show the active ingredients of materials within the physical quantity of these materials. even if the conversion ratios between the latter and the base unit occasionally fluctuate. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 15-4 . Even in such cases. it must be possible to show and use the conversion ratio between the two units of measure correctly for all stocks.SAP . and to use them for goods movements. Your company would like to be able to use certain materials not only in the base unit of measure but also in alternative units.

Product unit – this unit of measure describes the total quantity of a material as an alternative to the base unit of measure. The total or physical quantity can consist of several proportions.SAP . For example. you have to define: The planned conversion ratio in the material master The actual conversion ratio into the base unit of measure in the batch master You use batch-specific units of measure when the ratio for conversion from the unit of measure into the base unit of measure can differ from batch to batch. While the conversion ratio for the other alternative units of measure is fixed in the material master. for which you can define the conversion ratio into the base unit of measure on a batch-specific basis. for batch-specific material units.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Differences Batch-specific units of measure Batch- Product units Active ingredients © SAP AG 1999 The batch-specific material unit is an alternative unit of measure of a material. These alternative units of measure include: Proportion unit – this is the unit of measure in which you can enter proportions of the base unit of a material. (C) SAP AG LO955 15-5 . one piece of a particular batch weighs 10 kilograms in total or is a pipe of 1250 millimeters in length.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Use of Active Ingredients ? © SAP AG 1999 Active ingredients or concentrates are encountered above all in the production of basic materials in the following industries: Chemicals Pharmaceuticals Cosmetics Foodstuffs (C) SAP AG LO955 15-6 .SAP .

(C) SAP AG LO955 15-7 . The terms mixed quantity and telquel quantity are also common. they are stored together with carrier materials. 90%a.i. The situation is similar if materials contain impurities of varying degrees.i. The amount of active ingredient in a material is its active ingredient quantity. A material can contain more than one different active ingredient. The potency (of active ingredient) varies within a material to a certain degree.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Physical Quantity and Active Ingredient Quantity Full quantity: 500l Full quantity: 500l 50%a.SAP . Full quantity: 500l 92%a. w 45 Withdra liters of alcohol! © SAP AG 1999 If active ingredients are not suitable for storage on their own. A combination of a carrier material and an active ingredient is called a physical quantity or a weighed quantity.i.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Calculating the Quantity Calculating the Quantity Full quantity: 500l 50 Full 90% a. You can calculate how much physical quantity corresponds to an active ingredient quantity using a simple rule of three.i. Only the physical quantity (or the mixture) can be weighed. measured. or removed. (C) SAP AG LO955 15-8 .SAP .i.quantity: 500l 92% a. whether it is needed to manufacture a product or to deliver goods to a customer. 45 : X = 90 : 100 © SAP AG 1999 A certain amount of active ingredient is usually required.

Thus.i. (C) SAP AG LO955 15-9 . a skimmed milk product is cheaper than a product made with full-fat milk. The dilution of an acidic solution with a valueless carrier substance gives you the percentage of active ingredient in the acidic solution.SAP . Contains 100 I. insulin and penicillin are sold in units that reflect their potency. For example.U. The covering property of a color is an important factor in determining its grade.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Prices for Active Ingredients 45 g fat 85%a. © SAP AG 1999 The price of products containing active ingredients is normally based on the active ingredient potency.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Planned and Actual Active Ingredient Proportions Act. a certain active ingredient proportion for a product is required. values June Planned values May Order 91% 90% 92% © SAP AG 1999 The actual active ingredient proportion in a mixture can only be known when the mixture actually exists. (C) SAP AG LO955 15-10 . However.SAP . Until this point. This planned value is replaced by the actual value as soon as it is known. the concentrate in question is represented only by a planned value. The actual value will only be known for sure when the concentrate is actually delivered. however. for example. This is what a customer may assume about an acid concentrate for a product when ordering. He or she uses the available price list as a guide.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Use of Product Units © SAP AG 1999 Product units are used above all in the following industries: Steel Aluminium Paper Wood Textiles (C) SAP AG LO955 15-11 .

This planned value is replaced by the actual value as soon as it is known. the system uses the planned values for the material. The actual conversion factor of a batch is not usually known until goods are received. one particular piece of a material weighs 305 kilograms in total or is a coil weighing 610 kilograms. which are defined in the material master record.SAP . Until the conversion factor is known. For example. (C) SAP AG LO955 15-12 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch-Specific Calculation of the Product Quantity Material 4711 Planned value: 1 pc = 300 kg 1 coil = 600 kg 1 pc = 305 kg 1 coil = 610 kg 1 pc = 297 kg 1 coil = 594 kg Base UoM KG Alternative UoM Pc Batch Coil1 Batch Coil2 © SAP AG 1999 The product unit describes the total quantity of a material as an alternative to the base unit of measure.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch-Specific Units of Measure: Summary You are now able to: Describe the business background to batchspecific material units of measure Understand the most important issues and influencing factors involved in active ingredient management using product units © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 15-13 .SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure Contents: Batch Management as Prerequisite Batch-specific UoMs as an Attribute of a Batch Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure Batch-specific Units of Measure in Logistics © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 16-1 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. you will be able to: Outline the assumptions underlying the design of the batch-specific material units of measure Explain how the new functionality is integrated into the data environment of batch management and existing logistics processes © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 16-2 .SAP .

Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 16-3 . Quantity . Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act. and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration: Overview Diagram Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred.

You want to ascertain how this process is realized in the SAP System.SAP . it must be possible to use batchspecific units of measure in all Logistics applications. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 16-4 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration: Business Scenario In your company.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch Management Requirement as Prerequisite Act. This goal is easily achieved through the use of Batch Management. ingr. The conversion factor between the alternative unit of measure and the base unit of measure can also fluctuate. material Material with product unit 1 pc = 100 KG X 29 g/kg A Batch 31 g/kg B Batch 1 pc = 150 KG Y Batch Batch © SAP AG 1999 The active ingredient proportion of a material can fluctuate. For this reason. You can manage these stocks separately in terms of both quantity and value. The proportional variance is usually higher in the case of raw materials than in that of finished products.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 16-5 . Stocks of a material with varying active ingredient proportions or conversion factors between the alternative unit and the base unit of measure have to be managed separately. The use of Batch Management is an essential prerequisite for the use of Active Ingredient Management and Product Quantity Management. active ingredient proportions can only be reproduced in the R/3 system for materials that are subject to a batch management requirement.

It may also contain measured values and quality characteristics.5 milligrams platinum /KG A Batch Batch-specific unit 1 PC equals 110 KG Expires on 12.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch-specific UoMs as an Attribute of a Batch Contains 2. such as the expiration date and the last goods receipt date.SAP . Likewise.99 Melting point at 45° C © SAP AG 1999 The specification contains the description of the batch. The active ingredient proportion is one of the criteria that should be used to differentiate between batches of the same material. For this reason it is integrated into the batch specification.31. Important date specifications may also be included. (C) SAP AG LO955 16-6 . plus details concerning the usability of the batch and whether it is locked. which can be valuated differently from batch to batch. and so on. the conversion factor between alternative units of measure and base units of measure in a batch forms a characteristic.

SAP . and the material concerned must be able to be handled in batches. The active ingredient potency of a batch is stored in the batch's specification along with the batchspecific ratio between the alternative unit of measure and the base unit of measure. The characteristic values in the batch classification form the specification. Batch Management uses those features found in the classification system.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration of Batch-specific Units of Measure Batch management Classification © SAP AG 1999 In the R/3 System. To use batch-specific units of measure. batch-specific units of measure (active ingredient management and product units) are handled in Batch Management. (C) SAP AG LO955 16-7 . the class system must be in use. you must have Batch Management set up.

Differentiated prices for the alternative unit of measure can also be taken into account when valuating the inventory and determining the sales price.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Batch-specific Units of Measure in Logistics Batch-specific UoM BatchBatch management Procurement Warehouse mgmt A B Production Warehouse mgmt A B SD A A A Purch. order W/house © SAP AG 1999 Process/ production order Sales order W/house The use of batch-specific units of measure is a function in Logistics that covers more than one application. The active ingredient potency of a batch or the conversion factor between the batch's two units of measure is managed throughout the logistics chain. (C) SAP AG LO955 16-8 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Integration: Summary You are now able to: Outline the assumptions underlying the design of the batch-specific material units of measure Explain how the new functionality is integrated into the data environment of batch management and existing logistics processes © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 16-9 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management Contents: The Central Unit of Measure for Active Ingredients Relationship Between Units of Measure Maintenance of Units of Measurement in Customizing Percentage and User-defined Calculation Linking of Master Data I Linking of Master Data II Active Ingredient Content in the Specification Active Ingredient Characteristic: Special Features Classification Maintenance in the Material Master Maintenance of Units of Measure in the Material Master Activating Active Ingredient Management in Customizing © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 17-1 .SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. you will be able to: Describe the central role of proportion units within active ingredient management List the most important steps for maintaining data in active ingredient management Define units of measure and convert quantities from one unit into another Understand how the active ingredient content forms part of the batch specification Maintain active ingredient characteristics and batch classes © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 17-2 .

Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act. Quantity .Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 17-3 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept: Overview Diagram Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod.SAP .

Employees of the company familiarize themselves with the system requirements with regard to Customizing and the setting up of master data.SAP . © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 17-4 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept: Business Scenario Your company wishes to use Active Ingredient Management.

whereas the active ingredient is measured in proportion units. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-5 . In Logistics you may thus enter the active ingredient quantity instead of the physical quantity.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management The Central Unit of Measure for Active Ingredients Proportion unit BOM Sales Inventory mgmt Purchasing C B A B B © SAP AG 1999 The proportion unit can be seen as a core element which is found throughout the applications and is used to reproduce the active ingredient potency of a material. The physical quantity is measured in base units of measure. The conversion between the proportion unit and the base unit of measure is continuously maintained in the background and can be displayed by each of the respective applications.SAP .

In this example. The grams of active ingredient relate to one liter of the physical quantity. The proportion unit relates to the active ingredient. GAI has been defined as the proportion unit. i.e. for the specific purpose of "measuring an active ingredient". ingr. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-6 . GAI Grams of active ingredient per liter = Base unit of measure Liter G/L L © SAP AG 1999 The base unit of measure is the leading unit of measure for a material containing active ingredients.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Relationship Between Units of Measure Proportion unit Ratio Grams of act.SAP . the system converts this to the base unit of measure before posting. This ratio is recorded in the unit of measurement G/L. the active ingredient is measured in grams. The postings are carried out in this unit. This ratio constitutes a separate unit of measurement. If an entry is made in a proportion unit. You define a conversion ratio in order to convert quantities between the proportion unit and the base unit of measure. different proportion units must also be defined in order to be able to clearly differentiate between the ingredients. If several active ingredients have to be represented for a material.

GC Grams of concentrate Proportion units Measures an act. In Customizing for Active Ingredient Management. a unit of measurement is assigned the role of the proportion unit.. ingr.. However. Liter Grams of concentrate Dimension Volume GCL Grams of concentrate/liter Nondimensional Should be treated as. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-7 . Units of measurement to be used as proportion units may not be assigned to a dimension. of Units of Measurement in Customizing L GC Units of meas. Active ingredients are measured in it.SAP . Gram © SAP AG 1999 All units of measurement to be used in Active Ingredient Management must have previously been defined in Customizing. Some of the most common units of measurement for active ingredients are supplied with the standard system. To facilitate conversion into a standard unit of measure.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Maint. a self-chosen definition for an active ingredient proportion can be entered as a unit of measurement at any time and designated an allowed proportion unit. the self-defined unit of measurement is assigned a reference.

If the relationship is user-defined.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Percentage and User-defined Calculation % calculation User-def. and allocated to a characteristic unit of measurement. The relationship between the potency of the active ingredient and the base quantity is stored in Customizing. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-8 .SAP . any formula can be stored that describes the relationship between proportion unit and base unit of measure. the active ingredient quantity can be calculated from the base quantity. If the relationship is measured by percentage. calculation Characteristic units of measure measure the active ingredient proportion in relation to the base unit of measure © SAP AG 1999 If the active ingredient proportion for a batch is known. the conversion is specified by definition.

Each batch has its own specification. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-9 . This is achieved in the R/3 system through use of Batch Management. The ratio between the active ingredient content and the physical quantity is stored in a batch characteristic and thus becomes part of the specification.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Linking of Master Data I Characteristic act. cont. the ratio between the active ingredient and the base quantity is linked to a characteristic. The ratio thus becomes the unit of measurement of the characteristic.SAP . the material stocks with different specifications should be managed separately from each other. and the active ingredient content stored as the value assigned to the characteristic. If this content is not constant. The active ingredient characteristic contains information regarding which active ingredient is involved and the relationship between the proportion of the physical quantity the ingredient represents and the base unit of measure. A A A Batch 3 Batch 1 Batch 2 Batch class Specification passed on Material © SAP AG 1999 The active ingredient content of a material forms part of its specification. Batch specifications are stored in characteristics of the Classification System. For this reason. The material transfers the information to its batches. ingr.

Ratio G/L Characteristic act. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-10 . ingr.SAP . The information for conversion beween active ingredient and physical quantity is adopted in the material master. cont.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Linking of Master Data II Material master View I = Ingr. Unit of meas. G/L Batch class GAI <=> L © SAP AG 1999 Active ingredient characteristics are assigned the special view 'S' within the batch class. Characteristics with this view are recognized during material master maintenance.

1 . 20 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Active Ingredient Content in the Specification Material master Density 0.23. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-11 . cont. either it is mandatory for the batch values to lie within the limits defined in the material master or these values are merely taken as defaults from that source. ingr. The active ingredient contents of the individual batches are checked against the data in the material master. Depending on the system settings. the material passes on its specification to the batch.100 % Batch Density 1. Since the active ingredient content is part of the specification of the material and its individual batches.5 g/ccm Act.SAP .1g/ccm Act. the same logic applies. ingr.5 G/L Covering power 50 . content 22 G/L Covering power 80 % © SAP AG 1999 In Batch Management in the R/3 System.

The characteristic must be numeric and have a single value. you should define one characteristic for each active ingredient. a unique assignment is created. The relationship between active ingredient content and physical quantity must be specified as a unit of measurement when you create the characteristic.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Active Ingredient Characteristic: Special Features Which active ingredient ? Data type: numeric! What is the ratio? Value assgt. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-12 .SAP . In this way. For this reason.: single value! Citrus aroma type 8334 GAI G/L = L © SAP AG 1999 The characteristic description specifies the active ingredient to which the data relates.

4 G/L Flavors .0. content Citrus aroma 0. ingr. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-13 .2 . The entry in the material master is the planned value that is either mandatory or optional depending on how the classification data has been maintained.Lemon © SAP AG 1999 The active ingredient characteristic is assigned to the batch class and a value is assigned to it in the material master.SAP . As in the case of other batch characteristics.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Classification Maintenance in the Material Master View: Classification Shelf life expiration date Material Class type: Batches Class for 'fruit juices' Act. you can specify either an interval or a discrete value.Orange .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Maintaining Units of Measurement in Mat. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-14 .3 G/L Prop. If the actual active ingredient content of a batch is not known for a certain transaction. the system uses the planned value from the material master.SAP . any active ingredient characteristics are known to the system. Citrus aroma Material Pl. unit GAI GK <=> L X 30 Prop. Master View: Proportion/product unit of measure UoM Grams/liter Char. The planned value specifies the assumed mixing ratio between active ingredient and physical quantity in the characteristic unit of measurement. unit <=> GC <=> Y 100 Base UoM Liter © SAP AG 1999 After the classification view has been maintained. The planned value for the conversion between active ingredient and physical quantity is transferred to the units of measure table automatically. value 0. You must complete the information in the Proportion/Product Unit view: The system expects a planned value for the active ingredient proportion.

SAP . the active ingredient data is ready to be maintained in the material master.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Activating Active Ingredient Mgmt in Customizing Material Activate active ingredient mgmt? Yes © SAP AG 1999 You can make several Customizing settings for Active Ingredient Management in the system before the component is activated. After the component is activated. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-15 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept: Summary You are now able to: Describe the central role of proportion units within active ingredient management Explain how units of measure are defined and how to convert quantities from one unit into another Understand how the active ingredient content forms part of the batch specification © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 17-16 .SAP .

A##). If you define your own entry. V##). You want to be able to use both the material quantity. Remember that this unit must be nondimensional. you will be able to: • Create your own units of measurement and define them as proportion units and conversion ratios You have a material that contains a key active ingredient. Enter a key ending with your group number (for example. and also the quantity of active ingredient that the material contains.SAP . 1-2 Create a unit of measurement (for the characteristic or the ratio of active ingredient to base unit of measure) Create another unit of measurement for the ratio between physical quantity and active ingredient quantity. and you must enter the ratio between active ingredient quantity and physical quantity. The entry must not be longer than three characters. enter a key ending with your group number (for example. You need a separate unit of measurement for the active ingredient. The entry of an ISO code on the Details screen for the unit of measurement is not mandatory. The entry of an ISO code on the Details screen for the unit of measurement is not mandatory. You want to change the logistical processing of the material.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-1 Exercises Unit: Topic: Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management Creating Proportion Units and Conversion Ratios At the conclusion this exercise. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-17 . 1-1 Create a unit of measurement (for the active ingredient) Create a separate unit of measurement for your active ingredient that is to serve as a proportion unit. as you have done up to now. Do not use percentage ratios. The entry must not be longer than three characters. You begin by maintaining Customizing. You want to achieve this objective using Active Ingredient Management.

and an appropriate base unit of measure of your choice (see note below). use the proportion unit defined in 1-1. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-18 . Enter the unit of measurement in the table of proportion units and choose a suitable reference unit. Make sure that the component B is managed in the base unit of measure KG (kilogram). 1-4 Define ratio unit Define the ratio between physical quantity and active ingredient quantity for the unit of measurement from 1-2 [V##]. The base unit of measure that you use in the ratio should belong to the same dimension (mass). To do this.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-3 Define proportion unit Assign the unit of measurement from 1-1 [A##] the role of the proportion unit.

You want to show the actual active ingredient content of each individual batch in the system. The data type should be numerical. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-19 . To do this. The active ingredient should be clearly designated in the characteristic description. 1-2 Assign active ingredient characteristic to class Data has already been prepared for your group. The characteristic value assignment should consist of a single value. The status should be released. you defined a unit of measurement for a conversion ratio between physical quantity and active ingredient quantity.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-2 Exercises Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management Topic: Creating Master Data in the Classification System At the conclusion this exercise. Assign your characteristic to your class AICL00010## for the view S. • • • Use this unit of measurement as the unit for your characteristic. In the previous exercise. 1-1 Create active ingredient characteristic In the classification system. you will be able to: • Maintain active ingredient characteristics and batch classes You want to specify the expected active ingredient content in the material master record.SAP . create a characteristic that satisfies the following requirements: • • • • • The key should end with your group number. you must maintain master data for the active ingredient in the classification system. Define a value interval for the characteristic. Enter all other format data as desired.

• • • Active Ingredient Management is activated in the training system. you will be able to: • Extend the batch classification in the material master • Use proportion units and maintain planned values You want to maintain the active ingredient data for a material. Change the material. Choose AI-1202-0##. Choose a proportion unit 1-1-3 Check the conversion ratio in the unit of measure table in the material master. 1-1 Maintain active ingredient data for a material Check the data sheet to see which materials have been prepared for your group. A batch management requirement and individual batch valuation have been specified for your material master record AI-1202-0##. In your batch class. 1-1-2 Enter data in the Proportion/Product Unit view. 1-1-1 Complete the classification data. You want to enter a planned value for the active ingredient content in the material master. Assign values to your active ingredient characteristic. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-20 . To use the proportion unit. the application view S is set in the basis data. You want to store an allowed value interval for the active ingredient content of batches in the material master record. you must first: • • Assign a planned value to the ratio active ingredient/physical quantity.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-3 Exercises Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management Topic: Material Master Maintenance from the Active Ingredient Management Viewpoint At the conclusion this exercise.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management (C) SAP AG LO955 17-21 .

commercial Values A## A## A## For example. Goto → SAP Reference IMG) Global Settings → Check units of measurement Pushbutton Units of measurement (nondimensional) Unit of measurement . technical 1-2 Create a unit of measurement (for the characteristic or the ratio of active ingredient to base unit of measure) Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. ‘AI’ Unit of measurement text. ‘active ingredient’ For example.Create Field name or data type Internal unit of measurement Commercial format Technical format Unit of measurement text.Create Field name or data type Internal unit of measurement Commercial format Technical format Unit of measurement text.SAP . commercial Values V## V## V## For example. ‘active ingredient proportion’ LO955 17-22 (C) SAP AG .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-1 Solutions Unit: Topic: Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management Creating Proportion Units and Conversion Ratios 1-1 Create a unit of measurement (for the active ingredient) Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project Goto → SAP Reference IMG) Global Settings → Check units of measurement Pushbutton Units of measurement (nondimensional) Unit of measurement .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Unit of measurement text. However. Field name or data type Reference unit Values A## or KG Proportion/product unit of measure A## 1-4 Define ratio unit Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. you could measure a characteristic in percent and specify in the material master that the A## proportion is thus to be measured in relation to kilograms. It should be capable of being used as a proportion unit. technical 1-3 Define proportion unit For example. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-23 . Goto → SAP Reference IMG) Logistics . Goto → SAP Reference IMG) Logistics . ‘AIP’ Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. you can also enter kilogram4. Also enter A## as the reference unit of measure.General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Unit of Measure → Calculate Proportional Factors → Define Calculation of Proportional Quantity from Base Quantity Pushbutton New entry Field name or data type Unit of measurement of characteristic Proportion/product unit Values V## A## KG Base unit of measure 4 In this way.General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure → Edit Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure Make a new entry for the unit of measure A##.SAP . Step 1-4 would not then apply.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-2 Solutions Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management Topic: Creating Master Data in the Classification System 1-1 Create active ingredient characteristic Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics or Logistics → Central Functions → Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics Note the instructions in the exercise text. 1-2 Assign active ingredient characteristic to class Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Classification System → Master Data → Classes or Logistics → Central Functions → Classification System → Master Data → Classes Class → Change Assign your characteristic to your class AICL00010## for the view S.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 17-24 .

1-1-2 In the Basic Data view. but must be within the allowed range for the characteristic A## (new proportion unit in which the active ingredient is measured) Proportion/product unit 1-1-3 In the Proportion/Product Unit view. choose the Proportion/Product Unit view. Enter A in the Units meas.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management-3 Solutions Unit: Data Concept in Active Ingredient Management Topic: Material Master Maintenance from the Active Ingredient Management Viewpoint 1-1 Maintain active ingredient data for a material Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately 1-1-1 In the Classification view. click the tab page button and choose Units of measure. under Additional data. use field.SAP . Enter the required data. Field name or data type Planned value Values Any. (C) SAP AG LO955 17-25 . assign values to the active ingredient characteristic.

SAP . Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Create Purchasing view (Batch mgmt reqmt indicator) Accounting view (Valuation category indicator = X) (C) SAP AG LO955 17-26 . Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Classification System → Master Data → Classes • A batch management requirement and individual batch valuation have been specified for your material master record AI-1202-0##.General → Batch Management → BatchSpecific Material Units of Measure → Activate BatchSpecific Material Unit of Measure • In your batch class. the application view S is set in the basis data. Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management • Active Ingredient Management is activated in the training system. Goto → SAP Reference IMG) Logistics .

Ingredients Valuation Based on Several Active Ingredients Sales Price Based on Active Ingredients © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 18-1 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Active Ingredient Prices Contents: Standard Price per Active Ingredient Valuation of Single Batches Based on Act.SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Active Ingredient Prices: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit.SAP . you will be able to: Create a valuation record for an active ingredient Base the valuation price of a batch on individual prices for the active ingredients Create a price condition record for an active ingredient © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 18-2 .

Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 18-3 .SAP . and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Active Ingredient Prices: Overview Diagram Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. Quantity . Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Active Ingredient Prices: Business Scenario Your company needs to value and price its batches by the amount of active ingredient the batch contains. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 18-4 .

50 per proportion unit © SAP AG 1999 You can store a valuation price for an active ingredient in a valuation record.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Standard Price per Active Ingredient Proportion unit Material Valuation area Orange juice 1000 GAI Standard price: 0. This means that if you want to carry out evaluations in a material based on several active ingredients. (C) SAP AG LO955 18-5 . you must use different proportion units. It is calculated by combining the material number of the material containing the active ingredient. the valuation area. The price is always a standard price. and the proportion unit in which the active ingredient is measured. The name of the active ingredient cannot be entered.SAP .

This yields the active ingredient quantity contained in the batch stock. If you multiply the quantity with the active ingredient price.50 per GAI (gram of active ingred. Price fluctuations between batches can occur if they have different potencies of active ingredient.SAP . The active ingredient price is taken from the corresponding valuation record.3 G/L Active ingredient quantity: 30 GAI Value of active ingredient: $15 Standard price of batch: 0.15 / L Valuation for a single batch is a prerequisite if you wish to calculate a valuation price based on the active ingredient. you get the value of the batch stock. The active ingredient characteristic for a batch is assigned values using the active ingredient proportion.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Valuation of Single Batches Based on Act. (C) SAP AG LO955 18-6 . It is a standard price and does not change. Ingredients A Batch 2 $0. You get the standard price per base unit of measure for each batch in relation to the physical quantity.) Physical quantity: 100 L A A Batch 1 Batch 3 Valuation of single batches X Material © SAP AG 1999 Actual proportion of active ingredient: 0.

You can flag several active ingredients in a material as Valuated proportion. value. value 0. unit Valuated prop.SAP . citrus aroma Active ingr.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Valuation Based on Several Active Ingredients Material Char. Citrus aroma Fruit juice concentrate Pl. the Valuated proportion indicator must be set in the material master record. This value in relation to the batch stock in the base unit of measure yields the standard price for the batch. The sum of all the individual active ingredient values then constitute the total batch value. (C) SAP AG LO955 18-7 . GAI GK 1 1 Act. value: fruit juice concentrate © SAP AG 1999 Σ Total value of batch For each active ingredient that is to be assigned an active ingredient price. ingr.3 G/L 10 % View: Proportion/product unit of measure UoM Gram/liter Percent Prop.

The sales price can be composed of the individual prices of several different active ingredients.50 per 1 GAI © SAP AG 1999 The condition record can be defined on the basis of the proportion unit.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 18-8 . The active ingredient quantities are added together. The sales price based on the active ingredient quantity is calculated as follows: The actual active ingredient quantity is calculated for each split item in the delivery. The sales price is taken for the cumulated active ingredients. This means that you can base the sales price either on the physical quantity or the active ingredient quantity.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Sales Price Based on Active Ingredients Condition unit = Proportion unit Sales Customer price of active ingredient: $0.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Active Ingredient Prices: Unit Summary You are now able to: Create a valuation record for an active ingredient Base the valuation price of a batch on individual prices for the active ingredients Create a price condition record for an active ingredient © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 18-9 .

This valuation only takes one active ingredient into account. Do this for material AI-1202-0## and the proportion unit you have created. 1-1 Valuation based on active ingredients You need a valuation record for material AI-1202-0## that is based on the active ingredient proportion. You want to store a sales price for the active ingredient and therefore base a price condition on this active ingredient. Enter a measured standard price for your active ingredient. Flag the active ingredient as a valuated proportion. Change your material again. The plant is specified on the data sheet.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Active Ingredient Prices Exercises Unit: Active Ingredient Prices Topic: Valuation Price and Sales Price for an Active Ingredient At the conclusion of this exercise. You must maintain the material master and specify a standard price for the active ingredient in the system. Note how the system recalculates the standard price for the material. 1-2 Create a valuation record for the active ingredient. Go to the Proportion/Product Unit view: Flag your active ingredient as a valuated proportion.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 18-10 . Check this if you are not sure. you will be able to: • Allow characteristic value assignment for an active ingredient in the material master • Create a valuation record for an active ingredient • Create a price condition record for an active ingredient You want to valuate a single batch of a material. You know that the valuation for a single batch function is active for this material.

Display the material in base units of measure and in proportion units (A##). Hint: Select Extras/Units Allowed to change the unit of measure.SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-3 Post an ‘other’ goods receipt of 1000 KG each to two new batches of material AI1202-0##. do not assign characteristic values. Call up the stock overview for material AI-1202-0##. What do you find? 1-4 (C) SAP AG LO955 18-11 . In the other batch. In one of the batches. enter a value that is different from the planned value of the active ingredient.

On what sold quantity is the sales price now based? 2-3 (C) SAP AG LO955 18-12 . 2-2 Post an ‘other’ goods receipt of 1000 L to a new batch for material AI-1000-0##. On what is the sales price based? On what sold quantity is the sales price based? 2-3-2 For your sales order item. For the active ingredient characteristic. The required organizational levels and the customer number are specified on the data screen. 2-3-3 Go again to the price conditions for the item. To do this. The price condition is based on the active ingredient component. you need a sales price that is based on the active ingredient proportion. choose the active ingredient unit as a condition unit. The sales organization and the distribution channel are contained on the data screen. Create a price condition for the finished material. Create a standard order of 100 liters of AI-1000-0##.SAP . enter the batch number created in 2-2. enter a value that is different from the planned value of the active ingredient. 2-3-1 Go to the price conditions for the item.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 2-1 Base sales price on active ingredient proportion For the finished material AI-1000-0##.

(C) SAP AG LO955 18-13 .SAP . Activate the Valuated proportion field. Values AI-1202-0## Accounting view 1 Flag the active ingredient as a valuated proportion Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Field name or data type Material View Values AI-1202-0## Basic data Complete the Proportion/Product Unit view under Additional data.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Active Ingredient Prices Solutions Unit: Active Ingredient Prices Topic: Valuation Price and Sales Price for an Active Ingredient 1-1 Valuation based on active ingredients Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Create or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Display Field name or data type Material View Valuation category = X is set.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 Create valuation record Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Units of Measure → Standard Price → Create Field name or data type Material Plant Unit of measure Values AI-1202-0## 1100 A## 1-3 ‘Other’ goods receipt Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management→ Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → Other Field name or data type Material Plant Storage location Item 1: Quantity Batch number Active ingredient proportion Item 2: Quantity Batch number Active ingredient proportion 1000 KG Any Enter a value that differs from the planned value 1000 KG Any Do not valuate Values AI-1202-0## 1100 0001 (C) SAP AG LO955 18-14 .

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

1-4

Stock overview Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Environment → Stock → Stock overview or Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Stock → Stock overview The system displays the appropriate active ingredient proportion for the valuated batch. The system displays the non-valuated batch with the planned value in the stock overview. The display in KG shows that both batches have the same quantity.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

18-15

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

2-1

Base sales price on active ingredient proportion Change material Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately

Field name or data type Material View Organizational levels Plant Storage location Sales organization Distribution channel

Values AI-1000-0## Sales and distribution: SalesOrgData 1 Values 1100 0001 22

Choose Conditions and enter a sales price that is based on the proportion unit LI1 of the active ingredient the material contains. 2-2 ‘Other’ goods receipt Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management→ Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → Other Field name or data type Material Plant Storage location Quantity Batch number Active ingredient proportion Values AI-1000-0## 1100 0001 1000 L Any Enter a value that differs from the planned value

(C) SAP AG

LO955

18-16

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

2-3

Create standard order Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Field name or data type Order type Sales organization Distribution channel Division Customer PO number Material Quantity 2-3-1 Check price conditions

Values Standard order 1020 22 00. 7777 Any AI-1000-0## 100 liters

Goto → Item → Conditions: The sales price is based on the proportion unit of the active ingredient in material A1-1000-0##, going by the planned value, as no batches have been received yet. 2-3-2 Enter batch number Item detail: Enter the batch whose characteristic value differs from the planned value 2-3-3 Check price conditions Goto → Item → Conditions: The sales price is based on the proportion unit of the active ingredient in the batch entered for the item. The active ingredient proportion is different from the planned value. The sales price for the 100 liters of AI-1000-0## is now more expensive or less expensive than before.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

18-17

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions

Contents:
Planned and Actual Values in the Master Data From Planned Value to Actual Value Inventory Correction Factor

© SAP AG 1999

(C) SAP AG

LO955

19-1

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Actual and Planned Values: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Explain how planned and actual values are used in Active Ingredient Management Outline the purpose and effect of the inventory correction factor

© SAP AG 1999

(C) SAP AG

LO955

19-2

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Actual and Planned Values: Overview Diagram
Batch Specification and Quality Management

Batch

Active Ingredient Prices

Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. Management Design and Data Concept
© SAP AG 1999

Act. and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod. Quantity - Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers

Batch

Summary

(C) SAP AG

LO955

19-3

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Actual and Planned Values: Business Scenario

Your company wants to be able to map all logistics processes on the basis of the active ingredients contained in batches of a material. It should be possible to use the typical active ingredient proportion in the relevant material as the basis for stock displays, Controlling projections, and MRP runs also in the case of ingredient proportions that have not yet been valuated.

© SAP AG 1999

(C) SAP AG

LO955

19-4

the job-order costing uses the actual value in its calculations. As soon as the batches have been determined. a corresponding open document item is processed in active ingredient quantities. Up to this point. The system can then replace the planned value with the actual value. A batch must have been entered by the goods movement stage at the latest.SAP . Thus invoice verification operates with actual values. The goods receipt for the order is always carried out in physical quantities. order Reservation Process/ production order Job-order costing Delivery Goods movement Goods movement Invoice verification ? = Actual values © SAP AG 1999 We begin the logistics chain by procuring a component through an ordering transaction. We order a certain quantity of active ingredient. It is only at this point that we can enter the actual value for the batch and trigger any corrections needed to the quantity of goods received.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management From Planned Value to Actual Value Planned values Bill of material Sales order Purch. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-5 . If the target quantity is entered in active ingredient quantities. The active ingredient quantity can be entered in all documents with the exception of the production order (process order). only the planned active ingredient was known. The results of the calculation may change if there is an active ingredient price in the stock valuation of the components.

Citrus aroma Fruit juice concentrate Plan value 0.SAP . It is part of the batch's specification and is used to valuate the active ingredient characteristic.3 G/L 10 % Leading proport. 1 Actual value 0. The actual value is only assigned to a batch that actually exists.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Planned and Actual Values in the Master Data Material View: Proportion/ product unit A Batch Char. There can only be one leading active ingredient. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-6 . If an active ingredient is taken into account for planning purposes. The system works with this value as long as the batch has not yet been selected for a business transaction.28 G/L © SAP AG 1999 The planned value for an active ingredient proportion is specified in the material master record. the 'leading proportion' indicator must be set in the material master record.

0. The inventory correction factor does not have any influence on the total stock and does not trigger an inventory posting. The stock overview remains unchanged. ing. The available amount can be corrected for planning purposes using the inventory correction factor. 0. In this way. Val. The inventory correction factor works in the following way: the warehouse stock is corrected temporarily for planning purposes before it is included in the calculation of available quantity.SAP .2 liters act. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-7 . The effect it has may be seen in the “current stock/requirement” and “total availability” list displays. less or more quantity is actually available than identified in the stock overview. per liter Quantity 100 liters Correction factor t Current stock/reqmt overview Overview of availability 2 New available quantity: 200 liters © SAP AG 1999 The planned value for an active ingredient proportion can differ slightly from the average actual value of all the batches of a material.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Inventory Correction Factor Pc May Material: Plan val. per liter Quantity 100 liters Batch: Act. ing.1 liters act.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Actual and Planned Values: Summary You are now able to: Explain how planned and actual values are used in Active Ingredient Management Outline the purpose and effect of the inventory correction factor © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 19-8 .

K. purchasing organization IDES Germany. Order the material AI-1201-0##. choose Delivery. purchasing group Zuse. which is measured in the proportion unit KI1. You should therefore maintain the tolerances accordingly. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-9 . 1-1-1 Create a new purchase order for vendor 100. Only the physical quantity can be determined in goods receipt. You will not find out how much active ingredient the goods receipt contains until quality inspection. Order 40 units of the active ingredient for next week. 1-1 The material AI-1201-0## contains an active ingredient. you will be able to: • Create a purchase order for an active ingredient • Post the goods receipt in physical quantities • Determine the active ingredient content in quality inspection • Post the invoice verification document for the active ingredient quantity actually received You want to buy an active ingredient. It is your job to purchase the material. You want to pay the invoice only for the quantity of active ingredient you have received. 100 KG are delivered. Enter the purchase order price of your choice. Do not valuate the characteristic active ingredient.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-1 Exercises Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions Topic: External Procurement of an Active Ingredient At the conclusion of this exercise. Remember that the quantity of active ingredient that is actually delivered may slightly differ from the quantity ordered. Enter a batch number of your choice or accept a number assigned manually. 1-1-2 On the item detail screen. company code SAP Germany. 1-2 Goods receipt of the material containing active ingredients 1-2-1 The base unit of measure for material AI-1201-0## is KG.SAP . You can only store a certain active ingredient content in the goods receipt. Which active ingredient proportion do you choose? 1-2-2 Post the goods receipt for the purchase order in the base unit of measure.

Make sure that you enter a value that does not correspond with the planned value from the material master. Enter a value that is within the tolerances.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-3 1-4 Display the purchase order history. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-10 . 1-8-1 Trigger a posting that is based on the goods entry inspection lot for the purchase order. An adjustment posting for the goods receipt is thus required. 1-6-2 Record the usage decision. 1-8 Quality inspection has found that the active ingredient content does not correspond with the planned value. Display the Financial Accounting screen for material AI-1202-0## at batch level and compare the values with the results obtained in 1-5. The batch is released. Choose the inspection lot. The active ingredient of material AI-1201-0## has its own valuation price. Which price control does the valuation type have (= batch)? 1-5 1-6 The goods receipt for material AI-1201-0## may be found in quality inspection. Display batch classification. Display the valuation record for this active ingredient. 1-7 Batch classification has been assigned values from QM. Check the result. You should have just measured the active ingredient content. and the stock. Make a note of the standard price of the active ingredient and the material. the standard price. 1-8-2 Check the purchase order history once again.SAP . Close the characteristic. What do you find? 1-9 You want to know the actual value of the batch. 1-6-1 Call up results recording for the incoming inspection lot. The whole goods receipt is to be posted to unrestricted stock. The material is to be valuated for a single batch Display the Financial Accounting screen for material AI-1201-0## at batch level and make a note of the moving average price.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-10 In Invoice Verification. 1-10-2 Check the result in the purchase order history.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 19-11 . 1-10-1 Create the invoice document for the order and preview the document before you save it. you create the invoice using the quantities that were actually delivered to you.

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management (C) SAP AG LO955 19-12 .

The proportion differs slightly from the planned value.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-3 Exercises Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions Topic: Inventory Correction At the conclusion of this exercise. you will be able to: • Post a goods receipt from Production without using a production order • Carry out an inventory correction when the actual active ingredient proportion is different from the planned value • Display the available quantity of a material in the base unit of measure and in the proportion unit You produce the finished product and enter the active ingredient proportion at the goods receipt stage. 1-1-1 Set the active ingredient characteristic as the leading proportion for material AI-1000-0##. Find out the planned value. You want to include this information in your schedule and therefore you must correct the basis for your planning. The planned active ingredient proportion has not quite been attained. Planned value: _____________________________________________ 1-1-2 Without using a production order. 1-1 You produce the finished product AI-1000-0##. post an ‘other’ goods receipt with movement type 521 to any new batch (or several new batches).SAP . Assign characteristic values to the batch(es) accordingly. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-13 . It is managed in the base unit of measure liter.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 The available quantity for the finished product AI-1000-0## is still displayed for the planned value. you carry out an inventory correction for the finished product. you must make corrections to the stock. For planning purposes. Make a note of the available quantity. Carry out the inventory correction in processing mode. In the base unit of measure In the proportion unit Available quantity in base unit of measure: _________________ Available quantity in proportion unit: ________________ 1-2-2 Create a second session. 1-2-1 Call the current stock/requirements list for the finished product. Switch on the display of the available quantity in proportion units. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-14 . How has the available quantity changed? In the base unit of measure In the proportion unit Why has it changed? _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________ 1-2-4 Call up the stock overview and check that the warehouse stocks are displayed correctly in every unit of measure that has been defined.SAP . Here. Output a list that also contains the batches. 1-2-3 Then update the current stock/requirements list.

choose Delivery.→ Vendor/Supplying Plant Known Field name or data type Vendor Purchasing org. which is measured in the proportion unit KI1. K SAP Germany 1100 / Berlin 0001 AI-1201-0## 40 KI1 Next week Any 1-1-2 On the item detail screen. or choose the Unlimited indicator. Maintain the tolerances for overdelivery as a percentage.SAP . 1-1-1 Create purchase order Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-15 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-1 Solutions Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions Topic: External Procurement of an Active Ingredient 1-1 The material AI-1201-0## contains an active ingredient. Purchasing group Company code Plant Storage location Material Quantity Delivery date Price Values 100 1000 / IDES Germany 007 / Zuse. It is your job to purchase the material.

(C) SAP AG LO955 19-16 . which is the exact ordered quantity. you assume that it contains the planned value of 40% of active ingredient.SAP . 1-2-2 Post the goods receipt via Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement. 40 KW1. that is. 1-3 Display the purchase order history. 1-4 Display valuation price Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Units of Measure → Standard Price → Display Field name or data type Material Plant Proportion/product unit Values AI-1201-0## 1100 KI1 The valuation price for 100 KI1 is 15 UNI. Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Display → Item details → PO history The system displays the goods receipt. Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → PO Number Known.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 Goods receipt of the material containing active ingredients 1-2-1 When 100 KG of the material is delivered. The ordered quantity has been delivered (40 KI1). Field name or data type PO number Quantity Batch Active ingredient Values See exercise 1-1 100 KG Any Do not valuate Note: You can also post the goods receipt via the transaction MB01.

This price is based on the assumption that the base unit of measure contains the same active ingredient proportion as specified in the planned value.Lock [or choose the lock icon &]. Values AI-1201-0## 9999 (C) SAP AG LO955 19-17 . Double-click line 9999 Check with material specification for work center in the left frame. The system will find one inspection lot and display it in the frame on the left-hand side. 1-6-1 Enter inspection result: Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording Search for the inspection lots for your material AI-1202-0##.Choose [or the magnifying glass icon < ]: xQuer = differs from the planned value.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-5 Display the accounting view of the material AI-1201-0## at batch level Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Create or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Display Field name or data type Material View Organizational levels Plant Batch = valuation category Values AI-1201-0## Accounting view 1 Values 1100 See exercise 1-2-2 The system displays the price per base unit of measure. Save. 1-6 The goods receipt for material AI-1201-0## may be found in quality inspection. (by-pass any dialog boxes by choosing Accept).SAP . Field name Material Operation 10 On the entry screen: Select the item and click Edit . Edit .

prompting you to post the quantity concerned (100 KG) to the appropriate stock type: Enter 100 in the line To unrestricted and save again. The delivered quantity is greater than the ordered quantity.→ Purchase Order → Display Item details → PO history The system displays two goods receipts. 1-8-1 Subsequent adjustment with reference to inspection lot Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch-specific Units of Measure → Subsequent Adjustment f. 1-9 Display the accounting view of the material AI-1201-0## at batch level Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Create or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Display Field name or data type (C) SAP AG Values LO955 19-18 .SAP . Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch → Display or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Batch → Display The result from QM has been transferred. Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording Double-click the line with inspection number 5000…in the left-hand frame. A dialog box then appears. 1-7 Display batch classification.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-6-2 Enter the usage decision. which reflects the difference between the measured actual value and the planned value of the active ingredient. Goods Receipt → Enter with Ref. the system created a second goods receipt. As a result of the subsequent adjustment (exercise 1-9-1). 1-8 An adjustment posting for the goods receipt is thus required. to Insp. use F4 help to enter an acceptance without further action and save the usage decision. On the entry screen: In the UD code field. Lot 1-8-2 Display PO history Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing. The batch has a value that differs from the planned value for the active ingredient characteristic.

(C) SAP AG LO955 19-19 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Material View Organizational levels Plant Batch = valuation category AI-1201-0## Accounting view 1 Values 1100 See exercise 1-2-2 The batch is now valuated differently due to the different active ingredient content.SAP .

. See exercise 1-1 The system accepts the invoice. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-20 .. This is because of the overdelivery that was posted for the purchase order. The overdelivery was possible because a tolerance was entered for the PO item.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-10 Effects in Invoice Verification 1-10-1 Enter invoice Logistics → Materials Management → Invoice Verification → Logistics Invoice Verification → Document Entry → Enter Invoice Field name or data type Document date Amount Tax amount Reference to PO number Values Today Invoiced value of goods + tax Tax amount PO/scheduling agreement 45. even though the amount specified is higher than planned..SAP .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-2 Solutions Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions Topic: Process Orders and Job-order Costing 1-1 Create process order Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process order → Create → With material Field name or data type Material Plant Order type Total qty Start date Values AI-1200 1100 PI01 80 KW1 Today 1-2 Extend material list Goto → Material list Include the third item: Field name or data type Material Requirement qty Item category Operations Values AI-1201-0## 10 KG L 10 1-3 Determine and display costs Process order → Functions → Determine costs Goto → Costs → Itemization The costs are displayed with the current valuation of the stocks at the moving average price at plant level. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-21 . not at the planned value.SAP .

select your component that is subject to batch management AI-1202-0## and choose Material → Batch management → Carry out determination Choose a batch.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-4 Batch determination for material AI-1201-0## When you create or change a process order. It is advisable to choose a batch containing an active ingredient proportion that differs from the planned value for the active ingredient. 1-5 Determine and display costs Process order → Functions → Determine costs Goto → Costs → Itemization The system displays the costs for material AI-1201-0## using the stocks’current valuation at batch level. 1-6 Release and save process order Process order → Functions → Release Process order → Save (C) SAP AG LO955 19-22 .SAP .

1000 LSL for example. 0.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions-3 Solutions Unit: Actual and Planned Values of AI Proportions Topic: Inventory Correction 1-1 Production for a finished material and batch valuation at goods receipt 1-1-1 Leading proportion of an active ingredient in material Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Field name or data type Material View Values AI-1000-0## Basic data Additions → Proportion/Product Unit view Set the active ingredient characteristic AIC020## as the leading proportion.3000 LSL or 0. The planned value is 0.→ Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → Other Field name or data type Movement type Plant Storage location Material Quantity Batch number Active ingredient proportion Values 521 1100 0001 AI-1000-0## 100 liters Any Not 0.10000 LSL (LSL = LW1 per liter) 1-1-2 ‘Other’ goods receipt without reference to production order Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management.02 LSL (C) SAP AG LO955 19-23 .SAP .

SAP . 1-2-2 Carry out inventory correction for material AI-1000-0##. The available quantity in proportion units remains unchanged by the inventory correction. enter liter (= base unit of measure) and in the second field. 1-2-3 Current stock/requirements list for material AI-1000-0## in plant 1100. the system multiplied the available quantity in the base unit of measure with the inventory correction factor (total) in order to plan materials on the basis of the active ingredient. The quantity is displayed in proportion units for the actual value counted in the batches.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2 Correct stock with regard to Materials Planning 1-2-1 Current stock/requirements list for material AI-1000-0## in plant 1100. Choose ENTER so that the system can create the additional column for displaying the available quantity in proportion units. For MRP purposes. The available quantities are correct in both units of measure. enter LW1 (=proportion unit). (C) SAP AG LO955 19-24 . Only non-valuated batches are included at the planned value in this total. Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch-specific Units of Measure → Determine Inventory Correction Factors Field name or data type Material Plant Online processing With list output List output Values AI-1000-0## 1100 Set at Process Activate indicator Set at Display batch This report shows the inventory correction factor in total and the inventory correction factor for each batch. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock/Requirements List MRP uses only the base unit of measure. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock/Requirements List In the first field for units.

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-2-4 Stock overview Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Environment → Stock → Stock overview or Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Stock → Stock overview The warehouse stocks are not affected by the inventory correction. (C) SAP AG LO955 19-25 .SAP . The stock overview shows the actual stock levels in all units of measure that have been defined.

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Data Concept in Product Quantity Management

Contents:
The Central Unit of Measure for Product Quantities Relationship Between Units of Measure Maintenance of Units of Measurement in Customizing User-defined Calculation Linking of Master Data Material Master Maintenance The Product Quantity in the Specification Classification Maintenance in the Material Master Maintaining Units of Measurement in the Mat. Master Activating Product Quantity Management
© SAP AG 1999

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-1

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Product Quantity Management: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Carry out the steps necessary to maintain data in product quantity management Explain how units of measure are defined and how to convert quantities from one unit into another Create units of measure and define them as product units Describe the how product quantity management is integrated with batch management Maintain quantity characteristics as class characteristics
© SAP AG 1999

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-2

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Product Quantity Management: Overview Diagram
Batch Specification and Quality Management

Batch

Active Ingredient Prices

Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. Management Design and Data Concept
© SAP AG 1999

Act. and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod. Quantity - Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers

Batch

Summary

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-3

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Product Quantity Management: Business Scenario

A company produces and stores steel beams in the base unit of measure "kilogram". The beams vary slightly in length, and thus also in weight. It should also be possible to show the stock of this material as the number of beams on hand (that is to say, in the unit "piece"). In the same way, all other Logistics applications should be able to use this material in the unit of measure "piece". In addition, the correct weight should be assigned to each piece of this material (that is, to each individual beam).

© SAP AG 1999

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-4

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

The Central Unit of Measure for Product Quantities

Product unit
BOM

Sales

Inventory mgmt

Purchasing

C B A B

B

© SAP AG 1999

The product unit runs like a thread through the applications and is used to replicate the alternative unit of measure of a material in a batch. The conversion ratio between the product unit and the base unit of measure is continuously available and can be displayed by each of the relevant applications. Unlike in Active Ingredient Management, when you make a specification in the product unit, the entire stock - not just some of the materials in the batch - is assigned with the batch-specific conversion factor and can be displayed in alternative units of measure. In Logistics you may thus enter the alternative product unit instead of the base unit of measure.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-5

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Relationship Between Units of Measure

Product unit Ratio

Piece PC
Weight per piece

KPP

=
Base unit of measure Kilogram

KG

© SAP AG 1999

The base unit of measure is the leading unit of measure for a material. If an entry is made in the product unit, the system converts this to the base unit of measure before posting. The product unit relates to the entire stock of a batch. If there are several alternative units of measure which may have different ratios to the base unit depending on the specific batch in question, different product units must be used to represent the alternatives. The conversion formula for conversions between the product unit and the base unit of measure is stored in the form of a ratio. This ratio constitutes a separate unit of measurement. In this example, the material is displayed in pieces as well as in the base unit of measure KG. PC has been defined as the product unit. Conversion from the base unit of measure KG is carried out on a batch-specific basis. This ratio is recorded in the unit of measurement KPP (kilogram per piece).

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-6

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Maint. of Units of Measurement in Customizing

KG PC Units of meas.

Kilogram Pieces/steel beams

Dimension Weight

KPP Weight per piece (steel beam)

Nondimensional

Should be treated as...

PC Pieces/steel beams Product units
Alternative product unit

© SAP AG 1999

All units of measurement to be used in product quantity management must have previously been defined in Customizing. Units of measurement to be used as product units should not be assigned to a dimension. The role of the product unit is assigned to a unit of measurement in Customizing for Product Quantity Management. Stocks of the material can be shown in this unit. Quantity conversions are carried out on a batch-specific basis from the base unit of measure KG. Some of the most common units of measurement for the product unit are supplied with the standard system. However, a self-chosen definition for an alternative unit of measure can be entered as the unit of measurement and designated an allowed product unit at any time. To facilitate conversion into a standard unit of measure, the self-defined unit of measurement is assigned a reference.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-7

(C) SAP AG LO955 20-8 . Example The quantity in the product unit PC is converted to the quantity in the base unit of measure KG on a batch-specific basis. Define the unit of measure in such a way that the characteristic value will generally be greater than 1.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management User-defined Calculation Base unit of measure = KG Product unit = PC Calculation Define base quantity from product quantity Calculation Define product quantity from base quantity KPP KG/PC © SAP AG 1999 PPK PC/KG Define the conversion factor in such a way that the result is > 1. there are two ways of defining the unit of measure for this characteristic: On the basis of the product unit or on the basis of the base unit of measure. This ratio is recorded in the unit of measurement KPP (kilo per pc) or PPK (pc per kilo). To ensure that the characteristic value (measured in KPP or PPK) delivers plausible results for the product unit.SAP .

(C) SAP AG LO955 20-9 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Linking of Master Data Characteristic weight per pc A A A Batch 3 Batch 1 Batch 2 Batch class Specification passed on Material © SAP AG 1999 The ratio between the product unit and the base unit of measure is stored in a batch characteristic and thus becomes part of the specification. The material transfers the information to its batches.SAP .

(C) SAP AG LO955 20-10 . Characteristics with this view are recognized during material master maintenance. KPP Batch class KG <=> PC © SAP AG 1999 Product unit characteristics are assigned the special view 'S' within the batch class. Ratio KPP Characteristic weight per pc Unit of meas.SAP . The information for conversion beween product unit and base unit of measure is adopted in the material master.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Material Master Maintenance Material master View S= Subst.

1A 3. (C) SAP AG LO955 20-11 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management The Product Quantity in the Specification Material master Origin USA.SAP . Switzerland Weight per pc 120 . the material passes on its specification to the batch.1B © SAP AG 1999 In Batch Management in the R/3 System. either it is mandatory for the batch values to lie within the limits defined in the material master or these values are merely taken as defaults from that source.125 KPP Test certificate 3. the same logic applies. Depending on the system settings. The exact product quantities in the individual batches are checked against the data in the material master. Since the product quantity characteristic is part of the specification of the material and its individual batches.1B Batch Origin USA Weight 120 KPP Test certificate 3.

SAP . The planned value in the material master should be a mean value within the expected batch conversion factors. The relevant characteristic for conversion must be defined as a single value.1C © SAP AG 1999 The product unit characteristic is allocated to the batch class and a value is assigned to it in the material master.125 KPP Test certificate . You have to enter a discrete value for the planned conversion factor. (C) SAP AG LO955 20-12 .3.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Classification Maintenance in the Material Master View: Classification Material Origin USA Switzerland Class type: Batches Class for ‘steel beams’ Weight per pc 120 .1A .3.3. with no interval values.1B .

unit PC GK <=> L X 1 ProductUn <=> PC <=> Y 120 Base UoM KG © SAP AG 1999 After the classification view has been maintained. Master View: Proportion/product unit of measure UoM Kilogram / pc Char.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Maintaining Units of Measurement in Mat. the system uses the planned value from the material master. The planned value specifies the assumed conversion ratio between the product quantity and the base unit of measure in the characteristic unit of measurement.SAP . The planned value for the conversion between product quantiy and base unit of measure is transferred to the units of measure table automatically. Weight per pc Material Pl. You must complete the information in the Proportion/Product Unit view: The system expects a planned value for the conversion to the base unit of measure. If the concrete product quantity of a batch is not known for a certain transaction. any product quantity characteristics are known to the system. (C) SAP AG LO955 20-13 . value 120 KPP Prop.

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Activating Product Quantity Management

Material

Activate product qty management?
Yes

© SAP AG 1999

You can make several Customizing settings for Product Quantity Management in the system before the component is activated. After the component is activated, the product quantity data is ready to be maintained in the material master.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-14

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Product Quantity Management: Summary

You are now able to: Carry out the steps necessary to maintain data in product quantity management Explain how units of measure are defined and how to convert quantities from one unit into another Create units of measure and define them as product units Describe the how product quantity management is integrated with batch management Maintain product quantities as class characteristics

© SAP AG 1999

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-15

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Exercises
Unit: Topic: Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Defining and Using Product Units

At the conclusion this exercise, you will be able to: • Create your own units of measurement and define them as conversion ratios • Create characteristics to describe a product quantity and maintain batch classes • Extend the batch classification in the material master • Use product units and maintain planned values • Track warehouse stocks and available quantities in the product unit and base unit of measure in the system A material Steel beam, managed in the base unit kilogram, consists of individual pieces that vary in length. Each beam (piece) is roughly 2 meters long and weighs 20 kilograms. Slight variations in the length of the pieces mean that the weight per piece also varies. In Inventory Management, approximate information in the form of a fixed conversion ratio at material level is not enough. Each batch requires an exact, individual conversion ratio. You want to achieve this objective with the aid of Product Quantity Management.

1-1

Create unit of measurement (for the characteristic describing the ratio of the product quantity to the base unit)
Create your own unit of measurement. It should then be used to carry out conversions between the physical quantity and the product unit of measure. You will use this unit to measure the ratio kilogram/piece. The new unit of measurement should be nondimensional. Enter a key ending with your group number (for example, U##). The new entry should be defined with 3 decimals and be rounded to three decimal places. The entry of an ISO code on the Details screen for the unit of measurement is not mandatory.

1-2

Define product unit Verify whether the unit of measure piece can be used as a product unit.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-16

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

1-3

Define ratio unit
Define the ratio between physical quantity and product quantity for the unit of measurement from 1-1 [U##]. Define the relationship of the unit of measure piece (as the product unit) and kilogram (as the base unit of measure) to the unit of measure U##. Define the ratio in such a way that the characteristic value will normally be a number greater than 1. 5

1-4

Create characteristic
In the classification system, create a characteristic that satisfies the following requirements:

• • • • •

The key should end with your group number. The conversion ratio between piece and kilogram should be clearly defined in the characteristic description. The status should be released. The data type should be numerical. The characteristic value assignment should consist of a single value. In the previous exercise, you defined a unit of measurement for a conversion ratio between physical quantity and product quantity.

• • • •

Use this unit of measurement as the unit for your characteristic. The characteristic should have three places before and three after the decimal point. Define a value interval for the characteristic (1 piece weighs roughly 20 KG). Allow the characteristic for class types 023 and 022. 1-5 Assign the characteristic to a class Create a new class PM## for steel beams. Note that the substance view has to be available at header level so that a planned value can be stored at material level for product quantities or active ingredients. Assign your new characteristic to the class and think about the substance view at characteristic level too.

5 For example, if 1 PC = 100 KG, then the quotient is best defined with KG/ST. Since KG is the base unit of measure, you choose Define calculation of base quantity from product quantity.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-17

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

1-6

Create a new material. You can use the copying facility. The reference material is Y-351. Create a new finished product PM-1000-0## for plant 1100. Adopt the views Basic Data 1, Classification, Purchasing and Accounting 1 from the reference material. Make the following changes:

• •

The short text is "2 meter steel beam". Delete the assignment to a batch class. Edit the views you have chosen and then save. 1-7 Maintain product quantity for a material Change your material PM-1000-0##. Choose the Classification and Purchasing views. 1-7-1 1-7-2 In the Classification view, assign your new class PM## and assign a plausible value range to the characteristic. From the Purchasing screen, go to the additional data and choose the proportion/product unit view. Enter the planned value of 20 kg per piece. Also go to the additional view Units of Measure. Check the conversion ratio for the planned value.

1-7-3

1-8

Post a goods receipt without a purchase order Your material is delivered without a purchase order. Enter an other goods receipt for a quantity of 100 pieces in a new batch. The weight per piece differs from the planned value.

1-9

Display the material document. Call up the item details. To display the relation between piece and kilogram in the batch, choose Goto → More functions → Quantity conversion. Call up the current stock/requirements list for material PM-1000-0##. Also activate the display of the available quantity in the product unit.

1-10

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-18

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Solutions
Unit: Topic: Data Concept in Product Quantity Management Defining and Using Product Units

1-1

Create unit of measurement (for the characteristic describing the ratio of the product quantity to the base unit) Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto → SAP Reference IMG) Global Settings → Check units of measurement Pushbutton Units of measure (nondimensional) Unit of measurement - Create Field name or data type Internal unit of measurement Commercial format Technical format Unit of measurement text, commercial Unit of measurement text, technical Decimal places Rounding to decimal places Values U## U## U## For example, KG/PC For example, KG/PC 3 3

1-2

Define product unit Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto → SAP Reference IMG) Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure → Edit Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure The unit of measure piece is listed. It can thus be used as a proportion unit or product unit.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-19

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

1-3

Define ratio unit Customizing (Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit Project. Goto → SAP Reference IMG) Logistics - General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Unit of Measure → Product Quantity Conversion → Define Calculation of Base Quantity from Product Quantity Pushbutton New entry Field name or data type Unit of measurement of characteristic Base unit of measure
Batch-specific UoM

Values U## KG PC

1-4

Create characteristic Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics or Logistics → Central Functions → Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics Note the instructions in the exercise text, in particular: Field name or data type Unit of measurement of characteristic No. of characters
Decimal places Values

Values U## 6 3 17 - 25 U##

1-5

Assign active ingredient characteristic to class Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Classification System → Master Data → Classes or Logistics → Central Functions → Classification System → Master Data → Classes Class → Create

(C) SAP AG

LO955

20-20

SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 20-21 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Field name or data type Class Description Application view Values PM## Class for steel beams S See exercise 1-4 S Characteristic Application view 1-6 Create new material Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Create or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Create Field name or data type Material Industry Material type Template Views Views Values PM-1000-0## Mechanical engineering Finished product Y-351 Values Basic data 1 Classification Purchasing Accounting 1 Organizational levels Plant Field name or data type Material short text Class assignment Values (new material and template) 1100 Values 2 meter steel beam Delete Edit all the views you have chosen and then save.

Enter B in the Units meas. assign the class PM## and assign values for the active ingredient characteristic (for example. 18 to 22 U##). under Additional data. The conversion is carried out at the planned value of 1 piece/20 KG. use field.SAP . Field name or data type Planned value Proportion/product unit Values 20 U## ( = KG/PC) PC 1-7-3 In the Proportion/Product Unit view. choose the Proportion/Product Unit view. Enter the required data. (C) SAP AG LO955 20-22 . click the tab page button and choose Units of measure. 1-7-2 In the Basic Data view.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-7 Maintain product quantity for a material Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Field name or data type Material Views Plant Values PM-1000-0## Classification Purchasing 1100 1-7-1 In the Classification view.

and PC (=product unit) in the second. with an average weight of 19 KG/PC. Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock/Requirements List Enter kilogram (= base unit of measure) in the first field for units. The available quantities are shown correctly in both units of measure. 19 or 22 U## 1-9 Display material document Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Material Document → Display Call up the item details.SAP . (C) SAP AG LO955 20-23 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management 1-8 Goods receipt without purchase order Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management→ Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → Other Field name or data type Movement type Plant Storage location Material Quantity Batch number Active ingredient proportion Values 501 1100 0001 PM-1000-0## 100 pieces Any Not 20 U## For example. 1-10 Current stock/requirements list for material PM-1000-0## in plant 1100. Goto → Additional functions → Quantity conversion The conversion ratio shows that the batch contains 100 pc steel beams. Choose ENTER to get the system to generate the additional column for displaying the available quantity in the product unit.

SAP .Stock Transfer Contents: Quantity Conversion with Product Unit Quantity Conversion in Inventory Management Stock Transfer – Cases Stock Transfer with Product Unit © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 21-1 .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Product Units .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Product Units of Measure: Unit Objectives At the conclusion of this unit. © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 21-2 . you will be able to: Carry out stock transfers involving batches to which varying conversion factors apply for the conversion of quantities from the base unit of measure into an alternative unit and vice versa.

Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 21-3 . and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod. Quantity .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Product Units of Measure: Overview Diagram Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act.SAP .

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Product Units of Measure: Business Scenario

Again and again, your enterprise is faced with the situation in which stocks of a material handled in batches have to be transferred to other batch stocks whose conversion factor between the alternative and base units of measure differs from that of the batch from which the transfer is made.

© SAP AG 1999

(C) SAP AG

LO955

21-4

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Quantity Conversion with Product Unit

Status 3.0

• • • •

The conversion factor between alternative unit of measure and base unit of measure is defined at material level. All batches of the material have this conversion factor.

as of 4.0
The conversion factors that are defined for all batches of the material are planned values. The conversion factors of the individual batches are defined when the batch is created and cannot subsequently be changed They represent the exact value or an average value. All goods movements are carried out with this conversion factor.

© SAP AG 1999

Goal: You should ensure that a material does not have to be created for every dimension. Products that differ only in dimension and in a few other characteristics should be grouped under one material number. This reduces the data volume and makes maintenance easier. In Release 3.0, the conversion factor between the alternative unit of measure and the base unit of measure is defined at material level. In the standard system from 4.0 onwards, you can manage products with different conversion factors as batches under one material number.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

21-5

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Quantity Conversion in Inventory Management

Sections, steel sheets

Stockkeeping unit: Batch unit: Batch properties: - Fusion number - Origin - Certificate - Length (!) 6000 mm
Fixed batch conversion factor

KG PC

© SAP AG 1999

Scenario: The conversion factor is specified for a batch. All pieces are roughly the same weight. All goods movements are carried out with the conversion factor for this batch.

(C) SAP AG

LO955

21-6

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Stock Transfer – Cases

Issuing batch

Receiving batch Existing batch, same conversion factor

Existing batch, different conversion factor

New batch

© SAP AG 1999

Stock transfers between batches with different conversion factors in one or more product units are fundamentally possible (T160M). The transferred quantity is checked for errors after the decimal point with the conversion factor of the receiving batch. Example: Numbers of pieces are defined as whole numbers. Weight per piece, issuing batch 300 kg Weight per piece, receiving batch 330 kg Stock transfer of 300 kg = 0.91 pc Error after decimal point Stock transfer of 330 kg = 1.0 pc OK

(C) SAP AG

LO955

21-7

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Stock Transfer with Product Unit

Issuing batch Coil1 Weight per pc Ø 300 kg (e.g. from GR) Weight per pc 310 kg Weight per pc 310 kg

Receiving batch Coil2 Weight per pc 310 kg

Receiving batch Coil3 Weight per pc 280 kg

Weight per pc 280 kg

The user wants to transfer the lighter piece to an appropriate batch He or she has to manually enter another transfer posting line for the remaining quantity in the segment

© SAP AG 1999

Appendix: If you change the conversion factor for a batch, you cannot subsequently post a reversal for this batch, as it would result in inconsistencies. Example of problem with reversal of a goods movement: Goods receipt of 3 pc 900 kg (weight per pc 300kg) Goods issue of 1 pc 300 kg (weight per pc 300 kg) Stock transfer of 1 pc @ 280 kg Remaining stock in batch of 1 pc 320 kg Conversion factor is changed Reversal of goods issue (300 kg = 0.94 pc cannot be posted due to error after decimal point)

(C) SAP AG

LO955

21-8

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Summary

You are now able to: Carry out stock transfers involving two batches each having a different conversion factor for the conversion of quantities from the base unit of measure into an alternative unit or vice versa

© SAP AG 1999

(C) SAP AG

LO955

21-9

SAP - Knowledge Management

[MM]

LO955 Batch Management

Summary (1)

Introduction

Availability Check for Batches

?

Batch

Master Data

Batch Determination

Batch

Batch Levels

Batch

Price Determination

XXXX + YYY = ZZZZ

Batch Specification

Batch

Shelf Life Expiration Date

29

Batch Status Management
© SAP AG 1999

Batch Where-used List
Batch
Batch

(C) SAP AG

LO955

22-1

Quantity .Design and Data Concept Product Units of Measure Stock Transfers Batch Summary (C) SAP AG LO955 22-2 . Management Design and Data Concept © SAP AG 1999 Act.Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Summary (2) Batch Specification and Quality Management Batch Active Ingredient Prices Appendix: Batch Creation in Batch Process Manufacturing Optimized Batch Processing Batch-specific Units of Measure Integration of Batchspecific Units of Measure Active Ingred. and Planned Values of AI Proportions Prod.SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Recommended Follow-up Activities Go through the exercises using IDES data or your own data Read on-line documentation Read IMG documentation Read release notes © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 22-3 .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Appendix Contents: Menu Paths © SAP AG 1999 (C) SAP AG LO955 23-1 .SAP .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Frequently-used Menu Paths Master Data Activity Material master record Menu Path Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Create|Change|Display or Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Material Master → Material → Create|Change|Display Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch → Create|Change|Display or Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Batch → Create|Change|Display Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch-specific Units of Measure → Standard Price → Create|Change|Display Batch master record Valuation record for active ingredient management Inventory Management Activity Goods receipt | Transfer posting | Goods issue Current stock/requirements list Material documents Menu Path Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt|Transfer Posting|Goods Issue Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock/Requirements List Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Material Document → Change|Display Classification System (C) SAP AG LO955 23-2 .

SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Activity Class Menu Path Logistics → Central Functions → Classification → Master Data → Classes or Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Classification System → Master Data → Classes Logistics → Central Functions → Classification → Master Data → Characteristics or Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Classification System → Master Data → Characteristics Characteristic Quality Inspection Activity Maintain material specification Menu Path Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Planning for Material → Inspection Planning → Material Specification → Edit|Display or Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Planning → Inspection Planning → Material Specification → Edit|Display Maintain master inspection Logistics → Central Functions → Batch characteristic Management → Environment → Quality Planning for Material → Basic Data → Inspection Characteristic → Create|Change|Display Enter result Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording or Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Result → For Operation|For Inspection Point → Record|Change|Display Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment LO955 23-3 Enter usage reason (C) SAP AG .

Process → Process Order → Process order → Create|Change|Display|Release LO955 23-4 (C) SAP AG .SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Activity Menu Path → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording or Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection Inspection Lot → Usage Decision → Record|Change|Display Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Environment → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing → Create|Change|Display or Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Inspection Lot → Editing → Create|Change|Display Inspection lot SD Activity Sales order Create delivery Menu Path Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create|Change|Display Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Subsequent functions → Outbound Delivery Production Activity Production order Menu Path Logistics → Production → Production Control → Order → Create|Change|Display Production Planning Activity Process order Menu Path Logistics → Production .

General → Batch Management → Batch Number Assignment (C) SAP AG LO955 23-5 .Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Create|Change|Display Batch Where-used List Activity Display batch where-used list in Inventory Management Menu Path Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Tools → Batch Usage → Pick-Up List|Display or Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Batch Where-Used List → Display Define Batch Search Strategies in the Application Activity Menu Path Logistics → Central Functions → Batch Management → Batch Determination → Batch Search Strategy → For Inventory Management|For Production Order|For Process Order|For Sales and Distribution|For Warehouse Management → Create|Change|Display Customizing Activity Menu Path Tools → Accelerated SAP → Customizing → Edit Project Implementation Projects → SAP Implementation Guide (IMG) Main menu paths for setting up Batch Management Logistics .General → Batch Management → Specify Batch Level and Activate Status Management Logistics .SAP .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Activity Master recipe Menu Path Logistics → Production .

General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Define Sort Rules Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Define Selection Classes Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Batch Search Procedure Definition Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Maintain Batch Allocation Strategy Number Ranges Customizing for Active Ingredient Management Activity (C) SAP AG Menu Path LO955 23-6 .General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Activate Automatic Batch Determination in SD Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Access Sequences Logistics .General → Batch Management → Creation of New Batches Logistics .Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Activity Menu Path Logistics .General → Batch Management → BatchSpecific Material Units of Measure Batch Determination Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch Where-Used List Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch Valuation Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Strategy Types Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Batch Search Procedure Allocation and Check Activation Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Condition Tables Logistics .SAP .General → Batch Management → Batch Status Management Logistics .

Knowledge Management [MM] LO955 Batch Management Activity Define units of measurement Proportion units for Active Ingredient Management Menu Path General Settings → Check units of measurement → Units of measurement Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure → Edit Batch-Specific Material Unit of Measure Logistics .General → Batch Management → BatchSpecific Material Units of Measure → Edit BatchSpecific Material Unit of Measure Logistics .General → Batch Management → BatchSpecific Material Units of Measure → Calculate Proportional Factors → Define Calculation of Proportion Quantity from Base Quantity|Define Calculation of Base Quantity from Proportion Quantity Customizing for Product Quantity Management Activity Define units of measure Product units for Active Ingredient Management Menu Path General Settings → Check units of measurement → Units of measurement Logistics .General → Batch Management → Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure → Product Quantities Conversion → Define Calculation of Product Quantity from Base Quantity| Define Calculation of Base Quantity from Product Quantity (C) SAP AG LO955 23-7 .SAP .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful